Mclass

M-Class
Operator's Manual
M-Class Operator's Manual
É1665847681JËÍ
1665847681
Order no. 6515 0459 13 Part no. 1665847681 Edition A 2014
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols i Practical tips or further information that Publication details
Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you. Internet
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol indicates an
Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed. Further information about Mercedes-Benz
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X Several of these symbols in vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
succession indicate an instruction on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
with several steps. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are (Y page) This symbol tells you where you http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
can find more information about a only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
topic.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
Johnson Controls. Editorial office
an instruction that is continued on
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
the next page.
trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
multifunction display/COMAND or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
Harman International Industries. display. without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005
Corporation. The FreeType Project
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights
XM Radio Inc. reserved.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
As at 15.10.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1665847681 É1665847681JËÍ

Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 79
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119
Climate control ................................. 137
Driving and parking .......................... 155
On-board computer and displays .... 261
Stowage and features ...................... 331
Maintenance and care ...................... 363
Breakdown assistance ..................... 379
Wheels and tires ............................... 397
Technical data ................................... 441

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 290
115 V socket ...................................... 348 Function/notes ................................ 70
12 V socket Adaptive Damping System
see Sockets see ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
360° camera Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function/notes ............................. 225 Display message ............................ 298
4ETS Function/notes ............................. 125
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Switching on/off ........................... 126
Traction System) Switching on/off (on-board
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel computer) ...................................... 275
drive) .................................................. 246 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 449
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
A Function/notes ............................. 207
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air bags
Display message ............................ 283 Display message ............................ 293
Function/notes ................................ 67 Front air bag (driver, front
Important safety notes .................... 67 passenger) ....................................... 46
Warning lamp ................................. 319 Important safety notes .................... 44
Activating/deactivating cooling Knee bag .......................................... 47
with air dehumidification ................. 145 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Active Blind Spot Assist indicator lamp .................................. 49
Activating/deactivating (on- Safety guidelines ............................. 43
board computer) ............................ 273 Side impact air bag .......................... 47
Display message ............................ 306 Window curtain air bag .................... 48
Function/information .................... 237 Air-conditioning system
Trailer towing ................................. 240 see Climate control
Active Curve System Air filter (display message) .............. 301
Display message ............................ 303 AIR FLOW ........................................... 147
Function/notes ............................. 208 AIRMATIC package
Active Driving Assistance package . 237 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 207
Active Lane Keeping Assist Function/notes ............................. 207
Activating/deactivating (on- Level control .................................. 209
board computer) ............................ 273 Air vents
Display message ............................ 305 Glove box ....................................... 153
Function/information .................... 241 Important safety notes .................. 152
Trailer towing ................................. 243 Rear ............................................... 153
Active light function ......................... 125 Setting ........................................... 152
Active Parking Assist Setting the center air vents ........... 152
Display message ............................ 306 Setting the side air vents ............... 153
Exiting a parking space .................. 219 Alarm system
Function/notes ............................. 216 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Important safety notes .................. 216 Ambient lighting
Parking .......................................... 218 Setting the brightness (on-board
Towing a trailer .............................. 220 computer) ...................................... 275
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 74 Setting the color (on-board
computer) ...................................... 275

Index 5
AMG adaptive sport suspension Automatic transmission

system ................................................ 211 Automatic drive program ............... 170
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 278 Changing gear ............................... 168
Anti-lock braking system DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 165
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 312
Anti-theft alarm system Drive program display .................... 165
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Driving tips .................................... 168
Approach/departure angle .............. 190 Emergency running mode .............. 173
Ashtray ............................................... 346 Engaging drive position .................. 167
Assistance display (on-board Engaging neutral ............................ 166
computer) .......................................... 272 Engaging park position
Assistance menu (on-board automatically ................................. 166
computer) .......................................... 272 Engaging reverse gear ................... 166
ASSYST PLUS Engaging the park position ............ 165
Displaying a service message ........ 369 Kickdown ....................................... 168
Hiding a service message .............. 369 Manual drive program .................... 170
Notes ............................................. 368 Manual drive program (AMG
Resetting the service interval vehicles) ........................................ 171
display ........................................... 369 Manual drive program (vehicles
Service message ............................ 368 with the ON&OFFROAD package) . . 171
Special service requirements ......... 369 Overview ........................................ 165
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Problem (malfunction) ................... 173
Activating/deactivating ................... 76 Program selector button ................ 169
Function ........................................... 76 Pulling away ................................... 160
Switching off the alarm .................... 76 Starting the engine ........................ 159
ATTENTION ASSIST Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169
Activating/deactivating ................. 273 Trailer towing ................................. 168
Display message ............................ 301 Transmission position display ........ 165
Function/notes ............................. 229 Transmission positions .................. 167
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 269 Automatic transmission
Audio system emergency mode ............................... 173
see separate operating instructions Axle load, permissible (trailer
Authorized Centers towing) ............................................... 456
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center B
see Qualified specialist workshop Bag hook ............................................ 337
Authorized workshops Ball coupling
see Qualified specialist workshop Installing ........................................ 255
AUTO lights Removing ....................................... 259
Display message ............................ 298 Storing ........................................... 259
see Lights BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
stop function) .................................... 162 PLUS) .................................................... 68
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Battery (SmartKey)
start/stop function) .......................... 162 Checking .......................................... 83
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 120 Important safety notes .................... 83
Replacing ......................................... 83

6 Index
Battery (vehicle) C
Charging ........................................ 388
Display message ............................ 299 California
Important safety notes .................. 385 Important notice for retail
Jump starting ................................. 389 customers and lessees .................... 25
Overview ........................................ 385 Calling up a malfunction
Belt force limiter see Display messages
Activation ......................................... 59 Car
Function ........................................... 59 see Vehicle
Blind Spot Assist Care
Activating/deactivating ................. 273 Carpets .......................................... 377
Display message ............................ 306 Car wash ........................................ 370
Notes/function .............................. 233 Display ........................................... 375
Trailer towing ................................. 235 Exhaust pipe .................................. 374
see Active Blind Spot Assist Exterior lights ................................ 373
BlueTEC Gear or selector lever .................... 376
Adding DEF .................................... 177 Interior ........................................... 375
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 447 Matte finish ................................... 372
Brake Assist Night View Assist Plus ................... 375
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Notes ............................................. 370
Brake fluid Paint .............................................. 372
Display message ............................ 289 Plastic trim .................................... 376
Notes ............................................. 449 Power washer ................................ 371
Brake lamps Rear view camera .......................... 374
Changing bulbs .............................. 132 Roof lining ...................................... 377
Display message ............................ 296 Seat belt ........................................ 377
Brakes Seat cover ..................................... 376
ABS .................................................. 67 Sensors ......................................... 374
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 Steering wheel ............................... 376
BAS .................................................. 67 Trim pieces .................................... 376
BAS PLUS ........................................ 68 Washing by hand ........................... 371
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 449 Wheels ........................................... 373
Display message ............................ 283 Windows ........................................ 373
Driving tips .................................... 184 Wiper blades .................................. 373
High-performance brake system .... 185 Wooden trim .................................. 376
Important safety notes .................. 184 Cargo compartment cover
Maintenance .................................. 185 Notes/how to use ......................... 338
Parking brake ................................ 180 Cargo compartment enlargement
Warning lamp ................................. 318 Important safety notes .................. 335
Breakdown Cargo compartment floor
see Flat tire Opening/closing ............................ 342
see Towing away Stowage well (under) ..................... 342
Bulbs Cargo net
see Changing bulbs Attaching ....................................... 340
Important safety information ......... 340
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 337
Car keys
see SmartKey

Index 7
Car wash (care) ................................. 370 Maximum cooling .......................... 149

CD player/CD changer (on-board Notes on using dual-zone
computer) .......................................... 270 automatic climate control .............. 141
Center console Overview of systems ...................... 138
Lower section .................................. 37 Problems with cooling with air
Upper section .................................. 36 dehumidification ............................ 146
Central locking Problem with the rear window
Automatic locking (on-board defroster ........................................ 151
computer) ...................................... 276 Rear control panel ......................... 142
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 80 Refrigerant ..................................... 451
Changing bulbs Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 452
Brake lamps ................................... 132 Setting the air distribution ............. 148
High-beam headlamps ................... 131 Setting the airflow ......................... 148
Important safety notes .................. 129 Setting the air vents ...................... 152
Low-beam headlamps .................... 130 Setting the climate mode (AIR
Overview of bulb types .................. 129 FLOW) ............................................ 147
Parking lamps ................................ 131 Setting the temperature ................ 147
Removing/replacing the cover Switching air-recirculation mode
(front wheel arch) .......................... 130 on/off ............................................ 151
Side marker lamps ......................... 131 Switching on/off ........................... 144
Standing lamps (front) ................... 131 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 151
Child-proof locks Switching the rear window
Important safety notes .................... 65 defroster on/off ............................ 150
Rear doors ....................................... 66 Switching the ZONE function on/
Children off .................................................. 149
In the vehicle ................................... 60 Coat hooks ......................................... 340
Restraint systems ............................ 60 Cockpit
Special seat belt retractor ............... 63 Overview .......................................... 32
Child seat see Instrument cluster
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
anchors ............................................ 63 Operation/notes .............................. 69
Top Tether ....................................... 64 COMAND
Cigarette lighter ................................ 346 ON&OFFROAD menu ..................... 252
Cleaning see separate operating instructions
Mirror turn signal ........................... 373 COMAND display
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 374 Cleaning ......................................... 375
Climate control Combination switch .......................... 123
Automatic climate control (3-zone) 142 Combined cargo cover and net ........ 339
Controlling automatically ............... 146 Consumption statistics (on-board
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 145 computer) .......................................... 266
Defrosting the windows ................. 150 Convenience closing feature .............. 95
Defrosting the windshield .............. 149 Convenience opening feature ............ 95
Dual-zone automatic climate Coolant (engine)
control ........................................... 139 Checking the level ......................... 367
Important safety notes .................. 138 Display message ............................ 298
Indicator lamp ................................ 146 Filling capacity ............................... 451
Information on using 3-zone Important safety notes .................. 450
automatic climate control .............. 144 Temperature (on-board computer) . 278

8 Index
Temperature gauge ........................ 263 Filling capacity ............................... 448

Cooling Delayed switch-off
see Climate control Exterior lighting (on-board
Copyright ............................................. 30 computer) ...................................... 275
Cornering light function Interior lighting .............................. 276
Display message ............................ 295 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27
Function/notes ............................. 125 Diesel .................................................. 446
Crash-responsive emergency Differential locks (display message) 303
lighting ............................................... 129 Digital speedometer ......................... 267
Cruise control DIRECT SELECT lever
Activating ....................................... 192 see Automatic transmission
Activation conditions ..................... 192 Display messages
Cruise control lever ....................... 192 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 368
Deactivating ................................... 194 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 282
Display message ............................ 309 Driving systems ............................. 301
Driving system ............................... 191 Engine ............................................ 298
Function/notes ............................. 191 General notes ................................ 282
Important safety notes .................. 192 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 282
Storing and maintaining current KEYLESS-GO .................................. 315
speed ............................................. 192 Lights ............................................. 295
Cup holder Safety systems .............................. 283
Center console .............................. 344 SmartKey ....................................... 314
Important safety notes .................. 343 Tires ............................................... 310
Rear compartment ......................... 344 Vehicle ........................................... 312
Temperature controlled ................. 344 Distance recorder ............................. 266
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 28 see Odometer
Customer Relations Department ....... 28 see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 328
D Distance warning function
Activating/deactivating ................. 272
Dashboard
Function/notes ................................ 69
see Instrument cluster
Warning lamp ................................. 328
Dashboard lighting
DISTRONIC PLUS
see Instrument cluster lighting
Activating ....................................... 196
Data
Activation conditions ..................... 196
see Technical data
Cruise control lever ....................... 196
Daytime running lamps
Deactivating ................................... 200
Display message ............................ 297
Display message ............................ 307
Function/notes ............................. 120
Displays in the multifunction
Switching on/off (on-board
display ........................................... 201
computer) ...................................... 274
Driving tips .................................... 201
Dealerships
Function/notes ............................. 194
see Qualified specialist workshop Important safety notes .................. 195
Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Setting the specified minimum
DEF distance ......................................... 199
Adding ........................................... 177 Warning lamp ................................. 328
Display message ............................ 301

Index 9
Doors COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 69

Automatic locking (on-board Distance warning function ............... 69
computer) ...................................... 276 Electronic brake force distribution ... 74
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 88 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 71
Central locking/unlocking ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
(SmartKey) ....................................... 80 System) ........................................... 71
Control panel ................................... 40 Important safety information ........... 66
Display message ............................ 313 Overview .......................................... 66
Emergency locking ........................... 88 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 74
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 STEER CONTROL ............................. 76
Important safety notes .................... 86 Driving systems
Opening (from inside) ...................... 87 360°camera .................................. 225
Overview .......................................... 86 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 237
Power closing feature ...................... 88 Active Curve System ...................... 208
Downhill Speed Regulation Active Driving Assistance package 237
see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 241
Drinking and driving ......................... 182 Active Parking Assist ..................... 216
Drinks holder ADS ............................................... 207
see Cup holder AIRMATIC package ........................ 207
Drive program AMG adaptive sport suspension
Automatic ...................................... 170 system ........................................... 211
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 165 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 229
Manual ........................................... 170 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 233
Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 171 Cruise control ................................ 191
Manual (vehicles with the Display message ............................ 301
ON&OFFROAD package) ................ 171 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 194
Off-road program (vehicles with HOLD function ............................... 206
the ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 248 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 235
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 279 Level control (vehicles with
see On-road programs AIRMATIC package) ....................... 209
Driver's door Level control (vehicles with the
see Doors ON&OFFROAD package) ................ 202
Driving abroad On-road programs .......................... 243
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 370 PARKTRONIC ................................. 213
Symmetrical low beam .................. 120 Rear view camera .......................... 220
Driving in mountainous terrain Driving tips
Approach/departure angle ............ 190 Automatic transmission ................. 168
Driving lamps Brakes ........................................... 184
see Daytime running lamps Break-in period .............................. 156
Driving off-road DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 201
see Off-road driving Downhill gradient ........................... 184
Driving safety systems Drinking and driving ....................... 182
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 67 Driving abroad ............................... 120
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 74 Driving in winter ............................. 187
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 Driving on flooded roads ................ 186
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67 Driving on sand .............................. 190
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving on wet roads ...................... 186
PLUS) ............................................... 68 Driving over obstacles ................... 190

10 Index
Exhaust check ............................... 182 Electronic Stability Program

Fuel ................................................ 182 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General .......................................... 182 Emergency release
Hydroplaning ................................. 186 Driver's door .................................... 88
Icy road surfaces ........................... 187 Vehicle ............................................. 88
Limited braking efficiency on Emergency spare wheel
salted roads ................................... 184 General notes ................................ 436
Off-road driving .............................. 188 Important safety notes .................. 436
Off-road fording ............................. 186 Removing ....................................... 436
Snow chains .................................. 401 Storage location ............................ 436
Symmetrical low beam .................. 120 Technical data ............................... 438
Tire ruts ......................................... 190 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Towing a trailer .............................. 253 Function ........................................... 59
Traveling uphill ............................... 190 Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Wet road surface ........................... 184 Emergency unlocking
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Tailgate ............................................ 93
Display message ............................ 304 Emissions control
Function/notes ............................. 246 Service and warranty information .... 24
DVD audio Engine
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 270 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 325
DVD video Display message ............................ 298
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 270 ECO start/stop function ................ 161
Engine number ............................... 443
E Irregular running ............................ 164
EASY-ENTRY feature Jump-starting ................................. 389
Starting problems .......................... 164
Activating/deactivating ................. 277
Starting the engine with the
Function/notes ............................. 113
SmartKey ....................................... 159
EASY-EXIT feature
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 160
Crash-responsive ........................... 114
Switching off .................................. 180
Function/notes ............................. 113
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 394
Switching on/off ........................... 277
Engine electronics
EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 340
Problem (malfunction) ................... 164
EBD (electronic brake force
Engine oil
distribution)
Adding ........................................... 366
Display message ............................ 285
Additives ........................................ 449
Function/notes ................................ 74
Checking the oil level ..................... 365
ECO display
Checking the oil level using the
Function/notes ............................. 183
dipstick .......................................... 365
On-board computer ....................... 267
Display message ............................ 300
ECO start/stop function
Filling capacity ............................... 449
Automatic engine start .................. 162
Notes about oil grades ................... 448
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 162
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 365
Deactivating/activating ................. 163
Temperature (on-board computer) . 278
General information ....................... 161
Viscosity ........................................ 449
Important safety notes .................. 161
Introduction ................................... 161

Index 11
ESP® (Electronic Stability Fuel

Program) Additives ........................................ 446
AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 279 Consumption statistics .................. 266
Deactivating/activating ................... 72 Displaying the current
Display message ............................ 283 consumption .................................. 267
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 71 Displaying the range ...................... 267
Function/notes ................................ 71 Driving tips .................................... 182
General notes .................................. 71 Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 447
Important safety information ........... 72 Fuel gauge ............................... 33, 263
Trailer stabilization ........................... 73 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 445
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Low outside temperatures ............. 446
System) ................................................ 71 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 445
Exhaust check ................................... 182 Problem (malfunction) ................... 176
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 374 Quality (diesel) ............................... 446
Exterior lighting Refueling ........................................ 173
see Lights Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 445
Exterior mirrors Fuel filler flap
Adjusting ....................................... 114 Opening/closing ............................ 174
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 115 Fuel filter (display message) ............ 301
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 115 Fuel level
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 115 Calling up the range (on-board
Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 267
computer) ...................................... 277 Fuel tank
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 115 Capacity ........................................ 445
Setting ........................................... 115 Problem (malfunction) ................... 176
Storing settings (memory function) 117 Fuses
Storing the parking position .......... 116 Allocation chart ............................. 395
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 334 Before changing ............................. 395
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 395
F Fuse box in the engine
compartment ................................. 395
Filler cap Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 396
see Fuel filler flap Important safety notes .................. 394
First-aid kit ......................................... 380
Flat tire G
MOExtended tires .......................... 382
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 381 Garage door opener
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 383 Clearing the memory ..................... 361
see Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes .................. 359
Floormats ........................................... 362 Opening/closing the garage door .. 361
Folding the rear bench seat Programming (button in the rear-
forwards/back .................................. 335 view mirror) ................................... 359
Fording Gear indicator (on-board computer) 278
Off-road ......................................... 186 Genuine parts ...................................... 23
On flooded roads ........................... 186 Glove box ........................................... 333
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) ......................................... 419

12 Index
H Delayed switch-off (on-board

computer) ...................................... 276
Handbrake Emergency lighting ........................ 129
see Parking brake Manual control ............................... 128
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 124 Overview ........................................ 127
Headlamps Reading lamp ................................. 127
Cleaning system (function) ............ 125 Setting the brightness of the
Fogging up ..................................... 127 ambient lighting (on-board
see Automatic headlamp mode computer) ...................................... 275
Head restraints Setting the color of the ambient
Adjusting ....................................... 106 lighting (on-board computer) ......... 275
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107 J
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 108
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 108 Jack
Luxury ............................................ 107 Storage location ............................ 380
Heating Using ............................................. 423
see Climate control Jump-start (engine)
High-beam headlamps see Jump starting (engine)
Changing bulbs .............................. 131 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 389
Display message ............................ 296
Switching on/off ........................... 124 K
Hill start assist .................................. 161 KEYLESS-GO
HOLD function Convenience closing feature ............ 96
Deactivating ................................... 207 Display message ............................ 315
Display message ............................ 304 Locking ............................................ 81
Function/notes ............................. 206 Start/Stop button .......................... 158
Hood Starting the engine ........................ 160
Closing ........................................... 365 Unlocking ......................................... 81
Display message ............................ 313 Key positions
Important safety notes .................. 364 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 158
Opening ......................................... 364 SmartKey ....................................... 157
Hydroplaning ..................................... 186 Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 168
I Manual drive program .................... 172
Ignition lock Knee bag .............................................. 47
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 76 L
Indicator lamps Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps
Insect protection on the radiator .... 365 Lane detection (automatic)
Instrument cluster see Lane Keeping Assist
Overview .................................. 33, 263 Lane Keeping Assist
Warning and indicator lamps ... 34, 316 Activating/deactivating ................. 273
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 263 Display message ............................ 305
Interior lighting ................................. 127 Function/information .................... 235
Automatic control .......................... 128 see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Index 13
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 279 Switching the surround lighting

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat on/off (on-board computer) .......... 275
anchors ................................................ 63 Turn signals ................................... 123
Level control (display message) ...... 302 see Changing bulbs
Level control (vehicles with see Interior lighting
AIRMATIC package) Light sensor (display message) ....... 298
Basic settings ................................ 210 Loading guidelines ............................ 332
Function/notes ............................. 209 Locking
Important safety notes .................. 209 see Central locking
Level control (vehicles with the Locking (doors)
ON&OFFROAD package) Automatic ........................................ 88
Basic settings ................................ 203 Emergency locking ........................... 88
Function/notes ............................. 202 From inside (central locking
Important safety notes .................. 202 button) ............................................. 87
License plate lamp (display Locking centrally
message) ............................................ 296 see Central locking
Light function, active Locking verification signal (on-
Display message ............................ 297 board computer) ............................... 276
Lighting Low-beam headlamps
Light switch ................................... 120 Changing bulbs .............................. 130
Lights Display message ............................ 295
Activating/deactivating the Setting for driving abroad
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 276 (symmetrical) ................................. 120
Active light function ....................... 125 Switching on/off ........................... 121
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 120 LOW RANGE
Cornering light function ................. 125 Display message ............................ 304
Driving abroad ............................... 120 Off-road gear ................................. 249
Hazard warning lamps ................... 124 LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 249
High beam flasher .......................... 124 Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-
High-beam headlamps ................... 124 securing kit) ....................................... 341
Low-beam headlamps .................... 121 Lumbar support
Parking lamps ................................ 122 Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 108
Rear fog lamp ................................ 122 Luxury head restraints ..................... 107
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board M
computer) ...................................... 275
Setting the color of the ambient M+S tires ............................................ 400
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 275 Malfunction message
Standing lamps .............................. 123 see Display messages
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 372
Assist on/off ................................. 275 mbrace
Switching the daytime running Call priority .................................... 354
lamps on/off (on-board computer) 274 Display message ............................ 289
Switching the exterior lighting Downloading destinations
delayed switch-off on/off (on- (COMAND) ..................................... 354
board computer) ............................ 275 Downloading routes ....................... 358
Emergency call .............................. 351
General notes ................................ 350

14 Index
Geo fencing ................................... 358 N

Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 357
MB info call button ........................ 353 Navigation
Remote vehicle locking .................. 356 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 268
Roadside Assistance button .......... 353 see separate operating instructions
Search & Send ............................... 355 Night View Assist Plus
Self-test ......................................... 351 Activating/deactivating ................. 231
Speed alert .................................... 358 Cleaning ......................................... 375
System .......................................... 351 Problem (malfunction) ................... 233
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 359 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 156
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 357 O
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 356 Occupant Classification System
Mechanical key (OCS)
Function/notes ................................ 82 Faults ............................................... 53
Locking vehicle ................................ 88 Operation ......................................... 49
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88 System self-test ............................... 51
Memory card (audio) ......................... 270 Occupant safety
Memory function ............................... 117 Children in the vehicle ..................... 60
Message memory (on-board Important safety notes .................... 42
computer) .......................................... 282 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory
Messages occupant protection) ....................... 54
see Display messages OCS
Mirrors Faults ............................................... 53
see Exterior mirrors Operation ......................................... 49
see Rear-view mirror System self-test ............................... 51
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Odometer ........................................... 266
Mobile phone Off-road driving
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 270 Approach/departure angle ............ 454
Modifying the programming Checklist after driving off-road ...... 189
(SmartKey) ........................................... 81 Checklist before driving off-road .... 189
MOExtended tires .............................. 382 Fording depth ................................ 454
Mounting wheels General information ....................... 188
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 426 Important safety notes .................. 187
Mounting a new wheel ................... 425 Maximum gradient climbing ability 455
Raising the vehicle ......................... 423 Traveling uphill ............................... 190
Removing a wheel .......................... 425 Off-road programs (vehicles with
Securing the vehicle against the ON&OFFROAD package)
rolling away ................................... 422 Displays in the COMAND display ... 252
MP3 Function/notes ............................. 248
Operation ....................................... 270 Off-road program 1 ........................ 248
see separate operating instructions Off-road program 2 ........................ 249
Multifunction display Off-road system
Function/notes ............................. 265 4MATIC .......................................... 246
Permanent display ......................... 274 DSR ............................................... 246
Multifunction steering wheel LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 249
Operating the on-board computer . 264 Off-road 4ETS .................................. 72
Overview .......................................... 35

Index 15
Off-road ABS .................................... 67 Outside temperature display ........... 264

Off-road ESP® .................................. 73 Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Off-road programs (vehicles with Override feature
the ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 248 Rear side windows ........................... 66
Oil
see Engine oil P
On and Offroad menu (on-board
Paint code number ............................ 442
computer) .......................................... 278
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 372
On-board computer
Panic alarm .......................................... 42
AMG menu ..................................... 278
Panorama roof with power tilt/
Assistance menu ........................... 272
sliding panel
Audio menu ................................... 269
Opening/closing .............................. 99
Convenience submenu .................. 277
Opening/closing the roller
Displaying a service message ........ 369
sunblind ......................................... 100
Display messages .......................... 282
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 201
Resetting ....................................... 100
Factory settings submenu ............. 278
Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 97
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 274
Parking ............................................... 179
Lighting submenu .......................... 274
Menu overview .............................. 266
Parking brake ................................ 180
Message memory .......................... 282
Position of exterior mirror, front-
Navigation menu ............................ 268
passenger side ............................... 116
On and Offroad menu .................... 278
Rear view camera .......................... 220
Operation ....................................... 264
see PARKTRONIC
RACETIMER ................................... 279
Parking aid
Service menu ................................. 273
Active Parking Assist ..................... 216
Settings menu ............................... 274
see Exterior mirrors
Standard display ............................ 266
see PARKTRONIC
Telephone menu ............................ 270
Parking brake
Trip menu ...................................... 266
Vehicle submenu ........................... 276 Display message ............................ 286
Video DVD operation ..................... 270 Electric parking brake .................... 180
On-road programs Warning lamp ................................. 324
Parking lamps
AUTO program ............................... 244
Function/notes ............................. 243 Switching on/off ........................... 122
Snow program ............................... 245 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131
SPORT program ............................. 244 PARKTRONIC
Trailer program .............................. 245 Deactivating/activating ................. 215
Opening and closing the side trim Driving system ............................... 213
panels ................................................. 132 Function/notes ............................. 213
Operating safety Important safety notes .................. 213
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Problem (malfunction) ................... 216
Important safety notes .................... 26 Range of the sensors ..................... 214
Operating system Trailer towing ................................. 215
Warning display ............................. 214
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 24

16 Index
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Rear fog lamp

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 53 Switching on/off ........................... 122
Problems (malfunction) .................. 293 Rear seats
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Adjusting ....................................... 108
lamp ...................................................... 49 Rear view camera
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 376 Cleaning instructions ..................... 374
Power closing feature ......................... 88 Function/notes ............................. 220
Power washers .................................. 371 Switching on/off ........................... 221
Power windows Rear-view mirror
see Side windows Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 114
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Dipping (automatic) ....................... 115
protection) Rear window defroster
Display message ............................ 289 Problem (malfunction) ................... 151
Operation ......................................... 54 Switching on/off ........................... 150
PRE-SAFE® Brake Rear window wiper
Activating/deactivating ................. 272 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 134
Display message ............................ 291 Switching on/off ........................... 133
Function/notes ................................ 74 Refrigerant (air-conditioning
Warning lamp ................................. 328 system)
Program selector button .................. 169 Important safety notes .................. 451
Protection of the environment Refueling
General notes .................................. 23 Fuel gauge ............................... 33, 263
Pulling away Important safety notes .................. 173
Trailer ............................................ 160 Refueling process .......................... 174
Pulling away (automatic see Fuel
transmission) ..................................... 160 Remote control
Programming (garage door opener) 359
Q Reporting safety defects .................... 28
Reserve (fuel tank)
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28 see Fuel
Reserve fuel
R Display message ............................ 300
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 279 Warning lamp ................................. 325
Radar sensor system see Fuel
Activating/deactivating ................. 276 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 151
Display message ............................ 304 Restraint system
Radiator cover ................................... 365 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Radio System)
Selecting a station ......................... 269 Reversing feature
see separate operating instructions Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 98
Radio-controlled devices (installing) 362 Roller sunblinds ............................... 99
Radio-wave reception/ Side windows ................................... 94
transmission in the vehicle Sliding sunroof ................................. 98
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Tailgate ............................................ 90
Reading lamp ..................................... 127 Reversing lamps (display message) 297
Rear compartment Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25
Setting the air vents ...................... 153

Index 17
Roller sunblind Storing settings (memory function) 117

Panorama roof with power tilt/ Switching seat heating on/off ....... 109
sliding panel ..................................... 99 Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 110
Rear side windows ......................... 345 Securing hooks .................................. 338
Roof carrier ........................................ 343 Selector lever
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Cleaning ......................................... 376
guidelines) ......................................... 377 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 374
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 452 Service menu (on-board computer) . 273
Route (navigation) Service products
see Route guidance (navigation) Brake fluid ..................................... 449
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 268 Coolant (engine) ............................ 450
DEF special additives ..................... 447
S Engine oil ....................................... 448
Fuel ................................................ 444
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 60 Refrigerant (air-conditioning
Child restraint systems .................... 60 system) .......................................... 451
Occupant Classification System Washer fluid ................................... 451
(OCS) ............................................... 49 Settings
Safety system
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 278
see Driving safety systems On-board computer ....................... 274
Seat belts Setting the air distribution ............... 148
Adjusting the driver's and front- Setting the airflow ............................ 148
passenger seat belt ......................... 57
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 279
Adjusting the height ......................... 58
Side impact air bag ............................. 47
Belt force limiters ............................ 59
Side marker lamp (display
Cleaning ......................................... 377
message) ............................................ 297
Correct usage .................................. 55
Side marker lamps (changing bulbs) 131
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 59
Side windows
Fastening ......................................... 57
Cleaning ......................................... 373
Important safety guidelines ............. 55
Convenience closing feature ............ 95
Releasing ......................................... 58
Convenience opening feature .......... 95
Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Important safety information ........... 93
Switching belt adjustment on/off
Opening/closing .............................. 94
(on-board computer) ...................... 277
Overview .......................................... 93
Warning lamp ................................. 317
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 97
Warning lamp (function) ................... 58
Resetting ......................................... 96
Seats
Sliding sunroof
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106
Opening/closing .............................. 98
Cleaning the cover ......................... 376
Correct driver's seat position ........ 104
Resetting ......................................... 99
Folding the rear bench seat
see Panorama roof with power
forwards/back ............................... 335
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Overview ........................................ 105
Changing the battery ....................... 83
Seat heating problem .................... 110
Changing the programming ............. 81
Seat ventilation problem ................ 111

18 Index
Checking the battery ....................... 83 Steering wheel

Convenience closing feature ............ 96 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 112
Convenience opening feature .......... 95 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111
Display message ............................ 314 Button overview ............................... 35
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 80 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 264
Important safety notes .................... 80 Cleaning ......................................... 376
Loss ................................................. 85 Important safety notes .................. 111
Mechanical key ................................ 82 Paddle shifters ............................... 169
Overview .......................................... 80 Steering wheel heating .................. 112
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157 Storing settings (memory function) 117
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85 Steering wheel heating
Starting the engine ........................ 159 Problem (malfunction) ................... 113
Snow chains Switching on/off ........................... 112
Information .................................... 401 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 169
Snow drive program ....................... 245 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 279
Sockets Stowage areas ................................... 332
Center console .............................. 347 Stowage compartments
General notes ................................ 347 Armrest (under) ............................. 334
Luggage compartment ................... 348 Center console .............................. 334
Rear compartment ......................... 348 Cup holders ................................... 343
Specialist workshop ............................ 28 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 334
Special seat belt retractor .................. 63 Glove box ....................................... 333
Speed, controlling Important safety information ......... 333
see Cruise control Stowage net ................................... 335
Speedometer Stowage net ....................................... 335
Digital ............................................ 267 Stowage space
In the Instrument cluster ......... 33, 263 Center console (rear) ..................... 334
Segments ...................................... 264 Summer tires ..................................... 400
Selecting the unit of measurement 274 Sun visor ............................................ 345
see Instrument cluster Surround lighting (on-board
SRS computer) .......................................... 275
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Suspension tuning
System) AMG adaptive sport suspension
SRS (Supplemental Restraint system ........................................... 212
System) SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 279
Display message ............................ 291 SUV
Introduction ..................................... 43 (Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 26
Warning lamp ................................. 324 Switching air-recirculation mode
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 on/off ................................................. 151
Standing lamps Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 76
Changing bulbs .............................. 131
Display message ............................ 297 T
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Start/stop function Tachometer ........................................ 264
see ECO start/stop function Tailgate
Starting (engine) ................................ 159 Display message ............................ 313
STEER CONTROL .................................. 76 Emergency unlocking ....................... 93
Steering (display message) .............. 314 Important safety notes .................... 89

Index 19
Limiting the opening angle ............... 93 Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-

Opening/closing (automatically securing kit) ....................................... 341
from inside) ...................................... 92 Temperature
Opening/closing (automatically Coolant .......................................... 263
from outside) ................................... 91 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 278
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 90 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 278
Opening dimensions ...................... 452 Outside temperature ...................... 264
Power closing .................................. 88 Setting (climate control) ................ 147
Tail lamps Theft deterrent systems
Display message ............................ 296 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76
Tank content Immobilizer ...................................... 76
Fuel gauge ............................... 33, 263 Through-loading ................................ 335
Technical data Time
Capacities ...................................... 444 see separate operating instructions
Emergency spare wheel ................. 438 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 279
Information .................................... 442 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 383
Tires/wheels ................................. 426 Tire pressure
Trailer loads ................................... 456 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 406
Vehicle data ................................... 452 Checking manually ........................ 405
TELEAID Display message ............................ 310
Call priority .................................... 354 Important safety notes .................. 406
Downloading destinations Maximum ....................................... 404
(COMAND) ..................................... 354 Notes ............................................. 403
Downloading routes ....................... 358 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 384
Emergency call .............................. 351 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 384
Geo fencing ................................... 358 Recommended ............................... 402
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 357 Tire pressure loss warning
MB info call button ........................ 353 system
Remote vehicle locking .................. 356 Important safety notes .................. 405
Roadside Assistance button .......... 353 Restarting ...................................... 406
Search & Send ............................... 355 Tire pressure monitoring system
Self-test ......................................... 351 Checking the tire pressure
Speed alert .................................... 358 electronically ................................. 408
System .......................................... 351 Function/notes ............................. 406
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 359 General notes ................................ 406
Vehicle remote malfunction Important safety notes .................. 407
diagnosis ....................................... 357 Restarting ...................................... 409
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 356 Warning lamp ................................. 329
Tele Aid Warning message .......................... 408
General notes ................................ 350 Tires
Telephone Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 420
Accepting a call ............................. 271 Average weight of the vehicle
Display message ............................ 314 occupants (definition) .................... 419
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 270 Bar (definition) ............................... 418
Number from the phone book ........ 271 Changing a wheel .......................... 421
Redialing ........................................ 271 Characteristics .............................. 418
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 271 Checking ........................................ 399
Definition of terms ......................... 418

20 Index
Direction of rotation ...................... 422 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 420

Display message ............................ 310 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 419
Distribution of the vehicle Tire size (data) ............................... 426
occupants (definition) .................... 421 Tire size designation, load-bearing
DOT, Tire Identification Number capacity, speed rating .................... 415
(TIN) ............................................... 418 Tire tread ....................................... 399
DOT (Department of Tire tread (definition) ..................... 420
Transportation) (definition) ............ 419 Total load limit (definition) ............. 421
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Traction ......................................... 414
(definition) ..................................... 419 Traction (definition) ....................... 421
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Tread wear ..................................... 414
(definition) ..................................... 419 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) noseweight) (definition) ................. 421
(definition) ..................................... 419 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Standards ...................................... 413
Rating) (definition) ......................... 419 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Important safety notes .................. 398 Standards (definition) .................... 419
Increased vehicle weight due to Unladen weight (definition) ............ 420
optional equipment (definition) ...... 419 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 421
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 419 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 419
Labeling (overview) ........................ 415 see Flat tire
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 420 Tool
Load index ..................................... 417 see Vehicle tool kit
Load index (definition) ................... 420 Top Tether ............................................ 64
M+S tires ....................................... 400 Towing
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Important safety guidelines ........... 391
(definition) ..................................... 419 Installing the towing eye ................ 392
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 420 Removing the towing eye ............... 393
Maximum permissible tire With the rear axle raised ................ 393
pressure (definition) ....................... 420 Towing a trailer
Maximum tire load ......................... 417 Active Parking Assist ..................... 220
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 420 Axle load, permissible .................... 456
MOExtended tires .......................... 400 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 374
Optional equipment weight Coupling up a trailer ...................... 256
(definition) ..................................... 420 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 258
PSI (pounds per square inch) Driving tips .................................... 253
(definition) ..................................... 420 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 73
Replacing ....................................... 421 Important safety notes .................. 253
Service life ..................................... 400 Installing the ball coupling ............. 255
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 420 Mounting dimensions .................... 455
Speed rating (definition) ................ 419 Power supply ................................. 259
Storing ........................................... 422 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 160
Structure and characteristics Removing the ball coupling ............ 259
(definition) ..................................... 418 Storing the ball coupling ................ 259
Temperature .................................. 414 Trailer drive program ..................... 245
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Trailer loads ................................... 456
(definition) ..................................... 420 Towing away
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 420 With both axles on the ground ....... 393

Index 21
Tow-starting V
Emergency engine starting ............ 394
Important safety notes .................. 391 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 345
Trailer coupling Vehicle
see Towing a trailer Correct use ...................................... 28
Trailer loads and drawbar Data acquisition ............................... 29
noseweights ...................................... 259 Display message ............................ 312
Trailer towing Equipment ....................................... 24
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 240 Individual settings .......................... 274
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 243 Limited Warranty ............................. 29
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 235 Loading .......................................... 409
PARKTRONIC ................................. 215 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 88
Permissible trailer loads and Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 80
drawbar noseweights ..................... 259 Lowering ........................................ 426
Transfer case ..................................... 173 Maintenance .................................... 25
Transmission Parking for a long period ................ 182
see Automatic transmission Pulling away ................................... 160
Transmission position display ......... 165 Raising ........................................... 423
Transmission position display Reporting problems ......................... 28
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 165 Securing from rolling away ............ 422
Towing away .................................. 391
Transporting the vehicle .................. 393
Transporting .................................. 393
Traveling uphill
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88
Brow of hill ..................................... 191
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 80
Driving downhill ............................. 191
Vehicle data ................................... 452
Maximum gradient-climbing
Vehicle battery
capability ....................................... 191
see Battery (vehicle)
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 376
Vehicle data ....................................... 452
Trip computer (on-board computer) 266
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Trip odometer
Approach/departure angle ............ 454
Calling up ....................................... 266
Fording depth ................................ 454
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 267
Maximum gradient climbing ability 455
Trunk
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 452
see Tailgate
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 88
Turn signals
Vehicle identification number
Display message ............................ 295
see VIN
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Vehicle identification plate .............. 442
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Vehicle level
(definition) ......................................... 421
AMG adaptive sport suspension
Type identification plate
system ........................................... 212
see Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 302
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 380
U
Video
Unlocking Operating the DVD ......................... 270
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 VIN ...................................................... 442
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 87

22 Index
W Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 368
Warning and indicator lamps Notes ............................................. 451
ABS ................................................ 319 Windshield wipers
Brakes ........................................... 318 Problem (malfunction) ................... 136
Check Engine ................................. 325 Rear window wiper ........................ 133
Coolant .......................................... 326 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 133
Distance warning ........................... 328 Switching on/off ........................... 132
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 328 Winter driving
ESP® .............................................. 321 Slippery road surfaces ................... 187
ESP® OFF ....................................... 322 Snow chains .................................. 401
Fuel tank ........................................ 325 Winter operation
Overview .................................. 34, 316 General notes ................................ 400
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 49 Overview ........................................ 400
Reserve fuel ................................... 325 Radiator cover ............................... 365
Seat belt ........................................ 317 Snow drive program ....................... 245
SRS ................................................ 324 Winter tires
Tire pressure monitor .................... 329 M+S tires ....................................... 400
Warranty ............................................ 442 Wiper blades
Washer fluid Cleaning ......................................... 373
Display message ............................ 314 Important safety notes .................. 133
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 426 Replacing ....................................... 133
Wheel chock ...................................... 422 Replacing (rear window) ................ 134
Wheels Replacing (windshield) ................... 134
Changing a wheel .......................... 421 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 376
Checking ........................................ 399 Workshops
Cleaning ......................................... 373 see Qualified specialist workshop
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 422
Emergency spare wheel ................. 436 Z
Interchanging/changing ................ 421 ZONE function
Mounting a new wheel ................... 425 Switching on/off ........................... 149
Mounting a wheel .......................... 422
Overview ........................................ 398
Removing a wheel .......................... 425
Storing ........................................... 422
Tightening torque ........................... 426
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 426
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 292
Operation ......................................... 48
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 149
Infrared reflective .......................... 362
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system

Introduction 23
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitchoff the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
Daimler's declared policy is one of consumption.
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner recommendations
that takes the requirements of both nature
Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account.
you to dispose of materials, first try to
You too can help to protect the environment regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
by operating your vehicle in an relevant environmental rules and regulations
environmentally responsible manner. when disposing of materials. In this way you
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, will help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should

bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
consumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Devices, as well as control units and
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
them.
vehicle:
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Rdoors
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor pillars
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rdoor sills
qualified specialist workshop. Rseats
Personal driving style: Rcockpit
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster

starting the engine. Rcenter console
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Do not install accessories such as audio
is stationary. systems in these areas. Do not carry out
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance repairs or welding. You could impair the
from the vehicle in front. operating efficiency of the restraint
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and systems.
braking.
Z
24 Introduction
Have aftermarket accessories installed at Vehicle equipment

a qualified specialist workshop.
This Operator's Manual describes all models
You could jeopardize the operating safety of and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels your vehicle available at the time of going to
as well as accessories relevant to safety print. Country-specific differences are
which have not been approved by Mercedes. possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
This could lead to malfunctions in safety- not feature all functions described here. This
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use also applies to safety-relevant systems and
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and therefore differ from that shown in the
accessories that have been specifically descriptions and illustrations.
approved for your vehicle.
The original purchase agreement lists all
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to systems installed in your vehicle.
strict quality control. Every part has been
Should you have any questions concerning
specifically developed, manufactured or
equipment and operation, please consult an
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
More than 300,000 different genuine
be kept in the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers Service and vehicle operation
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts for necessary service and repair work. Service and literature
In addition, strategically located parts Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
delivery centers provide quick and reliable warranties printed in the Service and
parts service. Warranty Information booklet. Your
Always specify the vehicle identification authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
number (VIN) (Y page 442) and the engine exchange or repair any defective parts
number (Y page 443) when ordering genuine originally installed in the vehicle in
Mercedes-Benz parts. accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Operator's Manual
REmission Systems Warranty
General notes REmission Performance Warranty
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
your vehicle. Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, Control Systems Warranty
follow the instructions and warning notices in RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
this manual. Disregarding them may lead to laws)
damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard
of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Introduction 25
Information for customers in Maintenance

California
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a Always have the Service and Warranty
reasonable number of repair attempts Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service advisor will record every service for
one or more substantial defects or you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the Roadside Assistance
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a Program offers technical help in the event of
reasonable number of repair attempts is a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or Assistance Hotline are answered by our
more of the following occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or
(USA)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information, refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Assistance" section in the Service and
writing of the need for its repair, Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
(2) the same substantial defect or in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or change of
notified us in writing of the need for its ownership
repair, or In the event of a change of address, please
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of send us the "Notification of Address Change"
repair of the same or different substantial in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
total of more than 30 calendar days. Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
One Mercedes Drive contacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
Z
26 Introduction
If you have purchased a used car, please send an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Always adapt your speed and driving style to
Center (USA) at the hotline number the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or prevailing road and weather conditions.
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
Vehicle operation outside the USA result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and Canada and severe or fatal injury.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
countries, please be aware that: significantly more likely to die than a person
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may wearing a seat belt.
not be readily available. You and all vehicle occupants should always
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic wear your seat belts.
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
converter. Operating safety
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower Important safety notes
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage. G WARNING
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available If you do not have the prescribed service/
for delivery in Europe through our European maintenance work or any required repairs
Delivery Program. For details, consult an carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
one of the following addresses. Always have the prescribed service/
In the USA maintenance work as well as any required
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive G WARNING
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 If you switch off the ignition while driving,
In Canada safety-relevant functions are only available
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
European Delivery Department for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Sports Utility Vehicle
G WARNING
G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle software as well as wiring can impair their
may start to skid and roll over in the event of function and/or the function of other

Introduction 27
networked components. In particular, Declarations of conformity

systems relevant to safety could also be
affected. As a result, these may no longer Vehicle components which receive
function as intended and/or jeopardize the and/or transmit radio waves
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
increased risk of an accident and injury. comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as Operation is subject to the following two
electronic components or their software. You conditions: 1) These devices may not cause
should have all work to electrical and harmful interference, and 2) These devices
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified must accept any interference received,
specialist workshop. including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: modifications not expressly approved by the
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high party responsible for compliance could void
curb or an unpaved road the user’s authority to operate the
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. equipment."
a curb or a hole in the road Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
or parts of the chassis. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
In situations like this, the body, the may not cause interference, and (2) These
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or devices must accept any interference,
tires could be damaged without the including interference that may cause
damage being visible. Components undesired operation of the device."
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail
or, in the case of an accident, no longer
withstand the strain they are designed to. Diagnostics connection
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves, The diagnostics connection is only intended
grass or twigs can gather between the for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
underbody and the underbody paneling. If a qualified specialist workshop.
these materials come in contact with hot G WARNING
parts of the exhaust system for an If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
extended period, they can catch fire. connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
Have the vehicle checked and repaired operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
immediately at a qualified specialist the operating safety of the vehicle could be
workshop. If on continuing your journey affected. There is a risk of an accident.
you notice that driving safety is impaired, Do not connect any equipment to a
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified
G WARNING
specialist workshop.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Z
28 Introduction
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Observe the following information when
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter driving your vehicle:
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats Rthe safety notes in this manual
securely and as specified in order to ensure Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Rtraffic rules and regulations
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
top of one another.
motor vehicles
! If the engine is switched off and
equipment on the diagnostics connection
is used, the starter battery may discharge. Problems with your vehicle
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics If you should experience a problem with your
connection can lead to emissions monitoring vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
information being reset, for example. This affect its safe operation, we urge you to
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
requirements of the next emissions test immediately to have the problem diagnosed
during the main inspection. and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
Qualified specialist workshop contact us at one of the following addresses.
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a In the USA
qualified specialist workshop. It has the Customer Assistance Center
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
qualifications to correctly carry out the work One Mercedes Drive
required on your vehicle. This is especially the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
case for work relevant to safety.
In Canada
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Booklet. Customer Relations Department
Always have the following work carried out at Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Rwork relevant to safety Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Reporting safety defects
Ralterations, installation work and
USA only:
modifications
Rwork on electronic components
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Correct use
of 1966".
If you remove any warning stickers, you or If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. which could cause a crash or could cause
Leave warning stickers in position. injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

Introduction 29
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may This information helps, for example, to test
open an investigation, and if it finds that a vehicle systems after an accident and to
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it continually improve vehicle safety.
may order a recall and remedy campaign. Daimler AG can access these data and submit
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in them:
individual problems between you, your Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. purposes
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
Safety Hotline toll-free at Ron the instruction of prosecuting
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
authorities
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590. involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or its
sales and service organizations
You can also obtain other information about
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE
AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and
Limited Warranty transmitted by this system.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
! Follow the instructions in this manual recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
about the proper operation of your vehicle is to record data that will assist in
as well as about possible vehicle damage. understanding how a vehicle’s systems
Damage to your vehicle that arises from performed in certain crash or near crash-like
culpable contraventions against these situations, such as during air bag deployment
instructions is not covered either by the or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the designed to record data related to vehicle
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
Data stored in the vehicle The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
Information about electronic data Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
acquisition in the vehicle operating
(Including notice pursuant to California Code Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
§ 9951) seat belts are fastened
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
devices that can record vehicle systems data. accelerator and/or brake pedal and
If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the This data can help provide a better
event of an accident. understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded. However,
Z
30 Introduction
other parties, such as law enforcement, can

combine the EDR data with the type of
personal identification data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, who have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the
following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource

31
Dashboard ........................................... 32
Instrument cluster .............................. 33
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
At a glance
Center console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Door control panel .............................. 40

32 Dashboard
Dashboard
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle F Adjusting the steering
shifters 169 wheel manually 111
; Combination switch 123 G Adjusting the steering
wheel electrically 111
= Instrument cluster 33
Steering wheel heating 112
? Horn
H Cruise control lever 192
A DIRECT SELECT lever 165
I Opening the hood 364
B PARKTRONIC warning
J Diagnostics connection 27
display 213
C K Electric parking brake 180
Overhead control panel 39
D L Light switch 120
Climate control systems 138
E M Night View Assist Plus 231
Ignition lock 157
Start/Stop button 158

Instrument cluster 33
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Speedometer with ? Coolant temperature 263
segments 264
A Multifunction display 265
; Fuel gauge
B Instrument lighting 263
= Tachometer 264

34 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: L Low-beam F 6 SRS 324
headlamps 121
G ü Seat belt 317
; T Parking lamps 122
H % Diesel engine:
= ÷ ESP® 321 preglow 159
? K High-beam I ? Coolant 326
headlamps 124 J R Rear fog lamp 122
A Electric parking brake (red) 324
K ; Check Engine 325
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) L 8 Reserve fuel 325
B ! Electric parking brake M å ESP® OFF 321
(yellow) 324 N ! ABS 319
C · Distance warning 328 O Braking 318
D #! Turn signals 123 $ (USA only)
E h Tire pressure monitor J (Canada only)
329

Multifunction steering wheel 35
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 265 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 264
separate Operating 9:
Instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 264
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms your selection 264
Control System; see the
separate operating Hides display messages 282
instructions B %
? ~ Back 264
Rejects or ends a call 270 Switches off the Voice
Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the
memory separate operating
6 instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute

36 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning
operating instructions lamps 124
; c Seat heating 109 C 45 Indicator lamp 49
= s Seat ventilation 110 D å ESP® 72
? c PARKTRONIC 213
A ¤ ECO start/stop
function 161

Center console 37
Center console, lower section
At a glance
i Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package Function Page
Function Page J Á Level control 202
F Cup holder 343 K Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Ashtray 346 Regulation) 246
Cigarette lighter 346 L p Manual drive program 170
Socket 347
M Selector wheel for on-road
G COMAND controller; see programs 243
the separate operating
instructions Selector wheel for off-road
programs 248
H d ON&OFFROAD menu
N Stowage compartment 334
button 252
I + LOW RANGE off-road
gear 249

38 Center console
At a glance
i Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD Function Page

package and AMG vehicles
I Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Function Page Regulation) 246
F Cup holder 343 J Á Level control
Ashtray 346 (vehicles with AIRMATIC
Cigarette lighter 346 package) 209
Socket 347 K e Adaptive Damping
G COMAND controller; see System (vehicles with
the separate operating AIRMATIC package) 207
instructions à Adjusts AMG
adaptive damping system
H Ú Selects the drive
(AMG vehicles) 212
program 169
Selects the drive program L Stowage compartment 334
(AMG vehicles) 169

Overhead control panel 39
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: p Switches the left- C Eyeglasses compartment 334
hand reading lamp on/off 127
D F Roadside Assistance
; c Switches the front call button (mbrace
interior lighting on 128 system) 353
= u Switches the rear E G SOS button (mbrace
interior lighting on/off 128 system) 351
? | Switches the front F ï MB Info call button
interior lighting/automatic (mbrace system) 353
interior lighting control off 128
G Rear-view mirror 114
A p Switches the right-
H Buttons for the garage door
hand reading lamp on/off 127
opener 361
B 2 Opens/closes the I Microphone for mbrace
sliding sunroof 98
(emergency call system)
3 Opens/closes the telephone and the Voice
panorama roof with power Control System1
tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 99
1 Voice Control System only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions.

40 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: Opens the door 87 B W Opens/closes the
side windows 94
; %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 87 C q Opens/closes the
tailgate 92
= r45=
Stores settings for the seat, D n Activates/
exterior mirrors and deactivates the override
steering wheel (memory feature for the side
function) 117 windows in the rear
compartment 66
? Adjusts the seats 105
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 114

41
Useful information .............................. 42

Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 60
Driving safety systems ....................... 66
Safety
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 76

42 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety
i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes

models and all standard and optional G WARNING
equipment of your vehicle available at the Modifications to the restraint systems could
Safety
time of publication of the Operator's result in them not functioning properly any
Manual. Country-specific differences are more. The restraint systems could then no
possible. Please note that your vehicle may longer protect vehicle occupants as they are
not be equipped with all features designed to do and could fail in the event of
described. This also applies to safety- an accident or activate unexpectedly, for
related systems and functions. example. There is an increased risk of injury.
i Read the information on qualified Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
Panic alarm to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.
USA only: for further information contact our
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).
In this section, you will learn the most

important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
Rseat belts
Rchild restraint systems
X To activate: press ! button : for at RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
least one second. system
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting Additional protection is provided by:
flashes. RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
X To deactivate: press ! button :
RPRE-SAFE®
again.
RAir bag system components with:
or
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
- front-passenger seat with Occupant
or
Classification System (OCS)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
Although the systems are independent, their
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the protective functions work in conjunction with
vehicle. each other. Not all air bags are always
deployed in an accident.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle restraint
systems for infants and children, see
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 60).

Occupant safety 43
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) There is a malfunction if:

Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
Introduction
up when the ignition is switched on
SRS consists of: Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
R6 SRS warning lamp warning lamp does not go out after a few
Safety
Rair bags seconds
Rthe air bag control unit with crash sensors Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
RETDs for the front seat belts and the outer warning lamp lights up again
seat belts in the rear
Rseat belt force limiters
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupants and air bags
coming into contact with parts of the
vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. G WARNING
It can also reduce the forces to which vehicle RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
occupants are subjected during an accident. been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
SRS warning lamp must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
G WARNING Mercedes-Benz Center.
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
system components may be triggered Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all perchlorate material, which may require
in the event of an accident with a high rate of special handling and regard for the
vehicle deceleration. There is an increased environment. Check your national disposal
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. guidelines. California residents, see
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
at a qualified specialist workshop. Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
SRS functions are checked regularly when
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
you switch on the ignition and when the
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
can be detected in good time. SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
belt tensioners in addition to the
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
pyrotechnic ETDs.
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started. They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
goes out while the engine is running.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo not change or remove any component
or part of the SRS.
Z
44 Occupant safety
RDo not install additional trim material, seat If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
covers, badges, etc. to the: strongly recommends that you inform the
- padded steering wheel boss subsequent owner that the vehicle is
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
- knee bag covers
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
- front-passenger air bag cover
Safety
- outer side of front seat bolsters

- outer side of rear bench seat backrest Air bags
seat bolsters
Important safety notes
- roof lining trim
RDo not install additional electrical/ G WARNING
electronic equipment on or near SRS Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
components and wiring. even prevent deployment of the air bags
RKeep area between air bags and occupants integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
umbrellas, etc.). they are designed to do. In addition, the
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers function of the air bag deactivation system
from the coat hooks or handles over the could be restricted. This poses an increased
door. These items may be thrown around in risk of injury or even fatal injury.
the vehicle and cause head and other You should only use seat covers that have
injuries when the window curtain air bag is been approved for the respective seat by
deployed. Mercedes-Benz.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. G WARNING
RNever place your feet on the instrument The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the
seat. deployed air bags replaced at a qualified
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a specialist workshop as soon as possible.
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment. G WARNING
Work on the SRS must therefore only be Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
performed by qualified technicians. of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-
Center. passenger front air bags and driver's knee
RFor your protection and the protection of bag)
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or Rside impacts (side impact air bags and
ETD, our safety instructions must be window curtain air bags)
followed. These instructions are available Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material When the air bags are deployed, a small
of the air bags, there is the possibility of amount of powder is released. The powder
abrasions or other, potentially more serious generally does not constitute a health hazard
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. and does not indicate that there is a fire in the

Occupant safety 45
vehicle. In order to prevent potential hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
breathing difficulties, you should leave the inflates.
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get as possible from the dashboard when the
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, seat is occupied.
Safety
then get fresh air by opening a window or Roccupants, especially children, should
door. never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
G WARNING impact air bag inflates. This could result in
In order to reduce the potential danger of serious or fatal injuries should the side
injuries caused during the deployment of the impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
front air bags, the driver and front passenger upright as possible, wear the seat belt
must always be correctly seated and wear properly and use an appropriately sized
their seat belts. infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster
For maximum protection in the event of a seat recommended for the size and weight
collision, you must always be in the normal of the child.
seat position with your back against the Failure to follow these instructions can result
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
that it is correctly positioned on your body. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
As the air bag inflates with considerable make the buyer aware of this safety
speed and force, a proper seating position information. Be sure to give the buyer this
and correct positioning of the hands on the Operator's Manual.
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated bang, and a small amount of powder may also
properly or are too close to the air bag can be be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it affect your hearing. The powder that is
inflates with great force instantaneously: released generally does not constitute a
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and health hazard and does not indicate that there
in a position that is as upright as possible is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
with your back against the backrest. some temporary breathing difficulty for
Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
possible, still permitting proper operation
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
You can also open the window to allow fresh
center of the driver's chest to the center of
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
warning lamp lights up.
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
should be able to accomplish this by The air bag installation locations are
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If identified by the AIR BAG symbol.
you have any difficulties, please contact an The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the the event of such a situation will the air bags
steering wheel or dashboard. provide their supplemental protection.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. If the driver and front passenger do not wear
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
increase the risk and potential severity of
Z
46 Occupant safety
bags to provide their supplemental They are deployed:

protection. Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
In the event of other types of impacts and of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
impacts below air bag deployment longitudinal direction
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The Rif the system determines that air bag
driver and passenger will then be protected
Safety
deployment can offer additional protection

to the extent possible by a properly fastened to that provided by the seat belt
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
needed to provide the best possible
used
protection in a rollover.
Rindependently of other air bags in the
Air bags provide additional protection; they
vehicle
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
belts regardless of whether your vehicle is generally not deployed. If the system detects
equipped with air bags or not. high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal
direction, the front air bags are deployed.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
and to have any malfunctioning air bags bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
repaired. This will help to make sure the air control unit evaluates the vehicle
bags continue to perform their protective deceleration. In the first deployment stage,
function for the vehicle occupants in the the front air bag is filled with enough
event of a crash. propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
i After an air bag has been deployed, have deployment threshold is exceeded within a
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified few milliseconds.
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is The deployment of front-passenger front air
ready to drive. bag ; is also influenced by the weight
category of the front passenger, which is
Front air bags determined by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS) (Y page 49).
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second-stage inflation of the front-passenger
front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum
amount of propellant gas available.
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is
predicted. You will then be protected by the
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the fastened seat belt.
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
The front air bags increase protection for the
driver's and front passenger's head and
chest.

Occupant safety 47
Front-passenger front air bag ; will only they are designed to do. In addition, the
deploy if: function of the air bag deactivation system
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight could be restricted. This poses an increased
sensor readings, has detected that the risk of injury or even fatal injury.
front-passenger seat is occupied. You should only use seat covers that have
Safety
Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator been approved for the respective seat by
lamp on the center console is not lit. Mercedes-Benz.
(Y page 49)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high G WARNING
impact severity. Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not
Driver's knee bag performed correctly to the doors or door
paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead
to the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly any more. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the You should only use seat covers that have
steering column. The driver's knee bag is been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
always deployed along with the driver's front Benz. The seat covers must have a special
air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,
operate together with the front air bags in the side impact air bags cannot deploy
frontal impacts if certain thresholds are correctly and therefore cannot provide the
exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates intended protection in the event of an
best in conjunction with correctly positioned accident.
and fastened seat belts.
The driver's knee bag increases protection of
the driver against:
Rknee injuries
Rthigh injuries
Rlower leg injuries
Side impact air bags

G WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
even prevent deployment of the air bags
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as seat cushions.
Z
48 Occupant safety
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
additional protection for the thorax and, on or not.
the front seats, the pelvis of the vehicle
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which Window curtain air bags
the impact occurs. However, they do not
protect the:
Safety
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
The side impact air bags are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the Window curtain air bags : enhance the level
driver's seat and the outer seats of the 2nd of protection for the head, but not chest or
row of seats is used arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
Rindependently of the front air bags the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
Rindependently of the ETDs The window curtain air bags are integrated
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
bags are generally not deployed. side impact the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
air bags are deployed if the system detects Window curtain air bags are deployed:
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
lateral direction, or also if the vehicle rolls of lateral vehicle deceleration or
over, and the system determines that side acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
impact air bag deployment can offer Ron the side on which an impact occurs
additional protection to that provided by the Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
seat belt.
the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side system determines that air bag deployment
impacts which do not exceed the system's can offer the vehicle occupants additional
preset deployment thresholds for lateral protection to that provided by the seat belt
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
protected by the fastened seat belt.
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
The side impact air bag on the front-
seat is occupied
passenger side is not deployed in the
Rindependently of the front air bags
following situations:
Rthe
Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is not occupied, and the event of impacts which do not exceed the
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
system's preset deployment thresholds for
vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
fastened.
then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of

Occupant safety 49
Occupant Classification System With the 45 indicator lamp out, the

(OCS) front passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front
Method of operation
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
G WARNING adult or someone larger than a small
Safety
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
when an adult or someone larger than a small illuminate for approximately six seconds
individual is in the front passenger seat, have when the engine is started and then go out.
the front passenger reposition himself or This indicates that the front passenger front
herself in the seat until the 45 air bag is activated.
indicator lamp goes out. If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
In the event of a collision, the air bag control the front passenger front air bag is
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deactivated and will not be deployed.
deployment when the OCS has classified the If the 45 indicator lamp is not
front passenger seat occupant as weighing as illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
much as or less than a typical 12-month-old is activated and will be deployed
child in a standard child restraint or if the front Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
passenger seat is classified as being empty. Rif the impact exceeds a predetermined
When the OCS senses that the front triggering threshold
passenger seat occupant is classified as Rindependent of the side impact air bag or
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
pelvis air bag
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will If the front passenger front air bag is
illuminate when the engine is started and deployed, the rate of inflation will be
remain illuminated. This indicates that the influenced by
front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed
When the OCS senses that the front by the air bag control unit
passenger seat is classified as being empty, Rthe front passenger's weight category as
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate identified by the OCS
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated. This indicates that the front G WARNING
passenger front air bag is deactivated. According to accident statistics, children are
When the OCS senses that the front safer when properly restrained on the rear
passenger seat occupant is classified as seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- we strongly recommend that children be
month-old child seated in a standard child placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
restraint or as being a small individual (such Regardless of seating position, children 12
as a young teenager or a small adult), the years old and under must be seated and
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for properly secured in an appropriate infant
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
started. Depending on occupant weight recommended for the size and weight of the
sensor readings from the seat, it will then child.
remain illuminated or go out. With the The infant or child restraint must be properly
45 indicator lamp illuminated, the secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
front passenger front air bag is deactivated. belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors
Z
50 Occupant safety
and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with not transport a child on the front-passenger
the child seat manufacturer's instructions. seat until the system has been repaired.
Occupants, especially children, should always A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt front-passenger seat will be seriously
properly and use an appropriately sized infant injured or even killed if the front-passenger
Safety
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat front air bag inflates.

recommended for the size and weight of the RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
child. restraint on the front-passenger seat:
Children can be killed or seriously injured by - move the seat as far back as possible
an inflating air bag. Note the following - use the proper child restraint
important information when circumstances recommended for the age, size and
require you to place a child in the front- weight of the child
passenger seat:
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag seat belt according to the child seat
technology designed to deactivate the manufacturer's instructions
front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle RFor children larger than the typical 12-
when the system senses the weight of a month-old child, the front-passenger front
typical 12-month-old child or less along air bag may or may not be activated.
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
G WARNING
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the
front-passenger seat will be seriously instrument cluster and the 45
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the
front air bag inflates in a collision which
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger
could occur under some circumstances,
front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
even with the air bag technology installed
Have the system checked by qualified
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
this risk completely is never to place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
passenger seat. We therefore strongly Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
recommend that you always place a child authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear In order to ensure proper operation of the air
seat. bag system and OCS:
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
the front-passenger seat, make sure the position that is as upright as possible with
45 indicator lamp is illuminated, your back against the seat backrest.
indicating that the front-passenger front air RWhen seated, a passenger should not
bag is deactivated. Should the 45 position him/herself in such a way as to
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while cause the passenger's weight to be lifted
the restraint is installed, please check from the seat cushion as this may result in
installation. Periodically check the the OCS being unable to correctly
45 indicator lamp while driving to approximate the passenger's weight
make sure that the 45 indicator category.
lamp is illuminated. If the 45 RRead and observe all warnings in this
indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do chapter.

Occupant safety 51
Both the driver and the front passenger

should always observe the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of
whether or not the front passenger is
positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag
display messages that can be displayed in the
Safety
instrument cluster (Y page 293).
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
will also deploy.
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
If the key is removed from the ignition lock or
Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a
is in position 0, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp : does not light up. typical child up to twelve months old,
seated in a child restraint system.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a
categorizes the occupant on the front-
passenger seat using a weight sensor. The young teenager or a small adult.
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint
automatically for certain weight categories. system whose weight is greater than that
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : of a typical twelve month old child.
shows you the current status. If PASSENGER These are examples of when the OCS
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : is lit, the front- deactivates the front-passenger front air bag.
passenger front air bag is disabled. Deactivation takes place although the
The system does not deactivate: collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the
driver's air bag.
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
System self-test
Rthe ETDs
To be classified correctly, the front passenger G WARNING

must sit: If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
Center before seating any child on the front
with their back against the seat backrest passenger seat.
Rwith their feet on the floor
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if G WARNING

the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by Objects between the seat surface and the
leaning on the armrest. child restraint system could affect the
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or function of the OCS. This could result in the
the seat cushion are damaged, have the front-passenger front air bag not functioning
necessary repair work carried out at a as intended during an accident. This poses an
qualified specialist workshop. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Do not place any objects between the seat
recommends that you only use seat surface and the child restraint system. Make
accessories that have been approved by sure that the bottom and back of the child
Mercedes-Benz. restraint system make full contact with the
front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Z
52 Occupant safety
Always comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up:
Safety
Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock

to position 1 or 2
Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop
button once or twice on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO
Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-
passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
occupant as an adult
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out again after approximately six
seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
detects that the front-passenger seat is
empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp will continue to light up. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will
not go out.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 53).

Occupant safety 53
Problems with the occupant classification system

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Safety
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
lights up and remains position.
on. X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
The person on the specialist workshop.
front-passenger seat: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
Rhas the weight of a display (Y page 293).
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
Z
54 Occupant safety

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or stays on.
Safety
X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint
The front-passenger system are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If
seat is: necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Runoccupied X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Roccupied with the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
weight of a child up passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
to twelve months old being pulled too tightly.
in a child restraint X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
system X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-
passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 293).
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Function

protection system) PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Introduction Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when
protect occupants in certain hazardous
situations. physical limits are exceeded and the
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if
BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the
! Make sure that there are no objects in the radar sensor system detects an imminent
footwell or behind the seats when resetting danger of collision in certain situations.
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
and/or the objects could be damaged.
depending on the hazardous situation
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the detected:
PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
personal injuries occurring as a result of an Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
accident cannot be eliminated.
the side windows are closed so that only a
Always adapt your driving style to suit the small gap remains. On vehicles with a
prevailing road and weather conditions and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in panel, they are closed completely.
front. Drive carefully.

Occupant safety 55
Ron vehicles with the memory function: G WARNING

the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
in an unfavorable position.
Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the
bleached or dyed
air pressure in the side bolsters of the
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
Safety
backrest is increased.
extremely dirty
If the hazardous situation passes without
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with belt anchorage has been modified.
multicontour seats, the air pressure in the Damage caused to seat belts in an accident
side bolsters is reduced again. All settings may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.
made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
fail, for example in the event of an accident.
If the seat belts are not released:
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
X When the vehicle is stationary, move the be deployed unintentionally or fail to be
backrest or seat back slightly. deployed when required. There is an
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
the locking mechanism is released. Never modify seat belts, Emergency
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not
information about seat-belt adjustment can damaged or worn and are clean.
be found under "Seat-belt adjustment"
(Y page 57). Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
Seat belts restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
G WARNING Rthe District of Columbia
The seat belt does not offer the intended level Rall Canadian provinces
of protection if the backrest is not in the
Even where this is not required by law, all
upright position. When braking or in the event
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
their seat belts before starting the journey.
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased i See "Children in the vehicle"
risk of injury or even fatal injury. (Y page 60) for further information on
Adjust the seat properly before beginning infants and children traveling in the vehicle
your journey. Always make sure that the seat as well as on child restraint systems.
is in the upright position.
Correct use of the seat belts
G WARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
Z
56 Occupant safety
that could result in serious injuries in the such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
event of an accident. these might cause injuries.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
at all times, because seat belts help reduce snugly. Take special care of this when
the likelihood of and potential severity of wearing loose clothing.
Safety
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. RNever use a seat belt for more than one
The integrated restraint system includes person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee around a person and another person or
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side other objects at the same time.
impact air bags, window curtain air bags for RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
the side windows), Emergency Tensioning crash, you would not have the full width of
Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
seat knee bolsters. The twisted seat belt against your body
The system is designed to enhance the could cause injuries.
protection offered to properly belted RPregnant women should also always use a
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side should be positioned as low as possible on
(side impact air bags, window curtain air the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed the abdomen.
preset deployment thresholds and in
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
as upright as possible.
and ETDs).
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
sure it is properly positioned.
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the
belt would also apply too much force to the seat.
ribs or abdomen, which could severely RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
injure internal organs such as your liver or restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
spleen. booster seats, always follow the child seat
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder manufacturer's instructions.
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not G WARNING
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For could tear.
this purpose, you can adjust the height of Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
the seat belt outlet. door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on This could damage the seat belt.
your hips and not across the abdomen. If Never attempt to make modifications to seat
the lap belt is positioned across your belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in the seat belts.
a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,

Occupant safety 57
Fastening seat belts X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.

Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the
G WARNING driver's and front-passenger seat belts
According to accident statistics, children are automatically adjust to the upper body
safer when properly restrained on the rear (Y page 57).
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
Safety
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
we strongly recommend that children be appropriate height (Y page 58).
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
properly secured in an appropriately sized
across your body.
child restraint system or booster seat All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
recommended for the size and weight of the equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
child. For additional information, see the securely fasten child restraint systems in the
"Children in the vehicle" section. vehicle. Further information can be found
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is under "Special seat belt retractor"
significantly increased if the child restraints (Y page 63).
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ For more information about releasing the seat
or the child is not properly secured in the child belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
restraint. seat belts" (Y page 58).
Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and you then engage the belt tongue
in the buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
an almost vertical position (Y page 104). adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
adjustment on and off in the on-board
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
computer (Y page 277).
sash guide :.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
section of the seat belt across the middle
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
of your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis. under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
protection)" (Y page 54).
Z
58 Occupant safety
Belt height adjustment

Safety
You can adjust the seat belt height on the

front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder. : Belt sash guide
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
; Seat belt tongue
The belt sash guide engages in various
= Buckle
positions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
? Release button
release :. X Press release button ? and guide belt
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. tongue ; back towards belt sash
X Release belt sash guide release : and guide : .
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged. Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
Releasing seat belts Every time the engine is started, the 7
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue seconds. It lights up regardless of whether
will be trapped in the door or in the seat the driver's and front-passenger seat belts
mechanism. This could damage the door, have already been fastened. If the driver's
the door trim panel and the seat belt. and front-passenger seat belts have already
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
their protective function and must be lamp then goes out.
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
workshop. the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
a maximum of six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds, the driver or front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed:
Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit
as long as the driver's or front-passenger's
seat belt is not fastened

Occupant safety 59
and ! If the front-passenger seat is not

Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is occupied, do not engage the seat belt
exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp tongue in the buckle on the front-
begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
with increasing intensity for a maximum of Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
event of an accident.
Safety
60 seconds or until the driver or front
passenger have fastened their seat belts. i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the electric motor can be deployed as often as
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a desired and do not need to be replaced.
warning tone sounds again.
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or in the rear are equipped with Emergency
front-passenger seat belt has still not been Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt limiters.
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
The Emergency Tensioning Devices on the
illuminated.
driver's and front-passenger seat consist of
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the pyrotechnic belt buckle tensioners and belt
warning tone is reactivated. The 7 seat anchor installation tensioners that are
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle triggered together. The belt buckle tensioner
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). is mounted on the B-pillar and the belt anchor
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes installation is mounted on the side of the seat.
out if: After deploying, both tensioners must always
Rboth the driver and the front passenger be replaced.
have fastened their seat belts. Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the
or seat belts in an accident, pulling them close
against the body.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
Emergency Tensioning Devices do not
i For more information on the 7 seat correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and fastened seat belts.
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, Emergency Tensioning Devices do not pull
seat belts" (Y page 317). vehicle occupants back towards the
backrest.
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat When triggered, seat belt force limiters help
belt force limiters to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt
G WARNING on the vehicle occupant.
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
that have been deployed are no longer are synchronized with the front air bags,
operational and are unable to perform their which take on a part of the deceleration force.
intended protective function. This poses an This results in the force exerted on the
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. occupant being distributed over a greater
area.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices which have been
triggered immediately replaced at a qualified
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
Emergency Tensioning Devices can only be Children in the vehicle

activated when:
Rthe
Child restraint systems
ignition is switched on.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see Important safety notes
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43)
G WARNING
Safety
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on

each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and
seating positions than in the front seating
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
the front-passenger side children be placed in the rear seats whenever
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear possible. Regardless of seating position,
compartment are triggered independently of children 12 years old and under must be
the lock status of the seat belts. seated and properly secured in an appropriate
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
and severity of an accident: seat recommended for the size and weight of
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end the child.
collision, the vehicle decelerates or The infant or child restraint must be properly
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
direction during the initial stages of the belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
impact. top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side child seat manufacturer's instructions.
opposite the impact the vehicle Occupants, especially children, should always
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
lateral direction. properly and use an appropriately sized infant
Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
rolls over, the system determines that it recommended for the size and weight of the
can provide additional protection. child.
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, Children can be killed or seriously injured by
and a small amount of powder may also be an inflating air bag. Note the following
released. Only in rare cases will the bang important information when circumstances
affect your hearing. The powder that is require you to place a child in the front
released generally does not constitute a passenger seat:
health hazard and does not indicate that there RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause technology designed to deactivate the front
some temporary breathing difficulty for passenger front air bag in your vehicle
people with asthma or other breathing when the system senses the weight of a
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out typical 12-month-old child or less along
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. with the weight of a standard appropriate
You can also open the window to allow fresh child restraint on the front passenger seat.
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS RFor children larger than the typical
warning lamp lights up. 12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated.
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Children in the vehicle 61
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the braking or sudden changes of direction. There
front passenger seat will be seriously is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
injured or even killed if the front passenger fatal.
front air bag inflates in a collision which Make sure that you observe the child restraint
could occur under some circumstances, system manufacturer's installation
Safety
even with the air bag technology installed instructions and the notes on use. Please
in your vehicle. The only means to ensure, that the base of the child restraint
completely eliminate this risk is to never system is always resting completely on the
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.
in the front seat. We therefore strongly cushions, under or behind the child restraint
recommend that you always place a child system. Only use child restraint systems with
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. the original cover designed for them. Only
RIf you must install a rear-facing child replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do G WARNING
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator If the child restraint system is installed
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
passenger front air bag is deactivated. loose in the event of an accident, heavy
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not braking or a sudden change in direction. The
illuminate or go out while the restraint is child restraint system could be thrown about,
installed, please check installation. striking vehicle occupants. There is an
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
lamp while driving to make sure the 4 Always install child restraint systems
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the properly, even if they are not being used.
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or Make sure that you observe the child restraint
remains out, do not transport a child on the system manufacturer's installation
front passenger seat until the system has instructions.
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the G WARNING
front passenger seat will be seriously Child restraint systems or their securing
injured or even killed if the front passenger systems which have been damaged or
front air bag inflates. subjected to a load in an accident can no
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- longer protect as intended. The child cannot
facing child restraint on the front passenger then be restrained in the event of an accident,
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.
use the proper child restraint There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
recommended for the age, size and weight even fatal.
of the child, and secure child restraint with Replace child restraint systems which have
the vehicle's seat belt according to the been damaged or subjected to a load in an
child seat manufacturer's instructions. accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint
G WARNING system checked at a qualified specialist
If the child restraint system is installed workshop, before you install a child restraint
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot system again.
protect as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Z
G WARNING G WARNING
Infants and small children should never share If persons, particularly children are subjected
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
of an accident, they could be crushed cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
between the occupant and seat belt. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
Safety
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is vehicle.

significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ G WARNING
or the child is not properly secured in the child If the child restraint system is subjected to
restraint. direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.
Children that are too large for a child restraint Children may burn themselves on these parts,
must travel in seats using normal seat belts. particularly on the metal parts of the child
Position the shoulder belt across the chest restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt you, always ensure that the child restraint
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
fits properly without a booster. child restraint system has been exposed to
When the child restraint is not in use, remove direct sunlight, let it cool down before
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat securing the child in it. Never leave children
belt to prevent the child restraint from unattended in the vehicle.
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident. If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
Rsecure the child with a child or infant seat
G WARNING restraint system appropriate to the age and
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, weight of the child.
they could: Rmake sure that the infant or child is
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other properly secured at all times while the
people or road users. vehicle is in motion.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
properly secure all infants and children with
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in trip.
motion if, for example, they:
The use of seat belts and infant and child
Rrelease the parking brake. restraint systems is required by law in:
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of Rall 50 states
park position P Rthe U.S. territories
RStart the engine.
Rthe District of Columbia
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rall Canadian provinces
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Infants and children must always be seated in
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
an appropriate infant or child restraint system
leave children or animals unattended in the
recommended for the size and weight of the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
child. The infant or child restraint system
reach of children.
must be properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.

All infant or child restraint systems must meet Installing a child restraint system:
the following standards: X Always comply with the manufacturer's
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety installation instructions.
Standards 213 and 225 X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards belt retractor.
Safety
213 and 210.2 X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
Confirmation that the child restraint system buckle.
corresponds to the standards can be found
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
in the installation instructions that are belt retractor retract it again.
included with the child restraint system. While the seat belt is retracting, you should
Always read and follow the manufacturer's hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
instructions when using an infant or child belt retractor is activated.
restraint system or booster seat. X Push down on the child restraint system to
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle take up any slack.

interior or on the infant or child restraint. Removing a child restraint system/
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
Special seat belt retractor X Always comply with the manufacturer's
G WARNING installation instructions.
X Press the seat belt release button and
If you release the seat belt when driving, the
special seat belt retractor is deactivated. guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is
The released seat belt cannot be engaged
deactivated.
again while driving, because the inertia reel
pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The
child restraint system is no longer properly LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
secured. There is an increased risk of serious in the rear
injury or even fatal injury.
G WARNING
Always keep the seat belt of the activated
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
special seat belt retractor engaged when
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
driving.
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
equipped with a special seat belt retractor. integrated in the child restraint system. In the
When activated, the special seat belt event of an accident, a child might not be
retractor ensures that the seat belt will not restrained correctly. This poses an increased
slacken once the child restraint system has risk of injury or even fatal injury.
been secured. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems with which the child is also secured
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be

sure to observe the manufacturer's
Z
installation instructions and the instructions locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
for correct use of the child restraint system. in the event of an accident. This poses an
! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
child restraint system, make sure that the Always lock rear seat backrests after
seat belt for the center seat does not get installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock
Safety
trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat
damaged. backrests so that they are positioned
vertically.
Top Tether provides an additional connection

between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system secured with LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reduce
the risk of injury even further. If the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
equipped with Top Tether, this should always
be used.
The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
on the rear side of the rear seat backrests.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) securing rings :. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's
instructions when installing the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
securing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
seat according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Top Tether
Top Tether anchorages
G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they X Move head restraint = upwards.
could fold forwards in the event of an X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of restraint system with Top Tether. Always
direction. As a result, child restraint systems comply with the child restraint system
cannot perform their intended protective manufacturer's installation instructions
function. Rear seat backrests that are not when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt B under head Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
restraint = between the two head restraint motion if, for example, they:
bars. Rrelease the parking brake.
X Guide Top Tether belt B downwards Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
between cargo compartment cover : and park position P
Safety
rear seat backrest ;. RStart the engine.
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
B into Top Tether anchorage ?. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Make sure that: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top leave children or animals unattended in the
Tether anchorage ? as shown. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear G WARNING
seat backrest ; and cargo If persons, particularly children are subjected
compartment cover : if cargo to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
compartment cover : is installed. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
RTop Tether belt B is routed between the fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
rear seat backrest ; and the cargo net vehicle.
if the cargo net is installed.
G WARNING
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Comply with
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
the manufacturer's installation
could:
instructions when doing so.
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
X Move head restraint = back down again
or road users
slightly if necessary (Y page 108). Make
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt B. traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
Child-proof locks There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
Important safety notes override feature if children are traveling in the
G WARNING vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other You can activate the following child-proof
people or road users. locks:
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Rrear doors (Y page 66)
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Rrear side windows (Y page 66)
Z
66 Driving safety systems
Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
Safety
children ride in the rear always secure the rear

doors with the child-proof locks.
X To activate/deactivate: press button :.

If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the
driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off,
operation is possible using the switches in
the rear compartment.
You secure each door individually with the

child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door Driving safety systems
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be Overview of driving safety systems
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened In this section, you will find information about
from the outside. the following driving safety systems:
X To activate: press the child-proof lock RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
lever up in the direction of arrow :. (Y page 67)
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)
working properly. RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)

X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock (Y page 68)
lever down in the direction of arrow ;. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance
warning function and adaptive Brake
Override feature for the rear side Assist) (Y page 69)
windows RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 72)
G WARNING REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, (Y page 74)
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 74)
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74)
themselves in the rear side window.
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 76)

If you fail to adapt your driving style or
become distracted, the driving safety

Driving safety systems 67
systems can neither reduce the risk of Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
accident nor override the laws of physics. immediately at a qualified specialist
Driving safety systems are merely aids workshop.
designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in including driving safety systems, will also
Safety
good time. Always adapt your driving style to become inoperative. Observe the information
suit the prevailing road and weather on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 318) and
conditions and maintain a safe distance from display messages which may be shown in the
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. instrument cluster (Y page 283).
i The driving safety systems described only ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
work as effectively as possible when there (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface
is adequate contact between the tires and conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
the road surface. Please pay special even if you only brake gently.
attention to the notes on tires,
recommended minimum tire tread depths, Braking
etc. (Y page 398). X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
In wintry driving conditions, always use brake pedal vigorously until the braking
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, situation is over.
snow chains. Only in this way will the X To make a full brake application:
driving safety systems described in this depress the brake pedal with full force.
section work as effectively as possible.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
General information functions as a reminder to take extra care
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way while driving.
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the Off-road ABS
vehicle when braking. An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument terrain is activated automatically once the off-
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched road program is activated (Y page 248).
on. It goes out when the engine is running. At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The
Important safety notes digging-in effect achieved in the process
i Observe the "Important safety notes" reduces the stopping distance on off-road
section (Y page 66). terrain. This limits steering capability.
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when BAS (Brake Assist System)
braking. The steerability and braking
General information
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems BAS operates in emergency braking
are deactivated. There is an increased danger situations. If you depress the brake pedal
of skidding and accidents.
Z
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking detects a danger of collision, you are assisted
force, thus shortening the stopping distance. when braking.
Important safety notes Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" G WARNING
Safety
section (Y page 66). BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify

G WARNING objects and complex traffic situations.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
in an emergency braking situation is Rintervene unnecessarily
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rnot intervene
In an emergency braking situation, depress There is a risk of an accident.
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
the wheels from locking.
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Braking
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until G WARNING
the emergency braking situation is over. BAS PLUS does not react:
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rto people or animals
The brakes will function as usual once you Rto oncoming vehicles
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
PLUS) critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
General information Always pay careful attention to the traffic
i Observe the "Important safety notes" situation and be ready to brake.
section (Y page 66). In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles recognition can be impaired.
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. Recognition by the radar sensor system is
For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor also impaired in the event of:
system must be operational. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS covering the sensors
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the Rinterference by other radar sources
path of your vehicle for an extended period of
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
time.
example in parking garages
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
system is still available with complete brake motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
boosting effect and BAS.
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk relative to the center of your vehicle
of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the Following damage to the front end of the
effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified

specialist workshop. This also applies to COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. General notes
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
Function Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance
Safety
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the warning function, which are described in the
brake force necessary if: following.
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
Distance warning function
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph Important safety notes
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, i Observe the "Important safety notes"
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake section (Y page 66).
pressure will be carried out at the last
possible moment. G WARNING
When driving at a speed above 20 mph The distance warning function does not react:
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal Rto people or animals
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the Rto oncoming vehicles
brake pressure to a value adapted to the Rto crossing traffic
traffic situation. Rwhen cornering
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
hazardous situations with vehicles in front
provide a warning in all critical situations.
within a speed range between 4 mph
There is a risk of an accident.
(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
situation and be ready to brake.
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to
stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles. G WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high clearly identify objects and complex traffic
braking force, preventative passenger situations.
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are In such cases, the distance warning function
activated simultaneously. may:
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the Rgive an unnecessary warning
emergency braking situation is over. Rnot give a warning
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes
function as usual again, if:
situation and do not rely solely on the distance
Ryou release the brake pedal warning function.
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your Function
vehicle X To activate/deactivate: activate or
If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), BAS deactivate the distance warning function in
PLUS is likewise deactivated. the on-board computer (Y page 272).
Z
If the distance warning function is not Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
activated, the æ symbol appears in the example in parking garages
assistance graphics display. Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
The distance warning function can help you motorbike
to minimize the risk of a front-end collision Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Safety
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of relative to the center of your vehicle
such a collision. If the distance warning Following damage to the front end of the
function detects that there is a risk of a vehicle, have the configuration and operation
collision, you will be warned visually and of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
acoustically. The distance warning function specialist workshop. This also applies to
cannot prevent a collision without your collisions at low speeds where there is no
intervention. visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function Adaptive Brake Assist
warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in
front. An intermittent warning tone will then i Observe the "Important safety notes"
sound, and the · distance warning lamp section (Y page 66).
will light up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING
X Brake immediately in order to increase the Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
distance from the vehicle in front. identify objects and complex traffic
or situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an
do so. accident.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Always pay careful attention to the traffic
complicated but non-critical driving situation and be ready to brake.
conditions may also cause the system to
display a warning. G WARNING
With the help of the radar sensor system, the Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
distance warning function can detect Rto people or animals
obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle Rto oncoming vehicles
for an extended period of time. Rto crossing traffic
From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h), Rto stationary obstacles
the distance warning function can also react Rwhen cornering
to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles. As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
If you approach an obstacle and the distance
risk of an accident.
warning function detects a risk of a collision,
the system will initially alert you both visually Always pay careful attention to the traffic
and acoustically. situation and be ready to brake.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Due to the nature of the system, particularly
be impaired if: complicated but non-critical driving
Rdirton the sensors or anything else conditions may also cause Brake Assist to
covering the sensors intervene.
Rsnow or heavy rain Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking
Rinterference by other radar sources during hazardous situations at speeds above

20 mph (30 km/h) and uses the radar sensor Rinterference by other radar sources
system to evaluate the traffic situation. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the example in parking garages
distance warning signal can detect obstacles Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
that are in the path of your vehicle for an motorbike
extended period of time.
Safety
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Should you approach an obstacle and relative to the center of your vehicle
Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of Following damage to the front end of the
collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the vehicle, have the configuration and operation
braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
collision. Should you apply the brakes specialist workshop. This also applies to
vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will collisions at low speeds where there is no
automatically increase the braking force to a visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
level suitable for the traffic conditions.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
General notes
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal i Observe the "Important safety notes"
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
section (Y page 66).
collision ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your i.e. power transmission between the tires and
vehicle the road surface.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
If Adaptive Brake Assist requires particularly from the direction desired by the driver, one
high brake pressure, preventive passenger or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
deployed simultaneously.
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been recognized as such at least once
over the period of observation. Adaptive ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Brake Assist does not react to stationary ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
obstacles. Traction control brakes the drive wheels
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due individually if they spin. This enables you to
to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
the brake system remains available with full for example if the road surface is slippery on
brake boosting effect and BAS. one side. In addition, more drive torque is
In particular, the detection of obstacles can transferred to the wheel or wheels with
be impaired if there is: traction.
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else Traction control remains active, even if you
covering the sensors deactivate ESP®.
Rsnow or heavy rain In appropriate driving situations, activate the
off-road program (Y page 248).
Z
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Characteristics of ESP®

System)
General information
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 248). beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
Safety
Important safety notes If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning

lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
If ESP® intervenes:
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any
driving safety systems are deactivated. This circumstances.
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a as necessary when pulling away.

qualified specialist workshop. X Adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate the
vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a ECO start/stop function
brake test dynamometer. Switch off the The ECO start/stop function switches the
ignition. engine off automatically when the vehicle
Application of the brakes by ESP® may stops moving. The engine starts
otherwise destroy the brake system. automatically when the driver wants to pull
away again. ESP® remains in its previously
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or selected status. Example: if ESP® was
performance tests may only be carried out deactivated before the engine was switched
on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
operate the vehicle on such a engine is switched on again.
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
workshop. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system. Deactivating/activating ESP®
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp Important safety notes

in the instrument cluster lights up You can select between the following states
continuously when the engine is running. of ESP®:
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å RESP® is activated.
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not RESP® is deactivated.
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps G WARNING
(Y page 321) and display messages which If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
may be shown in the instrument cluster stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
(Y page 283). risk of skidding and an accident.
i Only use wheels with the recommended Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function described in the following.
properly.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the The spinning of the wheels results in a
following situations: cutting action for better traction on loose
Rwhen surfaces.
using snow chains
Rtraction control is still activated.
Rin deep snow
RESP® still provides support when you
Ron sand or gravel
Safety
brake.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will Off-road ESP®
otherwise not be able to stabilize the
vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
wheel starts to spin. terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 248).
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
is oversteering or understeering, thus
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
improving traction.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
ESP® trailer stabilization
G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from
swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity
can tip over before ESP® can detect this.
Always adapt your driving style to the
X To switch off: press button :.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the combination) begins to lurch, you can only
instrument cluster lights up. stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by
X To switch on: press button :. depressing the brake firmly.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
instrument cluster goes out. detect if the vehicle/trailer combination
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated by braking and limiting the engine output until
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels the vehicle/trailer combination has
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in stabilized.
the instrument cluster flashes. In such Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. about 37 mph (60 km/h).
If you deactivate ESP®: Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is
RESP®
deactivated because of a malfunction.
no longer improves driving stability.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
Z
EBD (electronic brake force With the help of the radar sensor system,
distribution) PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
are in front of your vehicle for an extended
General information period of time.
EBD monitors and controls the brake PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
Safety
pressure on the rear wheels to improve the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and
driving stability while braking. reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,
Important safety notes you will be warned visually and acoustically
as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
section for driving safety systems
intervention.
(Y page 66).
G WARNING Important safety notes
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This G WARNING
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your
You should therefore adapt your driving style vehicle by a partial application of the brakes
to the different handling characteristics. Have if a danger of collision is detected. There may
the brake system checked at a qualified be a collision unless you also brake.
specialist workshop. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent
a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Observe information regarding indicator and Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
warning lamps (Y page 319) as well as take evasive action.
display messages (Y page 285).
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
ADAPTIVE BRAKE identify objects and complex traffic
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety conditions.
and offers increased braking comfort. In In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
BRAKE also has the HOLD function brake the vehicle
(Y page 206) and hill start assist
Rnot give a warning or intervene
(Y page 161).
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
PRE-SAFE® Brake situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
General information intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.

G WARNING the · distance warning lamp will light up

PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
Rto crossing traffic
Safety
so.
Rwhen cornering
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
automatically under the following conditions:
give warnings nor intervene in all critical
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
Always pay careful attention to the traffic seat belts fastened
situation and be ready to brake. and
Rthe vehicle speed is between
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and
recognition can be impaired. 124 mph (200 km/h)
Recognition by the radar sensor system is At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
also impaired in the event of: (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else stationary objects. Examples of stationary
covering the sensors objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
Rinterference by other radar sources
i If there is an increased risk of collision,
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for preventive passenger protection measures
example in parking garages (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
motorbike remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
relative to the center of your vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking,
Following damage to the front end of the up to the point of full brake application.
vehicle, have the configuration and operation Automatic emergency braking is not
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified performed until immediately prior to an
specialist workshop. This also applies to imminent accident.
collisions at low speeds where there is no You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
Function
Ractivating kickdown.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or Rreleasing the brake pedal.
deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
board computer (Y page 272).
ended automatically if:
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
display. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph collision.

Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
(7 km/h), this function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An front of your vehicle.
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
Z
76 Theft deterrent locking system
If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), PRE- In the event that the engine cannot be
SAFE® Brake is deactivated. started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
STEER CONTROL Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in
particular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive system is armed after approximately
steering support from STEER CONTROL. 15 seconds.
Power steering will, however, continue to
function. X To disarm using the SmartKey: unlock
the vehicle with the SmartKey.
or
Theft deterrent locking system X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To disarm using KEYLESS-GO: unlock the
Immobilizer
vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove or
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the Start/Stop button on the
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
ignition off and open the driver's door. the vehicle.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from alarm system is armed and you open:
being started without the correct SmartKey. Ra door
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Rthe tailgate
Anyone can start the engine if a valid
SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. Rthe hood
i The immobilizer is always deactivated

when you start the engine.

Theft deterrent locking system 77
X To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & button
on the SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
Safety
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
the vehicle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the
Customer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the
message or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace
service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
Z
78

79
Useful information .............................. 80

SmartKey ............................................. 80
Doors .................................................... 86
Cargo compartment ............................ 89
Side windows ...................................... 93
Sliding sunroof .................................... 97
Opening and closing

80 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
models and all standard and optional unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
equipment of your vehicle available at the could cause the engine to be switched off.
time of publication of the Operator's There is a risk of an accident.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
Opening and closing
not be equipped with all features before inserting the SmartKey into the
described. This also applies to safety- ignition lock.
related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
SmartKey vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Important safety notes Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
G WARNING phone or another SmartKey
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
they could: foil
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
people or road users. This can affect the functionality of the
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in temperature-controlled cup holder.
motion if, for example, they: Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be
Rrelease the parking brake. recognized.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P. SmartKey functions
Rstarting the engine.

reach of children.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even : & To lock the vehicle
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the ; F To open/close the tailgate
vehicle. = % To unlock the vehicle

SmartKey 81
X To unlock centrally: press button =. KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid

If you do not open the vehicle within SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: establishing a radio connection between the
vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rwhen the external door handles are
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is
touched
armed again.
Rwhen starting the engine
X To lock centrally: press button :. Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
Opening and closing

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking

and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 276).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
comes on if it is activated in the on-board surface of the door handle.
computer (Y page 275). X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor
surface :.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
KEYLESS-GO
recessed sensor surface ; for an
General notes extended period.
Bear in mind that the engine can be started Further information on the convenience
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a closing feature (Y page 95).
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only
the cargo compartment of the vehicle is
Locking/unlocking centrally unlocked.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry Changing the settings of the locking
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the system
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a
conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle You can change the settings of the locking
by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock system. This means that only the driver's door
it using the & button on the SmartKey. and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
the distance between the key and the frequently travel on your own.
corresponding door handle must not be X To change the setting: press and hold
greater than 3 ft (1 m). down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
Z
82 SmartKey
seconds until the battery check lamp There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
flashes twice (Y page 83). X To turn the alarm off with the
i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button
changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey.
vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or
Rlocks
or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Runlocks the vehicle or
Opening and closing
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
X To unlock the driver's door: press the GO: press the Start/Stop button in the
% button once. ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
or
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as vehicle.
follows:
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
inner surface of the door handle on the automatically.
driver's door. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
surface of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
Removing the mechanical key
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 81).
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice (Y page 83).
Mechanical key
: Release catch
General notes ; Mechanical key
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or X Push release catch : in the direction of
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key.
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm For further information about:
system will be triggered (Y page 76). Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 88)
Runlocking the cargo compartment
(Y page 93)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 88)

SmartKey 83
SmartKey battery i You can get a battery at any qualified

G WARNING Replacing the battery
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can X Take the mechanical key out of the
result in severe health problems. There is a SmartKey (Y page 82).
risk of fatal injury.
Opening and closing

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal. : Battery compartment cover
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ ; Mechanical key
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
Checking the battery in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly. = Battery
X Change the battery (Y page 83).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
Rlocksor
Runlocks the vehicle
Z
84 SmartKey
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Opening and closing
X Insert the front tabs of battery

compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.

SmartKey 85
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening and closing

& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 83) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 83).
X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 83) and replace it if
the mechanical key.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
86 Doors

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing
(Y page 388).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors G WARNING
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
they could: vehicle.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
G WARNING
people or road users.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in occupants. There is a risk of injury,
motion if, for example, they: particularly in the event of sudden braking or
Rrelease the parking brake. a sudden change in direction.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of Always store objects so that they cannot be
parking position P. flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the You should preferably place luggage or loads
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never in the cargo compartment. Observe the
leave children or animals unattended in the loading guidelines (Y page 332).
reach of children.

Doors 87
Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 66).
Opening and closing

If the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. Switch off the alarm : To unlock
(Y page 76). ; To lock
X To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a front door from inside the
X Front door: pull door handle ;. vehicle even if it has been locked.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
If the vehicle has been locked using the
up. The door is unlocked and can be locking button for the central locking, or has
opened. been locked automatically, and a door is
X Rear door: pull up locking knob : on the opened from the inside:
relevant rear door. Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
The rear door is unlocked and can be
previously been fully unlocked
opened.
Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The buttons are located on
both front doors.
Z
88 Doors
Automatic locking feature X To power-close a door: push the door into

the lock up to the first detent position.
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X To power-close the tailgate: lightly press
the tailgate downwards.
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully
closed.
Opening and closing
Unlocking the driver's door

(mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
: To deactivate
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
; To activate
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
X To deactivate: press and hold button : open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
for about five seconds until a tone sounds. system will be triggered (Y page 76).
X To activate: press and hold button ; for X Take the mechanical key out of the
about five seconds until a tone sounds. SmartKey (Y page 82).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
i If you press one of the two buttons and
the driver's door as far as it will go.
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore be locked out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking

function on and off using the on-board 1 To unlock
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
Power closing The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid
it.
into their locks automatically even if they are
X Insert the mechanical key into the
only partly closed.
SmartKey.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

Cargo compartment 89
X Open the driver's door. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
doors and the tailgate. vehicle.
X Press the locking button (Y page 87).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the G WARNING
front-passenger door and the rear doors Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
are still visible. Press down the locking gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
knobs by hand, if necessary. is open when the engine is running,
Opening and closing

X Close the driver's door. particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
X Take the mechanical key out of the
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
SmartKey (Y page 82).
Turn off the engine before opening the
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
the driver's door as far as it will go.
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
1 To lock
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
as it will go to position 1. rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove that there is sufficient clearance above and
it. behind the tailgate.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate i Tailgate opening dimensions
are locked. (Y page 452).
X Insert the mechanical key into the You should preferably place luggage or loads
SmartKey. in the cargo compartment. Observe the
i If you lock the vehicle as described above, loading guidelines (Y page 332).
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo
theft alarm system is not armed. compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
Vehicles without the EASY-PACK
Cargo compartment tailgate: the tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Runlocked from inside with the emergency
G WARNING release
Z
90 Cargo compartment
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate Opening/closing manually from

you can: outside
Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Opening
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Opening and closing
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the

emergency release
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Tailgate reversing feature
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
X Pull handle :.
obstructs or restricts the tailgate during the
closing procedure. The tailgate opens again X Raise the tailgate.
automatically. The automatic reversing Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute you pull handle : and then release it, the
for your attention when closing the tailgate. tailgate opens automatically.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react: Closing
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or X Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
driver’s door, or X Lock the vehicle if necessary with

Rpress the closing or locking button on the the & button on the SmartKey or with
tailgate, or KEYLESS-GO.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
lock.

Cargo compartment 91
Opening/closing automatically from Opening the tailgate automatically

outside You can open the tailgate automatically with
Important safety notes the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the
G WARNING SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
Parts of the body could become trapped or
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
Opening and closing

and let it go again immediately.
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury. Closing the tailgate automatically
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the G WARNING
closing area during the closing process.
Parts of the body could become trapped
Use one of the following options to stop the during automatic closing of the tailgate.
closing process: Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. standing in the closing area or may enter the
Rpress the remote operating switch on the closing area during the closing process. There
driver's door. is a risk of injury.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
tailgate. closing area during the closing process.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate. Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
G WARNING Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Rpress the remote operating switch on the
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate driver's door.
is open when the engine is running, Rpress the closing or locking button on the
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust tailgate.
fumes could enter the passenger Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
Turn off the engine before opening the
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the

rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 452).
i Notes on the reversing feature for the
tailgate (Y page 90). Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with
EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO)
: Closing button
; Locking button
Z
92 Cargo compartment
X To close: press closing button : on the Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate. tailgate.
or Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate closes. G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close
is open when the engine is running,
Opening and closing
and lock the tailgate.

particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
XPress locking button ; on the tailgate. fumes could enter the passenger
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. Turn off the engine before opening the
All the doors must be shut and the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
SmartKey located in the vicinity of the
tailgate. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in that there is sufficient clearance above and
the ignition. behind the tailgate.
If the tailgate touches an object while i Tailgate opening dimensions
closing, the closing procedure is (Y page 452).
interrupted and the tailgate reopens.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the for the tailgate (Y page 90).
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
lock. Opening and closing
Opening/closing automatically from

inside
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There You can open and close the tailgate from the
is a risk of injury. driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the and unlocked.
closing area during the closing process. X To open: pull remote operating switch :
Use one of the following options to stop the for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
closing process:
X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. or 2 in the ignition lock.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the X Press remote operating switch for
driver's door. tailgate : until the tailgate is closed.

Side windows 93
Limiting the opening angle of the i Tailgate opening dimensions

tailgate (Y page 452).
Important safety notes If the tailgate can no longer be opened from

outside the vehicle, use the emergency
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to release on the inside of the tailgate.
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise Opening
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
Opening and closing

outside.
Activating
You can limit the opening angle of the
tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its
opening range, up to approximately 4 in
(10 cm) before the stop.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate.
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
X Take the mechanical key out of the
the tailgate.
SmartKey (Y page 82).
X To stop the opening procedure at the
X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening
desired position: press the closing button
(Y page 91) in the tailgate or pull the handle in paneling :.
on the outside of the tailgate again. X Turn mechanical key ;90° clockwise.
X To store the position: press and hold the X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of
closing button in the tailgate until you hear the arrow and open the tailgate.
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 88),
tailgate will now stop in the stored position the cargo compartment is also locked.
when opening.
Side windows
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button
(Y page 91) in the tailgate until you hear G WARNING
two short tones. While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side
Tailgate emergency release window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Important safety notes Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the somebody becomes trapped, release the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure switch or pull the switch to close the side
that there is sufficient clearance above and window again.
behind the tailgate.
Z
94 Side windows
G WARNING Make sure that no body parts are in close

While opening the side windows, body parts proximity during the closing procedure. If
in the closing area could become trapped. someone becomes trapped, press the switch
There is a risk of injury. to open the side window again.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the Opening and closing the side
switch or press the switch to open the side windows
Opening and closing
window again. The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
G WARNING each door for the corresponding side window.
If children operate the side windows they The switches on the driver's door take
could become trapped, particularly if they are precedence.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
: Front left
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again ; Front right
automatically. However, the automatic = Rear right
reversing feature is only an aid and does not ? Rear left
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
G WARNING X To open: press the corresponding switch.
The reversing feature does not react: X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small i If you press the switch beyond the point
fingers of resistance, an automatic opening/
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing closing process is started in the
movement corresponding direction. You can stop
Rduring resetting automatic operation by operating the
Rwhen closing the side window again switch again.
manually immediately after automatic i You can continue to operate the side
reversing windows after you switch off the engine or
This means that the reversing feature cannot remove the SmartKey. This function is
prevent someone being trapped in these available for up to five minutes or until the
situations. There is a risk of injury. driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Side windows 95
i The side windows cannot be operated Convenience closing feature

from the rear when the override feature for
the side windows is activated (Y page 66). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Convenience opening When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
General notes trapped in the closing area of the side window
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
Opening and closing

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
injury.
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions Observe the complete closing procedure
simultaneously: when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
Runlock the vehicle in close proximity during the closing
Ropen the side windows procedure.
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the When you lock the vehicle, you can
roller sunblinds simultaneously:
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the Rclose the side windows
driver's seat Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
i The convenience opening feature can roof with power tilt/sliding panel
only be operated using the SmartKey. The On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the roller sunblinds.
SmartKey must be near the driver's door Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
handle. RRelease the & button to interrupt the
closing procedure.
Convenience opening RPress and hold the % button to open.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on
RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior
the driver's door.
door handle to interrupt the closing
X Press and hold the % button until the
procedure.
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the RTo open, pull the same door handle
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
immediately and hold it firmly. The door
panel are in the desired position.
windows and the sliding sunroof will open
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
for as long as the door handle is held but
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
the door is not opened.
roller sunblinds are opened first.
X Press and hold the % button again until i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding for:
panel is in the desired position. Rthe side window (Y page 94)
X To interrupt convenience opening: Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 98)
release the % button.
Z
96 Side windows
Using the SmartKey sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the
vehicle, on vehicles without KEYLESS-GO the i Make sure you only touch recessed
SmartKey must be near the door handle. sensor surface :.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the X Make sure that all the side windows and the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
the driver's door. power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
Opening and closing
X Press and hold the & button until the On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the tilt/sliding panel:
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
panel are fully closed.
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
of the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with sliding panel close.
power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power release recessed sensor surface : on the
tilt/sliding panel:
door handle.
X Press and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel close. Resetting the side windows
X To interrupt convenience closing: If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
release the & button. you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
Using KEYLESS-GO X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the ignition lock.

vehicle. All the doors must be closed. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed. (Y page 94)
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 94).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the the side window has been reset correctly.
door handle until the side windows and the If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.

Sliding sunroof 97
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:

Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
switch briefly in any direction
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding stopped.
sunroof.
G WARNING
G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are
body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
proximity during the opening and closing leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
procedures.
Z
98 Sliding sunroof
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free The closing process is stopped.
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the Operating the sliding sunroof
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged. Opening and closing
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
Opening and closing
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor

pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window. The noise will be
reduced or eliminated.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an Overhead control panel
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object : To raise
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during ; To open
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
= To close/lower
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
relieve you of the responsibility of paying ignition lock.
attention when closing the sliding sunroof. X Press or pull the 2 switch in the
G WARNING corresponding direction.

The reversing feature does not react: i If you press the 2 switch beyond the
Rto
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
closing process is started in the
fingers
corresponding direction. You can stop
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
automatic operation by operating the
movement switch again.
Rduring resetting
When opening and raising the roof,
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again automatic operation is only available if the
manually immediately after automatic sliding sunroof is in the closed position.
reversing The sun protection cover automatically opens
This means that the reversing feature cannot along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
prevent someone being trapped in these or close the sun protection cover manually
situations. There is a risk of injury. when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
Make sure that no body parts are in close i You can continue to operate the sliding
proximity during the closing procedure.
sunroof after switching off the engine or
If somebody becomes trapped: removing the SmartKey from the ignition
Rrelease the switch immediately, or lock. This function is available for up to five
Rduring automatic operation, push the minutes or until the driver's or front-
switch briefly in any direction passenger door is opened.

Sliding sunroof 99
Resetting closing process is started in the

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting,
switch again.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The automatic raising feature is available
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Opening and closing

ignition lock. Operating the roller sunblinds for the
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
(Y page 98). panel
X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another Important safety notes
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be G WARNING
fully opened and closed again (Y page 98). When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps parts of the body could be trapped between
above again. the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
Operating the panorama roof with parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
power tilt/sliding panel sunblind.
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior

from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only
be opened and closed together when the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Overhead control panel is closed.
: To raise
; To open Roller sunblind reversing feature
= To close/lower The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
panel can only be operated when the roller blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
sunblind is open (Y page 100). closing process, the roller sunblind opens
X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to again automatically. However, the automatic
position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the
attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
corresponding direction.
i If you press the 2 switch beyond the
Z
100 Sliding sunroof
G WARNING Resetting the panorama roof with

The reversing feature especially does not power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
react to soft, light and thin objects such as sunblinds
small fingers. This means that the reversing ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/
feature cannot prevent someone being sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
trapped in these situations. There is a risk of cannot be fully opened or closed after
injury. resetting, contact a qualified specialist
When closing make sure that no parts of the workshop.
Opening and closing
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing the roller

sunblinds
Overhead control panel

: To open
; To open
= To close
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Overhead control panel ignition lock.
: To open X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point
; To open of resistance in the direction of arrow =
= To close until the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel is fully closed.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an
ignition lock.
additional second.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point
corresponding direction.
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
i If you press the 2 switch beyond the until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an
closing process is started in the
additional second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with
switch again. power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 99) and the

Sliding sunroof 101
roller sunblinds (Y page 100) can be fully

opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Opening and closing
Z
102 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Opening and closing

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.

The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
cannot be closed and again slightly:
you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2
cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment
feature.
i Note on the automatic reversing feature of the sliding sunroof (Y page 98).

103
Useful information ............................ 104

Correct driver's seat position .......... 104
Seats .................................................. 105
Steering wheel .................................. 111
Mirrors ............................................... 114
Memory function .............................. 117
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

104 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 105).
i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted
models and all standard and optional properly.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106)
time of publication of the Operator's When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Manual. Country-specific differences are
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features as possible.
described. This also applies to safety- Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

i Read the information on qualified Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). vertical position.

Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is
G WARNING adjusted properly.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you When doing so, make sure that you have
do the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by
steering wheel or mirrors the center of the head restraint. Also make
Rfasten the seat belt sure that you have adjusted the head
restraint so that the back of your head is as
close to the head restraint as possible. This
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, will be the case if the head restraint is
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your adjusted correctly (Y page 107).
seat belt before starting the engine. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 111).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 111)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 112)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 55).

Seats 105
X Check whether you have fastened seat accidentally press the electrical seat
belt ; properly (Y page 57). adjustment buttons and become trapped.
The seat belt should: There is a risk of injury.
Rfit snugly across your body While moving the seats, make sure that your
Rbe routed across the middle of your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
shoulder
system.
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints G WARNING
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a

occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
way that you have a good view of road and seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
traffic conditions (Y page 114).
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings with the memory function G WARNING
(Y page 117).
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
Seats risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
Important safety notes in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
G WARNING installed. Before driving off, make sure for
Children could become trapped if they adjust every vehicle occupant that the center of the
the seats, particularly when unattended. head restraint supports the back of the head
There is a risk of injury. at about eye level.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
G WARNING upright position. When braking or in the event
You could lose control of your vehicle if you of an accident, you could slide underneath the
do the following while driving: seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
Radjust
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
the driver's seat, head restraint,
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
There is a risk of an accident. is in the upright position.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your G WARNING
seat belt before starting the engine. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
G WARNING seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or we strongly recommend that children be
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
thereby injured. Children in particular could Regardless of seating position, children 12
Z
106 Seats
years old and under must be seated and i Further related subjects:
properly secured in an appropriately sized RImportant safety notes on air bags
child restraint system or booster seat (Y page 44)
recommended for the size and weight of the RCargo compartment enlargement
child. For additional information, see the
(folding down the rear bench seat)
"Children in the vehicle" section.
(Y page 335)
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is RSecuring children in the vehicle
significantly increased if the child restraints
(Y page 60)
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Adjusting the seats electrically
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care". : Head restraint height
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the ; Seat cushion angle
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the = Seat height
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible. A Backrest angle
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
not cover the seats with insulating SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, passenger seat will be moved to a better
seat covers, child seats or booster seats. position if it was previously in an
! Make sure that there are no objects in the unfavorable position.
footwell or behind the seats when resetting i You can store the seat settings using the
the seats. There is a risk that the seats memory function (Y page 117).
and/or the objects could be damaged.
i It is not possible to remove the head
restraints from the front seats. The rear- Adjusting the head restraints
compartment head restraints, however, General notes
can be removed (Y page 108).
For more information, contact a qualified Pay attention to the important safety notes
specialist workshop. (Y page 105).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust

Seats 107
the height and angle of the head restraints to There are several notches.
the correct position. X To move backwards: press and hold
release button : and push the head
Adjusting the head restraints manually restraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desired
Adjusting the head restraint height
position, release the button and make sure
that the head restraint is engaged in
position.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.
Adjusting the head restraints

electrically
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the (Y page 106) up or down in the direction of
desired position. the arrow.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head Adjusting the luxury head restraints
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the

head restraint
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or left-
hand side bolster : into the desired
position.
With this function you can adjust the distance
X To adjust the fore/aft position of the
between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head. head restraint: push or pull the head
restraint in the direction of arrow ;.
X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
it engages. of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
Z
108 Seats
Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
backrests
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
You can adjust the angle of the backrests in

the second row of seats. There are ten detent
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,
positions to choose from.
press release catch :.
X Pull the left or right release lever ;
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
upwards in the direction of the arrow until
desired position.
relevant backrest : is fully released.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
X Pull backrest : forwards in the direction
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position. of the arrow and allow it to engage.
X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,
Removing and installing the rear seat lean firmly against backrest :.
head restraints
Adjusting the multicontour seat

You can set the multicontour seat using
COMAND. See the separate COMAND
Operating Instructions.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to

the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position. : To raise the backrest contour
; To soften the backrest contour

Seats 109
= To lower the backrest contour The three red indicator lamps in the button
? To harden the backrest contour indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
You can adjust the contour of the front seat from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
backrests individually to provide optimum eight minutes.
support for your back.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
Switching the seat heating on/off minutes.
The system automatically switches off
Activating/deactivating approximately 35 minutes after it is set to

level 1.
G WARNING
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited until the desired heating level is set.
ability to react to excessively high X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
temperatures may be affected or they may until all the indicator lamps go out.
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on heating may switch off.
repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Rear seats
Z
110 Seats
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 95). The seat
ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.

Steering wheel 111
Problems with the seat ventilation

The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
: Release lever
G WARNING ; To adjust the steering wheel height
Children could injure themselves if they
= To adjust the steering wheel position
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
injury.
X Push release lever : down completely.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The steering column is unlocked.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked.
manually X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
G WARNING
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the fore-and-aft direction.
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Z
112 Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you

electrically remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
: To adjust the steering wheel height

; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock.
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 113)
RStoringsettings (Y page 117)
Steering wheel heating


X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.

Steering wheel 113
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
heating has switched consumers are switched on.
off prematurely or X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
cannot be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Always wait until the adjustment process is

complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
G WARNING in and out of your vehicle easier.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Position of the steering wheel when the
making adjustments, make sure that no one EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel swings upwards when
If somebody becomes trapped: you:
Rpress Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
one of the memory function position
buttons, or Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
Rmove the switch for steering wheel position 1
adjustment in the opposite direction to that Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
in which the steering wheel is moving. in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
The adjustment process is stopped. i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
G WARNING stop.
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature, they can become trapped, Position of the steering wheel for
particularly when unattended. There is a risk driving
of injury.
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when:
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
G WARNING lock
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT or
feature is making adjustments, you could lose Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
accident.
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
Z
114 Mirrors
also automatically moved to the previously This means that you could misjudge the
set position. distance from road users traveling behind,
The last position of the steering wheel is e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
stored when you switch off the ignition or accident.
when you store the setting with the memory For this reason, always make sure of the
function (Y page 117). actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is

opened. This occurs irrespective of the
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY
feature is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 277). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
Mirrors
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
Rear-view mirror exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
forwards or back. field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically
if the rear window defroster is switched on
Exterior mirrors and the outside temperature is low.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.

Mirrors 115
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
electrically soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
1 or 2 in the ignition lock. into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding
X Briefly press button :.
exterior mirrors: press and hold button for
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
folding the mirrors :(Y page 115) until you
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are hear a click and then the mirror engage in
always folded out fully while driving. They position.
could otherwise vibrate. The mirror housing is engaged again and
i If you are driving faster than you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold (Y page 114).
in the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will glare mode if the following conditions are met
otherwise not fold in when you select the simultaneously:
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the Rthe ignition is switched on and
on-board computer (Y page 277). Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in sensor in the rear-view mirror.
i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode
X Briefly press button :.
if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior
lighting is switched on.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer:
(Y page 277)
Z
116 Mirrors
Parking position for the exterior Using the memory button

mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirror
= Adjustment button
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ? Memory button M
; Button for the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
= Adjustment button the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
? Memory button M engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you position 2 in the ignition lock.
engage reverse gear. You can store this X With the exterior mirror on the front-
position. passenger side activated, use adjustment
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
ignition lock. curb should be visible.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on X Press memory button M ? and one of the
the front-passenger side. arrows on adjustment button = within

X Engage reverse gear. three seconds.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The parking position is stored if the exterior
side moves to the preset parking position. mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you the steps.
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving
position.

Memory function 117
Calling up a stored parking position G WARNING

setting When the memory function adjusts the seat
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle
While the memory function is making
adjustments, make sure that no one has any
body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped,
immediately release the memory function

position button. The adjustment process is
stopped.
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror G WARNING

; Button for the front-passenger side Children could become trapped if they
exterior mirror activate the memory function, particularly
= Adjustment button when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
? Memory button M When leaving the vehicle, always take the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
ignition lock. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
With the memory function, you can store up
passenger side using button ;. to three different settings, e.g. for three
X Engage reverse gear. different people.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The following settings are stored as a single
side moves to the stored parking position. memory preset:
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
side moves back to its original position: restraint
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
(15 km/h) Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
mirror on the driver's side sides
Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
Z
118 Memory function
X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 112) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 114).
X Press the M memory button and then press
one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or
3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the

SmartKey has been removed.
Calling up a stored setting

XPress the button for storage position 1, 2
or 3. Keep pressing until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
buttons.

119

Exterior lighting ................................ 120
Interior lighting ................................. 127
Replacing bulbs ................................. 129
Windshield wipers ............................ 132
Lights and windshield wipers

120 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting
i This Operator's Manual describes all Setting options

models and all standard and optional Exterior lighting can be set using:
equipment of your vehicle available at the Rthe light switch
time of publication of the Operator's
Rthe combination switch (Y page 123)
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe on-board computer (Y page 274)
not be equipped with all features

described. This also applies to safety- Light switch
Operation
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 28).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed 1W Left-hand standing lamps
obligations. 2X Right-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
Conversion to symmetrical low beam controlled by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on BR Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not X Turn the light switch to Ã.
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. The exterior lighting (except the parking/
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if
specialist workshop as close to the border as you:
possible before driving in these countries. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam
in position 0.
after returning
Have the headlamps converted back to Automatic headlamp mode
asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a G WARNING
qualified specialist workshop as soon as When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
possible after crossing the border again. beam headlamps may not be switched on

Exterior lighting 121
automatically if there is fog, snow or other X To switch on automatic headlamp

causes of poor visibility due to the weather mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Only for Canada:
accident.
The daytime running lamps improve the
In such situations, turn the light switch to visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
L. daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
The automatic headlamp feature is only an deactivated.
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
lighting at all times.
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in high ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, you turn on the
daytime running lamps and parking lamps.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
1W Left-hand standing lamps USA only:
2X Right-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the
3T Parking lamps, license plate and visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
instrument cluster lighting this, the daytime running lamps function must
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, be switched on using the on-board computer
controlled by the light sensor (Y page 274).
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If the engine is running and you turn the light
BR Rear fog lamp
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lamps.
light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
i In the USA, the daytime running lamps are
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Low-beam headlamps
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: G WARNING
the parking lamps are switched on or off When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
automatically depending on the brightness
beam headlamps may not be switched on
of the ambient light.
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
RWith the engine running: if you have
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
activated the daytime running lamps conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
function via the on-board computer, the accident.
daytime running lamps or the low-beam
In such situations, turn the light switch to
headlamps and parking lamps are switched
L.
on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
Z

instrument cluster lighting
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
BR Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
1W Left-hand standing lamps lamps.
2X Right-hand standing lamps X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
3T Parking lamps, license plate and SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
instrument cluster lighting or start the engine.
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
controlled by the light sensor X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
BR Rear fog lamp instrument cluster lights up.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam R button.
headlamps switch on when the ignition is The yellow R indicator lamp in the
switched on and the light switch is set to the instrument cluster goes out.
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog. Parking lamps
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: ! If the battery has been excessively
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to discharged, the parking lamps or standing
position 2 or start the engine. lamps are automatically switched off to
X Turn the light switch to L.
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
The green L indicator lamp in the
according to legal standards. Avoid the
instrument cluster lights up.
continuous use of the T parking lamps
Rear fog lamp for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
1W Left-hand standing lamps

2X Right-hand standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
1W Left-hand standing lamps

2X Right-hand standing lamps Combination switch

3T Parking lamps, license plate and Turn signal
BR Rear fog lamp
X To switch on: turn light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
1W Left-hand standing lamps X To indicate: press the combination switch
2X Right-hand standing lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction

of arrow ; or ?.
BR Rear fog lamp
Z
High-beam headlamps High-beam flasher
: High-beam headlamps : High-beam headlamps

; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right

= High-beam flasher = High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
position 2 or start the engine. engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Pull the combination switch in the direction
X Press the combination switch beyond the of arrow =.
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the Ã position, the high-beam Hazard warning lamps
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the high-
beam headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
it controls activation of the high-beam press button :.
headlamps (Y page 125). All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.

The hazard warning lamps automatically Cornering light function

switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill.
The hazard warning lamps switch off
automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
of over 6mph (10km/h) again after a full
brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off. The cornering light function improves the

illumination of the road over a wide angle in
the direction you are turning, enabling better
Headlamp cleaning system visibility in tight bends, for example. It can
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if only be activated when the low-beam
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is headlamps are switched on.
operated five times (Y page 132) while the Active:
lights are on and the engine is running. When Rif you are driving at speeds below
you switch off the ignition, the automatic
25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
signal or turn the steering wheel
counting is resumed from 0.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h)
Active light function and turn the steering wheel
Not active: if your speed exceeds
25mph (40 km/h) or if you switch off the turn
signal or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position.
The cornering light function may remain lit for
a short time, but is automatically switched off
after no more than three minutes.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist

The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the G WARNING
steering movements of the front wheels. In Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated road users:
while driving. This allows you to recognize Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
Z
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist traveling in front of your vehicle, and
may fail to recognize other road users that consequently switches the headlamps from
have lights, or may recognize them too late. high beam to low beam.
In this or similar situations, the automatic The system automatically adapts the low-
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated beam headlamp range depending on the
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an distance to the other vehicle. Once the
accident. system no longer detects any other vehicles,
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in The system's optical sensor is located behind
good time. the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You on/off

are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
General notes
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To activate: activate the Adaptive
Highbeam Assist function using the on-
board computer (Y page 275).
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
(Y page 123).
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam
headlamps.
You can use this function to set the If you are driving at speeds above
headlamps to change between low beam and approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
high beam automatically. The system The headlamp range is set automatically
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either depending on the distance between the
approaching from the opposite direction or vehicle and other road users.

Interior lighting 127
If you are driving at speeds above Interior lighting

approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected: Overview of interior lighting
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other
road users have been detected or the roads
are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _

indicator lamp in the multifunction display Overhead control panel
remains lit. : p To switch the left-hand front reading
X To deactivate: move the combination
lamp on/off
switch back to its normal position. ; c To switch the front interior lighting
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument on
cluster goes out.
= v To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
? | To switch the front interior lighting/
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
automatic interior lighting control off
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if A p To switch the right-hand front
there is high atmospheric humidity. reading lamp on/off
X Switch on the lights and drive off. B To switch the automatic interior lighting
The level of moisture diminishes, control on
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature). Interior lighting control
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
General notes
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except for when the SmartKey is in position
The color and brightness of the ambient
lighting can be adjusted using the on-board
Z
128 Interior lighting
Automatic interior lighting control Manual interior lighting control
Overhead control panel Overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front reading : p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off lamp on/off
; c To switch the front interior lighting ; c To switch the front interior lighting
on on
= v To switch the rear interior lighting = v To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off on/off
? | To switch the front interior lighting/ ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off automatic interior lighting control off
A p To switch the right-hand front A p To switch the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off reading lamp on/off
B To switch the automatic interior lighting B To switch the automatic interior lighting
control on control on
X To switch on: set the switch to center X To switch the front interior lighting on:
position B. set the switch to the c position.
X To switch off: set the switch to the | X To switch the interior lighting off: set the
position. switch to the | position or (if the door
The interior lighting automatically switches is closed) to the center position.
on if you: X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the u button.
Runlock the vehicle
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
Ropen a door
press the p button.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 276).

Replacing bulbs 129
Crash-responsive emergency lighting Ryou drop it

Ryou scratch it
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
X To switch off the crash-responsive bulbs of the same type and the specified
emergency lighting: press the hazard voltage.
warning lamp button.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
or life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
SmartKey. glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during
Replacing bulbs operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into

contact with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
G DANGER that you cannot replace. Replace only the
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get bulbs listed (Y page 129). Have the bulbs that
an electric shock if you remove the cover of you cannot replace yourself changed at a
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical qualified specialist workshop.
contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you require assistance changing bulbs,
Never touch the parts or the electrical consult a qualified specialist workshop.
contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified a qualified specialist workshop.
specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
that these function correctly at all times.
you can recognize this by the following: the
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the engine. For this to be Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine. You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Z
130 Replacing bulbs
Halogen headlamps X To remove: switch off the lights.

: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Turn the front wheels inwards.
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable

= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W BV tool.
? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide
it down until it engages.
X Insert securing pin ;.
Low-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps)
Tail lamp
: Brake lamp: P 21 W-L
Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
X Remove the cover in the front wheel
You must remove the cover from the front housing (Y page 130).
wheel housing before you can change the X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
front bulbs. and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.

Replacing bulbs 131
X Align housing cover : and turn it X Switch off the lights.

clockwise until it engages. X Open the hood.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
housing (Y page 130). and pull it out.
X Pull out bulb holder ;.
High-beam headlamps (halogen X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
headlamps)
X Insert bulb holder ;.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.

Side marker lamps
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb
holder ;.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Remove the cover in the front wheel
housing (Y page 130).
X Turn cap ; counter-clockwise and remove
X Simultaneously press bulb holder ; and
it.
pull lever = downwards. X Pull out bulb holder :.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
clockwise until it engages.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder :.
Parking lamps/standing lamps
(halogen headlamps) X Align cap ; and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel
housing (Y page 130).
Z
132 Windshield wipers
Changing the rear bulbs Brake lamp

Opening and closing the service flap
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the cargo compartment.

Left-hand service flap
X Open the service flap (Y page 132).
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Take bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Close the service flap (Y page 132).
Right-hand service flap Windshield wipers

You must open the service flap in the cargo
Switching the windshield wipers on/
compartment before you can change the
off
bulbs in the brake lamp.
X To open: release service flap : at the top, ! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
downward in the direction of the arrow.
that has collected on the windshield can
X Right side: remove the first-aid kit
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
beforehand and pull the parcel net down. the windshield is dry.
X To close: reinsert service flap :.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.

Windshield wipers 133
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due Switching the rear window wiper on/
to optical influences and the windshield off
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 b To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
Combination switch X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
1 $ Windshield wiper off
ignition lock (Y page 157).
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor X Turn switch : on the combination switch
set to low sensitivity) to the corresponding position.
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor When the rear window wiper is switched on,
set to high sensitivity) the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe Replacing the wiper blades
C î To wipe with washer fluid Important safety notes
X Switch on the ignition.
G WARNING
X Turn the combination switch to the
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
corresponding position. you are changing the wiper blades, you could
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
wiping frequency is set automatically of injury.
according to the intensity of the rain. In Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the Å position, the rain sensor is more ignition before changing the wiper blades.
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield wipers to wipe more ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
frequently. arm has been folded away from the
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield windshield/rear window.
will no longer be wiped properly. This could Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
prevent you from observing the traffic a wiper blade back onto the windshield/
conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a rear window.
year, ideally in spring and fall.
Z
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when Installing the wiper blades
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer
Changing the windshield wiper blades on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
the direction of the arrow.
Removing the wiper blades The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
lock. correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield. windshield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade
X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper

blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the
direction of the arrow.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.

Windshield wipers 135
Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
Z
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

137

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 138
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 144
Setting the air vents ......................... 152
Climate control

138 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i The integrated filter can filter out most

particles of dust, and completely filters out
i This Operator's Manual describes all pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
models and all standard and optional of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
equipment of your vehicle available at the this reason, you should always observe the
time of publication of the Operator's interval for replacing the filter, which is
Manual. Country-specific differences are specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
possible. Please note that your vehicle may depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
not be equipped with all features heavy air pollution, the interval may be
described. This also applies to safety- shorter than stated in the Maintenance
related systems and functions. Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified i It is possible that the dehumidification
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). function of the climate control system may
be activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems is then ventilated for 30 minutes.

Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 151).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 95).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.

Overview of climate control systems 139
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 147)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 149)
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 149)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 145)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 150)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 147)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 148)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)
? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 145) or activate/
deactivate the residual heating function (Y page 151)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 148)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)
Rear control panel

: To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic
; To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off

= To direct the airflow through the rear air vents

? To direct the airflow through the footwell vents
Information about using dual-zone

automatic climate control
The following contains notes and
recommendations on optimum use of dual-
zone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps in
the Ã and ¿/Á buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"
Climate control
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side as well. The
indicator lamp above the á button goes
out.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for
approximately three seconds at the bottom
of the screen in the COMAND display. See
also the separate COMAND operating
instructions. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control
functions.
During automatic engine switch-off, the
climate control only operates at a reduced
capacity. If you require the full climate control
output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop
function by pressing the ECO button
(Y page 163).

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 149)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 148)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 147)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)
Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
M To set the temperature (Y page 147)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 146)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 148)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 148)

Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)

R To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 151)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 148)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 147)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)
Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 148)
M To set the temperature (Y page 147)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 146)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 148)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 148)

144 Operating the climate control systems
Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)

R To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)
Information about using 3-zone During automatic engine switch-off, the

automatic climate control climate control function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
The following contains instructions and climate control output, you can switch off the
recommendations to enable you to get the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
most out of your automatic climate control. button (Y page 163).
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. Operating the climate control
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the systems
ñ button to set a climate mode
Switching climate control on/off
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The
Climate control
MEDIUM level is recommended. General notes

RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
When the climate control is switched off, the
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"
air supply and air circulation are also
function briefly until the windshield is clear switched off. The windows could fog up.
again. Therefore, switch off climate control only
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. briefly.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
i Switch on climate control primarily using
when in a tunnel. The windows could
the Ã button (Y page 146).
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. In the rear compartment, you can also switch
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the climate control on and off using the Ã and
temperature settings on the driver's side ^ buttons.
for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment as well. The indicator lamp Activating/deactivating
above the á button goes out.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior X To activate: press the Ã button.
when the ignition is switched off. The
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
off. automatic mode.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the or
X Press the ^ button.
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
approximately three seconds at the bottom out. The previously selected settings are
of the screen in the COMAND display. See restored.
also the separate COMAND operating X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
instructions. You will see the current The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
settings of the various climate control up.
functions.

Operating the climate control systems 145
Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
only deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is only available when the engine is
running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled
and dehumidified according to the
Climate control
temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
Example: ¿ button
X To activate: press the ¿/Á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á
button lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿/Á
button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á
button goes out. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function has a delayed
switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿/Á button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic Activating/switching
General notes
Climate control
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-

dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
only deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function briefly.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow ignition lock (Y page 157).
and the air distribution. X Set the desired temperature.
Automatic mode will achieve optimal X To activate: press the Ã button.
operation if cooling with air dehumidification The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
dehumidification can be deactivated. are activated.
In the rear compartment, you can also switch X To switch to manual mode: press the
climate control for the rear seats to automatic _ button.
mode using the Ã button.
or
X Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out.
3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can select
a climate mode (Y page 147).

Adjusting the climate mode settings 3-zone automatic climate control

You can select the following climate mode
settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft
Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
Climate control
well as for the rear compartment.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the front: turn control : or B clockwise
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the or counter-clockwise (Y page 142).
Only change the temperature setting in
X Press the Ã button.
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the X To increase/reduce the temperature in
desired climate mode appears in the the rear compartment using the front
display. control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Setting the temperature X Turn control : clockwise or counter-
Dual-zone automatic climate control clockwise (Y page 142).

Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
The temperature setting for the driver's
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the side is adopted for the rear compartment
ignition lock (Y page 157). and the front-passenger side.
X To increase/reduce: turn control : or X To increase/decrease the rear
B clockwise or counter-clockwise compartment temperature using the
(Y page 139). rear control panel: turn control M
Only change the temperature setting in clockwise or counter-clockwise on the rear
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). control panel (Y page 142).

Setting the air distribution Adjusting
Air distribution settings

Front control panel
P Directs the airflow through the center
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs the airflow through the center
and footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
defroster and center vents (Canada ignition lock (Y page 157).
only) X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
Climate control
a Directs air through the defroster and desired symbol appears in the display.
footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and footwell air vents Setting the airflow
(Canada only)
Rear control panel
M Directs the airflow through the rear
center and rear side air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
i Using the rear control panel, you can also
activate both air distribution positions
simultaneously. In order to do this, press
both air distribution buttons. The air is then
routed through all rear air vents. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
X To increase: press the K button.
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be X To reduce: press the I button.
closed when the controls on the side air
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate
vents are turned downwards.
control to set the airflow in the rear
compartment separately.

Switching the ZONE function on/off X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
X To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
lights up. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
Climate control
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the out. The previously selected settings are
temperature setting for the driver's side is restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
not adopted for the front-passenger side. deactivated.
3-zone automatic climate control: the or
temperature setting for the driver's side is X Press the Ã button.
not adopted for the front-passenger side The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
and the rear compartment. out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
X To deactivate: press the á button. automatic mode.
The indicator lamp above the á button or
goes out. X Turn controls : or B clockwise or
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the counter-clockwise:
temperature setting for the driver's side is
Dual-zone automatic climate control
adopted for the front-passenger side.
(Y page 139)
3-zone automatic climate control: the
3-zone automatic climate control
temperature setting for the driver's side is
(Y page 142)
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment. or
X Press the K or I button.
Defrosting the windshield

MAX COOL maximum cooling
You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the The MAX COOL function is only available in
windshield and the side windows. vehicles for the USA.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"
function as soon as the windshield is clear
again.

Rear window defroster

MAX COOL is only operational when the

engine is running.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The rear window defroster has a high current
X To activate: press off-road button Ù draw. You should therefore switch it off as
Climate control
again. soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,

The indicator lamp goes out. The previously the rear window defroster switches off
selected settings are restored. automatically after several minutes.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
control switches to the following functions: window defroster may switch off.
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
X Press the ¤ button.
Rair-recirculation mode on
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the ¿/Á cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 149).
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside

XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the
display.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.

Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
deactivated lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
be activated. defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air- high outside temperatures, air-

recirculation mode recirculation mode is automatically
activated. When air-recirculation mode is
General notes activated automatically, the indicator lamp
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if in the d button is not lit.
Climate control
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Outside air is added after about
from outside. The air already inside the 30 minutes.
vehicle will then be recirculated. XTo deactivate: press the d button.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the The indicator lamp in the d button goes
windows can fog up more quickly, in out.
particular at low temperatures. Only use air- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the automatically:
windows from fogging up.
Rafter approximately five minutes at
Activating/deactivating outside temperatures below
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
cooling with air dehumidification is
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
outside temperatures above
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
activated
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the

Activating/deactivating the residual
same for all control panels.
heat function
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the The "residual heat" function is only available
ignition lock (Y page 157). in Canada.
X To activate: press the d button.
The indicator lamp in the d button lights
up.
i In the event of high pollution levels (3-
zone automatic climate control only) or at

152 Setting the air vents
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always

maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in
the engine compartment on the front-
passenger side free of blockages, such as
It is possible to make use of the residual heat ice, snow or leaves.
of the engine to continue heating the
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter
the engine has been switched off. The heating in the vehicle interior.
time depends on the temperature that has i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
Climate control
been set. the sliders of the air vents to the center

X To activate: press the Ì/Á button. position.
The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á
button lights up.
Setting the center air vents
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X To deactivate: press the Ì/Á
button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á
button goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically: : Center air vent, left
Rafter approximately 30 minutes ; Center air vent, right
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
= Center vent thumbwheel, right
Rif the battery voltage drops
? Center vent thumbwheel, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
Setting the air vents and ? to the right or left.

G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.

Setting the air vents 153
Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :

clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
: Side window defroster vent

; Side air vent
= Control for side air vent
Climate control
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the glove box air vent Example: center vents with rear control panel
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
! Close the air vent when heating the
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
vehicle.
= Rear control panel
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air ? Rear-compartment air vent, left
dehumidification" function. Otherwise, X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
temperature-sensitive items stored in the down.
glove box could be damaged.
Setting the B-pillar air vent
Second row of seats
: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
: B-pillar air vent
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
Z
154 Setting the air vents
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; to the

left or right.
Climate control

155

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 156
Driving ............................................... 156
Automatic transmission ................... 165
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 173
Parking ............................................... 179
Driving tips ........................................ 182
Driving systems ................................ 191
Towing a trailer ................................. 253

156 Driving
Useful information Additional breaking-in notes for AMG

vehicles:
i This Operator's Manual describes all RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
models and all standard and optional (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
equipment of your vehicle available at the (1,500 km).
Driving and parking
time of publication of the Operator's ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
Manual. Country-specific differences are engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may RChange gear in good time.
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions. drive in program C.
i Read the information on qualified i You should also observe these notes on
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle limits.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only Driving
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Important safety notes
Compensate for this by applying greater force G WARNING
to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
new, the more satisfied you will be with its stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
performance in the future. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
RYou should therefore drive at varying securely and as specified in order to ensure
vehicle and engine speeds for the first sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
1000 miles (1500 km). loose floormats.
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this period. G WARNING
RChange gear in good time, before the Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the of the pedals, e.g.:
red area of the tachometer. Rshoes with thick soles
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to Rshoes with high heels
brake the vehicle. Rslippers
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator There is a risk of an accident.
pedal past the point of resistance Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
(kickdown). usage of the pedals.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
the vehicle to full speed.

Driving 157
G WARNING Key positions

If you switch off the ignition while driving,
SmartKey
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
Driving and parking

of an accident.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire g To remove the SmartKey
Rlose its hold function. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release as the windshield wipers
the parking brake fully before driving off. 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use 3 To start the engine
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
Only shift the automatic transmission to
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
the desired drive position when the vehicle
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
is stationary.
see (Y page 318).
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignition
wheels when pulling away on slippery
lock for an extended period of time, it can no
roads. You could otherwise damage the
longer be turned in the ignition lock. The
drive train.
steering is then locked. To unlock, remove the
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the The steering is locked when you remove the
maximum engine speed is restricted in SmartKey from the ignition lock.
order to protect the engine. To protect the X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is
engine and maintain smooth engine
switched off.
operation, avoid driving at full throttle when
The starter battery could otherwise be
the engine is cold.
discharged.
If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition
lock, the starter battery may not be charged
sufficiently.
X Check the starter battery and recharge if
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).
Z
158 Driving
i The SmartKey can be turned in the Rthe vehicle can be started using the
ignition lock even if it is not the correct Start/Stop button and
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not Relectrically powered equipment can be
switched on. The engine cannot be started. operated.
i The engine can be turned off while the
Driving and parking
KEYLESS-GO
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
General notes the Start/Stop button for approximately
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: three seconds. This function operates
independently of the ECO start/stop
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
automatic engine switch-off function.
phone or another SmartKey
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
foil
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can impair the functionality of the
KEYLESS-GO key.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the
temperature-controlled cup holder
(Y page 344). Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO
key will not be recognized.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
button. indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
ignition lock and the SmartKey with the starting the engine or lights up while driving,
integrated KEYLESS-GO function must be in see (Y page 318).
the vehicle.
X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times lock ;.
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only i When you insert Start/Stop button :
the case if you are not depressing the brake into ignition lock ;, the system needs
pedal. approximately two seconds recognition
If you depress the brake pedal and press the time. You can then use Start/Stop
Start/Stop button, the engine starts button :.
immediately. Activating power supply
The Start/Stop button can be removed from X If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
SmartKey into the ignition lock. being removed from the ignition.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop X Press Start/Stop button : once.
button from the ignition lock when you The power supply is switched on. You can
leave the vehicle. You should, however, now activate the windshield wipers, for
always take the SmartKey with you when example.
leaving the vehicle. As long as the
SmartKey is in the vehicle:

Driving 159
i The power supply is switched off again if: Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
Rthe
driver's door is opened and motion if, for example, they:
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice Rrelease the parking brake.
when in this position. Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Driving and parking

Switching on the ignition
XPress Start/Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
i The power supply is switched off again if: When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Rthedriver's door is opened and leave children or animals unattended in the
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
when in this position. reach of children.
G WARNING
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the

catalytic converter is preheated for up to
Start/Stop button 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
= USA only the engine may change during this time.
? Canada only
Automatic transmission
X Shift the transmission to position
Starting the engine P(Y page 165).
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows
G WARNING P(Y page 165).
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, i You can also start the engine when the
they could: transmission is in position N.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users. Starting procedure with the SmartKey
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
X To start a gasoline engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock
Z
160 Driving
(Y page 157) and release it as soon as the X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
engine is running. depressed.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the X Shift the transmission to position D or
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock R(Y page 165).
(Y page 157). X Release the brake pedal.
Driving and parking
The % preglow indicator lamp in the X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake (Y page 180) is
X When the % preglow indicator lamp automatically released.
goes out, turn the SmartKey to position The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
3(Y page 157) and release it as soon as the only) indicator lamp in the instrument
engine is running. cluster goes out.
i You can start the engine without preglow i It is only possible to shift the transmission
if the engine is warm. from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine the parking lock released. If you do not
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depress the brake pedal, you can move the
depressed. DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock
X To start a gasoline engine: press the
remains engaged.
Start/Stop button (Y page 158) once. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
The engine starts. pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ drop down.
Stop button (Y page 158) once. You can open the doors from the inside at
Preglow is activated and the engine starts. any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
locking feature (Y page 276).
start the vehicle without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ i Upshifts take place at higher engine
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition speeds after a cold start. This helps the
lock and the SmartKey must be in the catalytic converter to reach its operating
vehicle. This mode for starting the engine temperature more quickly.
operates independently of the ECO start/
stop automatic engine start function. Pulling away with a trailer
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.

Driving 161
To ensure that you do not roll backwards Rtheelectric parking brake is applied.
when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage RESP® is malfunctioning.
the electric parking brake.
X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to ECO start/stop function
Driving and parking

brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling
Introduction
backwards.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada The ECO start/stop function switches the
only) indicator lamp in the instrument engine off automatically if the vehicle is
cluster remains on. stopped under certain conditions.
X Depress the accelerator pedal. The engine starts automatically when the
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
is held by the driving force of the engine, start/stop function thereby helps you to
release lever :. reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
The electric parking brake is released.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out. G WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
Hill start assist you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
There is a risk of accident and injury.
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. the ignition and secure the vehicle against
This gives you enough time to move your foot rolling away.
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to General notes
roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never : ECO start/stop display
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist. If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. function switches the engine off
The vehicle is then held for about a second. automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
X Pull away. Every time you switch on the engine using the
Hill start assist is not active if: SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on
If the ECO start/stop function has been
a downhill gradient.
manually deactivated (Y page 163) or a
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Z
162 Driving
malfunction has caused the system to be i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not when the engine has been stopped
displayed. automatically.
AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or i The HOLD function can be activated if the
Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG engine has been switched off
Driving and parking
menu in the multifunction display goes out. automatically. It is then not necessary to
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function continue applying the brakes during the
is only available in drive program C. automatic stop phase. When you depress
For further information on automatic engine the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
switch-off (Y page 162) and automatic automatically and the braking effect of the
engine start (Y page 162). HOLD function is deactivated.
i All vehicles (apart from AMG
Automatic engine switch-off vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or take place a maximum of four times
N, the ECO start/stop function switches off consecutively (initial stop then repeated
the engine automatically. three times). The ¤ symbol is shown in
The ECO start/stop function is operational yellow in the multifunction display after the
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in engine has been started automatically for
the multifunction display, if: the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is
shown in green in the multifunction display,
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit automatic engine switch-off is again
green. possible.
Rno off-road program has been selected.
i AMG vehicles: times which the engine
Rthe outside temperature is within the
can be automatically switched off.
comfort range.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
Automatic engine start
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior The engine starts automatically if:
has been reached. Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. by pressing the ECO button.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is Ryou release the brakes when in
not fogged up when the air-conditioning transmission position D or N and when the
system is switched on. HOLD function is not active.
Rthe hood is closed. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's Ryou engage reverse gear R.
seat belt is fastened. Ryou move the transmission out of position
If conditions for automatic engine switch-off P.
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMG
be shown in yellow. vehicles).
AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the Ryou switch to an off-road program (except
multifunction display additionally shows the for AMG vehicles).
Stop/Start inactive message. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.

Driving 163
Rthe brake system requires this. X To switch off (AMG vehicles): in program
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior C, press button :.
deviates from the set range. or
Rthe system detects moisture on the X Switch to drive program S or M
windshield when the air-conditioning (Y page 169).
Driving and parking

system is switched on. Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
Rthe charge level of the battery is too low. the multifunction display go out.
i Shifting the transmission to position P The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start
does not start the engine. inactive message in the AMG menu in the
multifunction display goes out.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available X To switch on (AMG vehicles): press
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in button :.
green in the multifunction display. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive
program S or M is active, the automatic
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ transmission switches to drive program C.
stop function If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display. In addition, the
Stop/Start active message is shown in
the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If conditions for automatic engine switch-
off (Y page 162) have not been fulfilled , the
¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this
is the case, the ECO start/stop function is
not available. In addition, the Stop/Start
inactive display message is shown in the
ECO button AMG menu in the multifunction display.
X To switch off (except AMG vehicles): i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
press button :.
stop function has been deactivated
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in manually or as the result of a malfunction.
the multifunction display go out. The engine will then not be switched off
X To switch on (except AMG vehicles): automatically when the vehicle stops.
press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine switch-off
(Y page 162) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
Z
164 Driving
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Driving and parking
can be heard. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 367). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission 165
Automatic transmission transmission position P, R, N or D appears

in the transmission position display
Important safety notes (Y page 165) in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Transmission position and drive
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking

program display
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There ! If the transmission position display in the
is a risk of an accident. multifunction display is not working, you
When engaging transmission position D or R, should pull away carefully to check whether
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the desired transmission position is
not simultaneously accelerate. engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and, in AMG
G WARNING vehicles, drive program C or S.
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake. Transmission position and drive program display
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
DIRECT SELECT lever The current transmission position and drive
Overview of transmission positions program appear in the multifunction display.
i The arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
j Park position with parking lock
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
Z
166 Automatic transmission
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
Driving and parking
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N
j Park position with parking lock
G WARNING
k Reverse gear If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
i Neutral they could:
h Drive Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the people or road users.
direction of arrow P. Rget out and disrupt traffic.
i The automatic transmission shifts into
park position P automatically: Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
Rrelease the parking brake.
vehicle is stationary in transmission
position D or R Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
Rif you open the door while traveling at park position P

very low speeds in transmission position RStart the engine.
D or R There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Engaging park position P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the
reach of children.
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey.
Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/ X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
Stop button and open one of the front brake pedal.
doors. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
Rthe HOLD (Y page 206) or DISTRONIC to the first point of resistance.
PLUS (Y page 194) function brake your If the engine has been switched off, the
vehicle until it is stationary and at least one automatic transmission automatically shifts
of the following conditions is fulfilled: to N.
- there is a system malfunction.
If you want the automatic transmission to
- the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
gradient. The electric parking brake is vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
then also applied. a towing system, observe the following notes:

Using the SmartKey: Transmission positions

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
B Park position
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed. Do not shift the transmission into
RShift to neutral N.
position P(Y page 179) unless the
Driving and parking

vehicle is stationary. The parking
RRelease the brake pedal.
lock should not be used as a brake
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, when parking. Always apply the
release it. electronic parking brake in
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the addition to the parking lock in order
SmartKey in the ignition lock. to secure the vehicle.
Using KEYLESS-GO: If the vehicle electronics are
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. malfunctioning, the transmission
may be locked in position P. Have
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
the vehicle electronics checked
brake pedal and keep it depressed. immediately at a qualified
REngage park position P.
The automatic transmission shifts
RRemove the Start/Stop button from the to P automatically if you:
ignition lock. Rremove the SmartKey
RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Rswitch off the engine when in R
RSwitch on the ignition.
or D and open one of the front
RDepress the brake pedal and keep it doors
depressed.
C Reverse gear
RShift to neutral N.
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Z
A Neutral Driving tips

Do not shift the transmission to N Kickdown
while driving. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission could be Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
damaged. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Driving and parking
No power is transmitted from the pressure point.

engine to the drive wheels. The automatic transmission shifts to a
Releasing the brakes will allow you lower gear depending on the engine speed.
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
push it or tow it. desired speed is reached.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: The automatic transmission shifts back up.
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger Rocking the vehicle free
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
If you switch off the engine using gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if
the SmartKey or the Start/Stop it has become stuck in slush or snow. The
button, the automatic transmission vehicle's engine management system limits
shifts to neutral N automatically. the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)
! Rolling in neutral N can damage when shifting back and forth. To shift back
the drive train. and forth between transmission positions D
and R, move the selector lever up and down
7 Drive beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All Towing a trailer
forward gears are available.
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill
Changing gear
gradient, use left-hand steering wheel
The automatic transmission shifts to the paddle shifter (Y page 169) to select a
individual gears automatically when it is in lower gear, even if cruise control or
transmission position D. This automatic DISTRONIC PLUS are activated.
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed

Program selector button Further information about permanent drive

program M(Y page 171).
General notes As well as this permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
Driving and parking

i AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission switches to automatic drive
program C each time the engine is started.
Drive programs on AMG vehicles
C Controlled Comfortable, economical

Efficiency driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
X Press program selector button :. M Manual Permanent manual
The letter M appears in the multifunction gearshifting
display. The manual drive program M is
activated. i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 170).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
AMG vehicles
X Press program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
gearshift program appears in the
multifunction display. In the manual drive program, you can change
gears manually using steering wheel paddle
The program selector button allows you to
shifters : and ;.
choose between different driving
characteristics. Further information about permanent drive
In AMG vehicles, drive program E is called
drive program C. Further information about temporary drive
i The permanent drive program M is
available on the following vehicles: i You can only change gear with the
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
RVehicles
with the transmission is in position D.
ON&OFFROAD package
RAMG vehicles
Z
Automatic drive program selector button, you can activate manual

drive program M using the steering wheel
Automatic drive programs E and S paddle shifters.
Drive program E (drive program C on MAG i As well as temporary drive program M,
vehicles) is characterized by the following: you can also activate permanent drive
Driving and parking
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic program M(Y page 169).

transmission settings Further information about permanent drive
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from program M(Y page 171).
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner Activating
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in X Shift the transmission to position D.
forward and reverse gears, unless the X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
accelerator pedal is depressed fully shifter (Y page 169).
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving Manual drive program M is temporarily
stability on slippery road surfaces, for activated. The selected gear and M appear
example in the multifunction display.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
Shifting gears
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
driven at lower engine speeds and the
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
wheels being less likely to spin
switches to manual drive program M for a
Drive program S is characterized by the limited amount of time. Depending on which
following: paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic
Rsporty engine and transmission settings transmission immediately shifts into the next
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up gear down or up, if permitted.
later X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169).
as a result of the later automatic The automatic transmission shifts up to the
transmission shift points next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the
Manual drive program M currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic
General notes transmission automatically shifts up in
In this drive program, you can briefly change order to prevent engine damage.
gear yourself by using the steering wheel XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand
paddle shifters. The transmission must be in steering wheel paddle shifter
position D.
(Y page 169).
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): you The automatic transmission shifts down to
can activate manual drive program M using the next gear.
the steering wheel paddle shifters. i If the engine exceeds the maximum
AMG vehicles: you can activate manual drive engine speed when shifting down, the
program M in automatic drive programs C and automatic transmission protects against
S. engine damage by not shifting down.
Vehicles with the
i Automatic down shifting occurs when
ON&OFFROAD package: if manual drive
coasting.
program M is deactivated using the program

Shift recommendation or
X Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package: use the selector
wheel to switch to the on-road program
(Y page 243) or the off-road program
Driving and parking

(Y page 248).
The gearshift recommendations assist you in Manual drive program

adopting an economical driving style. The
recommended gear is shown in the
General information
multifunction display. In this drive program, you can permanently
X Shift to recommended gear ; according change gear yourself by using the steering
to gearshift recommendation : when wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
shown in the multifunction display of the be in position D.
instrument cluster. i As well as this permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
Deactivating program M(Y page 170).
If you have activated manual drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount Switching on the manual drive program
of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in In manual drive program M, you can change
the case of lateral acceleration, during an gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
overrun phase or when driving on steep if the transmission is in position D. You can
terrain. see the currently selected drive program and
If manual drive program M has been which gear is engaged in the multifunction
deactivated, the automatic transmission display.
shifts into the automatic drive program that X AMG vehicles: press the program selector
was last selected. button (Y page 169) until M appears in the
You can also deactivate manual drive multifunction display.
program M yourself: X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: press the program selector
X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel
button (Y page 169).
paddle shifter and hold it in place
The letter M appears in the multifunction
(Y page 169).
display.
or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the Shifting up (all vehicles except AMG
transmission position. vehicles)
or
X AMG vehicles: use the program selector
button to change the drive program
(Y page 169).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches into
the drive program that was last selected,
C or S.
Z
X If corresponding gearshift Maximum acceleration

recommendation : appears in the X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
multifunction display on the instrument shifter until the transmission selects the
cluster, pull on the right-hand steering optimum gear according to the speed.
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169).
Driving and parking
The automatic transmission shifts to i If you slow down or stop without shifting
recommended gear ;. down, the automatic transmission
automatically shifts down.
Shifting up (AMG vehicles)
Kickdown
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up You can also use kickdown for maximum
automatically even when the engine acceleration in manual drive program M.
limiting speed for the current gear is X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
reached. When the engine limiting speed is pressure point.
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent The automatic transmission shifts to a
the engine from overrevving. Always make lower gear depending on the engine speed.
sure that the engine speed does not reach X Shift back up once the desired speed is
the red area of the tachometer. There is reached.
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): if
you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use
: Gear indicator kickdown in manual drive program M.
; Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, Switching off the manual drive program
an upshift indicator will be shown in the X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
multifunction display. package: press the program selector
X If the color in the speedometer button (Y page 169).
multifunction display changes to red and The M message in the multifunction display
the UP display message is shown, shift up goes out.
a gear. X AMG vehicles: press the program selector
button (Y page 169) repeatedly until C or
Downshifting S appears in the multifunction display.
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 169).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.

Refueling 173
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking

workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Transfer case Refueling

! Performance tests may only be carried Important safety notes
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be G WARNING
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
workshop for a performance test. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system,
the engine and ignition must be switched You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the
refueling.
electric parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer (maximum
10 seconds). G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP®
may seriously damage the brake system.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
with either the front or the rear axle raised, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
as doing so will damage the transmission. vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always
transmitted to both axles.
Z
174 Refueling
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
observe the following: fuel system.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
using soap and water. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, paintwork.
Driving and parking
immediately rinse them thoroughly with ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
clean water. Seek medical assistance Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
without delay. system could be blocked by particles from
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical the fuel can.
assistance without delay. Do not induce
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
vomiting.
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
RImmediately change out of clothing which
charge could build up again.
has come into contact with fuel.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
explosion. inside of the fuel filler flap.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening For further information on fuel and fuel quality
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump (Y page 444).
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Refueling
G WARNING
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash Pay attention to the important safety notes
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. (Y page 173).
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with

a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not
switch on the ignition if you accidentally
refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the
fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small : To open the fuel filler flap
amounts of the wrong fuel could result in ; To insert the fuel filler cap
damage to the fuel system and the engine. = Fuel type to be used
The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified
? Tire pressure table
specialist workshop and have the fuel tank
and fuel lines drained completely. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you open or close the

Refueling 175
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
GO. stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed fuel may leak out.
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of Closing the fuel filler flap
Driving and parking

the vehicle. X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
Opening the fuel filler flap X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 325).
A message appears in the multifunction
display (Y page 300).
: To open the fuel filler flap For further information on warning and
; To insert the fuel filler cap indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
= Fuel type to be used see (Y page 325).
? Tire pressure table
X Switch the engine off.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Z
176 Refueling
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 157).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run
start. completely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 157).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 157).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until
it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 80).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.

Refueling 177
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) Important safety notes on the refilling

procedure
Important notes on use
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
aftertreatment must be operated with the Rnot poisonous
Driving and parking

reducing agent DEF.
Rcolorless and odorless
When the supply of DEF is almost used up,
Rnot flammable
the Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message is shown in the When you open the DEF container, small
multifunction display. amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
in the multifunction display. membranes and to the eyes. You may
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message experience a burning sensation in your eyes,
appears in the multifunction display, you can nose and throat. Coughing and watering of
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is the eyes are possible.
not refilled, you will subsequently be unable Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
to start the engine. Fill the DEF tank with tank only in well-ventilated areas.
approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF. Have the DEF DEF must not come into contact with your
tank refilled at a qualified specialist skin, eyes or clothing and must not be
workshop. swallowed. Keep DEF away from children.
i If you drive the vehicle faster than If you or other persons come into contact with
10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive DEF, observe the following:
See Operator's Manual message goes RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
out after approximately one minute. soap and water.
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is immediately rinse them thoroughly with
frozen and there is an active warning clean water. Seek medical assistance
indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. without delay.
Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your
garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of
will then be possible to add DEF again. water. Seek medical assistance without
Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a delay.
qualified specialist workshop. RChange out of clothing contaminated with
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust DEF immediately.
gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any ! Only use DEF in accordance with
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
! The vehicle must be parked on level
ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank
can only be filled as intended with the
vehicle parked on a level surface. This
avoids false level readings. Filling the tank
Z
178 Refueling
is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked DEF refill bottle

on a level surface. There is a danger of
! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-
overfilling, which could result in damage to
tight. It could otherwise be damaged.
components of the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment.
Driving and parking
! Rinse surfaces that have come into

contact with DEF immediately with water or
remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold
water. If the DEF has already crystallized,
use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF
residues crystallize after time and
contaminate the affected surfaces.
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to
the fuel tank, this can lead to engine X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
damage. bottle :.
For further information on DEF, see X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck
(Y page 447). as shown and screw it on clockwise until

hand-tight.
Opening the DEF filler cap X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler
neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to
one minute.
i When DEF refill bottle : is no longer
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be
taken off again after being only partially
emptied.
X Release DEF refill bottle :.
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise
and remove it.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill
automatically when you open or close the bottle : again.
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- DEF refill bottles can be obtained at many gas
GO. stations or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Switch the ignition off. Center. Refill bottles without a threaded cap
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of do not provide overfill protection. DEF may
arrow :. leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers
The fuel filler flap swings up. special refill bottles with a threaded seal.
X Turn blue DEF filler cap ; counter-
These are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
clockwise and remove it.
DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.

Parking 179
Closing the DEF filler cap boosting effect. You will require considerably
of an accident.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
X Mount DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck the parking position P
and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the They could also operate the vehicle's
direction of arrow :. equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive See Operator's When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Manual message goes out after SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
approximately one minute. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
i If the Check Additive See ! Always secure the vehicle correctly
Operator's Manual message continues against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
to be shown in the multifunction display, or its drivetrain could be damaged.
you must add more DEF.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Parking Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the
G WARNING ignition lock.
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to the front wheels towards the curb.
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the
could ignite. There is a risk of fire. front axle of an empty vehicle must be
Park the vehicle so that no flammable secured, for example with a wheel chock.
materials come into contact with parts of the Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not rear axle of a laden vehicle must be
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain additionally secured, for example with a
fields. wheel chock.
G WARNING
Z
180 Parking
Switching off the engine Electric parking brake

Important safety notes General notes
G WARNING G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to If you leave children unsupervised in the
Driving and parking
neutral position N when you switch off the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a example:
risk of an accident. Rreleasing the parking brake
After switching off the engine, always switch Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
to parking position P. Prevent the parked the parking position P
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
Using the SmartKey injury.
X Apply the electric parking brake. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
X Shift the transmission to position P. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
ignition lock and remove it.
i The electric parking brake performs a
The immobilizer is activated.
function test at regular intervals while the
i If you turn off the engine with the engine is switched off. The sounds that can
SmartKey and then remove it from the be heard while this is occurring are normal.
ignition lock or open a front door, the
automatic transmission shifts to P Applying/releasing manually
automatically.
Using KEYLESS-GO
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch
off the engine, the automatic transmission
shifts to N automatically. If you then open XTo engage: push handle :.
one of the front doors, the automatic When the electric parking brake is
transmission shifts to P. engaged, the F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up
i In the event of an emergency, the engine in the instrument cluster.
can be turned off while the vehicle is in
motion by pressing and holding the Start/
i The electric parking brake can also be
Stop button for three seconds. applied when the SmartKey is removed.

Parking 181
X To release: pull handle :. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
only) indicator lamp in the instrument release the electric parking brake:
cluster goes out. Rthe driver's door is closed.
i The electric parking brake can only be Ryou have shifted out of transmission
Driving and parking

released: position P or you have previously driven
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the faster than 2 mph (3 km/h)
ignition lock or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the Emergency braking
Start/Stop button.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards
when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage
the electric parking brake (Y page 160).
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is applied
automatically:
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
standstill or
Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle X While driving, push handle : of the electric
stationary parking brake.
In addition, at least one of the following The vehicle can also be braked during an
conditions must be fulfilled: emergency by using the electric parking
Rthe engine is switched off. brake.
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt i The vehicle is braked for as long as the
is not fastened. handle of the electric parking brake is
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy pressed. The longer the electric parking
period. brake handle is depressed, the greater the
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada braking force.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster During braking:
lights up.
Ra warning tone sounds.
Rthe Release Park. Brake message
Releasing automatically
appears
The electric parking brake is released Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
automatically when all of the following only) indicator lamp in the instrument
conditions are fulfilled: cluster flashes.
Rthe engine is running. When the vehicle has been braked to a
Rthe transmission is in position D or R. standstill, the electric parking brake is
Rthe seat belt has been fastened. engaged.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk

lid must be closed.
Z
182 Driving tips
Parking the vehicle for a long period when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than before operating the telephone.
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
exhaustive discharging.
(approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers
Driving and parking
X Connecting a trickle charger.

a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
i You can obtain information about trickle second.
chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop. Drive sensibly – save fuel
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use. X The tires should always be inflated to the
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
recommended tire pressure.
seek advice. X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof carriers when they are not
needed.
Driving tips X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
G WARNING interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
and in hilly terrain.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Drinking and driving
of an accident. G WARNING
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
If you operate mobile communication affect your reflexes, perceptions and
equipment while driving, you will be judgment.
distracted from traffic conditions. You could The possibility of a serious or even fatal
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk accident is greatly increased when you drink
of an accident. or take drugs and drive.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
is stationary. anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a Emission control
mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
G WARNING
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

Driving tips 183
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There percentage indicates a more economical
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave driving style.
the engine running in enclosed spaces The ECO display does not indicate the actual
without sufficient ventilation. fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
count in the ECO display does not indicate a
Driving and parking

Certain engine systems are designed to keep fixed consumption figure.
the level of poisonous components in exhaust Apart from driving style, consumption is
fumes within legal limits. dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
These systems only work at peak efficiency if Rload
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
Rtire pressure
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, all work on the engine must be carried Rcold start
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- Rchoice of route
Benz technicians. Relectrical consumers switched on
The engine settings must not be changed These factors are not taken into
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all consideration by the ECO display.
specific service work must be carried out at
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
regular intervals and in accordance with the
out using the following three categories:
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
RAcceleration (evaluation of all
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
acceleration processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
ECO display especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
Example: ECO display RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
The ECO display gives you information on how processes):
economical your driving style is. The ECO - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
display assists you in achieving the optimum keeping your distance and early release
driving style in terms of consumption, taking of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
the actual and selected conditions into without use of the brakes.
consideration. Your driving style can - The bar empties: frequent braking
significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption. i An economical driving style specially
The ECO display consists of three bars: requires driving at moderate engine
speeds.
RAcceleration
To achieve a higher value in the categories
RConstant
Acceleration and Constant, observe the
RCoasting
gearshift recommendations.
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher
Z
184 Driving tips
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. Heavy and light loads

on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change. G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
i The ECO display summaries the driving driving, the braking system can overheat. This
characteristics from the start of the journey
Driving and parking
increases the stopping distance and can even

to its completion. For this reason, the bars cause the braking system to fail. There is a
change dynamically at the beginning of the risk of an accident.
journey. On longer journeys, there are
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
carry out a manual reset.
pedal at the same time.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 267). ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
Braking If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Important safety notes load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Drive on for a short while. This allows the
G WARNING airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Wet roads
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
There is an increased danger of skidding and
without braking, there may be a delayed
accidents.
reaction from the brakes when braking for the
Do not shift down for additional engine first time. This may also occur after the
braking on a slippery road surface. vehicle has been washed or driven through
deep water.
Downhill gradients You then have to depress the brake pedal
! On long and steep gradients, you must more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting the vehicle in front.
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take After driving on a wet road or having the
advantage of the engine braking effect and vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
helps avoid overheating and excessive attention to the traffic conditions. This will
wear of the brakes. warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
When you take advantage of the engine more quickly and protecting them against
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn corrosion.
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the Limited braking performance on salt-
drive train. This type of damage is not treated roads
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously residue may form on the brake discs and
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brake pads. This can result in a significantly
brakes to rub by constantly applying light longer braking distance.
pressure to the pedal. This results in
excessive and premature wear to the brake
pads.

Driving tips 185
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible If the brake system has only been subject to
salt residue. Make sure that you do not moderate loads, you should test the
endanger other road users when doing so. functionality of your brakes at regular
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake
beginning and end of a journey. pedal when driving at a high speed. This
Driving and parking

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle improves the grip of the brake pads.
ahead. You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on
Servicing the brakes (Y page 68).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in have brake pads/linings installed on your
the instrument cluster and you hear a vehicle which have been approved for
warning tone while the engine is running, Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
the brake fluid level may be too low. to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
Observe additional warning messages in pads/linings which have not been approved
the multifunction display. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
The brake fluid level may be too low due to of an equivalent quality could affect your
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. vehicle's operating safety.
Have the brake system checked Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
immediately. This work should be carried use brake fluid that has been specially
out at a qualified specialist workshop. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
! A function or performance test should or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
only be carried out on a 2-axle standard. Brake fluid which has not been
dynamometer. If you are planning to have approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, which is not of an equivalent quality could
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Center to obtain further information first.
Otherwise, you could damage the drive High-performance brake system for
train or the brake system. AMG vehicles
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, The high-performance brake system is
the engine and ignition must be switched installed only on the ML 63 AMG.
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ The high-performance brake system is
Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the designed for heavy loads. This may lead to
electric parking brake is being tested on a noise when braking. This will depend on:
brake dynamometer (maximum RSpeed
10 seconds). RBraking force
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® REnvironmental conditions, such as
may seriously damage the brake system. temperature and humidity
All checks and maintenance work on the The wear of individual components of the
brake system must be carried out at a brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a or brake discs, depends on the individual
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. driving style and operating conditions.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid For this reason, it is impossible to state a
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. mileage that will be valid under all
circumstances. An aggressive driving style
Z
186 Driving tips
will lead to high wear. You can obtain further by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
information about this from your authorized can cause engine damage.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
New and replaced brake pads and discs only set the raised level before driving through
reach their optimum braking effect after standing water.
Driving and parking
several hundred kilometers of driving.

Compensate for this by applying greater force Off-road fording
to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and
adapt your driving and braking accordingly ! Under no circumstances should you
during this break-in period. accelerate before entering the water. The
Excessive heavy braking results in bow wave could cause water to enter and
correspondingly high brake wear. Observe damage the engine and other assemblies.
the # brake wear warning lamp in the ! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors
instrument cluster and note any brake status while fording. Otherwise, water could get
messages in the multifunction display. into the vehicle interior and damage the
Especially for high performance driving, it is vehicle's electronics and interior
important to maintain and have the brake equipment.
system checked regularly.
REstablish how deep the water is and the
characteristics of the body of water before
Driving on wet roads fording.
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
Hydroplaning select the highest possible vehicle level.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
on the road surface, there is a danger of steering wheel paddle shifter.

hydroplaning occurring, even if: RAvoid high engine speeds.
Ryou drive at low speeds. REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. at a steady walking pace.

RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning may the water.
occur, you must drive in the following RDo not stop.
manner: RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
Rlower your speed. and the ground is slippery and in some

Ravoid ruts.
cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
dangerous to pull away in the water.
Rbrake carefully.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive.
Driving on flooded roads RClean any mud from the tire tread after
! Do not drive through flooded areas. fording.
Check the depth of any water before driving RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.
through it. Drive slowly through standing Always observe the fording depth values
water. Otherwise, water may enter the (Y page 454).
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in

Driving tips 187
Winter driving Slippery road surfaces
General notes G WARNING

G WARNING an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Driving and parking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking There is an increased danger of skidding and
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. accidents.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Do not shift down for additional engine
accidents. braking on a slippery road surface.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
G DANGER X Shift the transmission to position N.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases i For more information on driving with
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the snow chains, see (Y page 401).
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
fatal injury. and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area The outside temperature indicator is not
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To designed to serve as an ice-warning device
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not Changes in the outside temperature are
facing into the wind. displayed after a short delay.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified Indicated temperatures just above the
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You
cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective should pay special attention to road
cover. The measuring function of the conditions when temperatures are around
onboard diagnosis system may otherwise freezing point.
provide inaccurate values. Some of these
values are required by law and must
therefore always be accurate. Off-road driving
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" Important safety notes
G WARNING
Driving with summer tires If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
section (Y page 400). could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
Z
188 Driving tips
G WARNING The following driving systems are specially

If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center adapted to off-road driving:
of gravity is raised. This could cause the ROff-road ABS (Y page 67)
vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)
downhill gradients. There is a risk of an (Y page 207)
Driving and parking
accident. RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Select the lowest possible vehicle level. (Y page 246)
Observe the following notes:
When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,
possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get RStop the vehicle before starting to drive
into the brakes. This could result in a reduced along an off-road route.
braking effect or in total brake failure and also RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC
in increased wear and tear. The braking package: select a vehicle level that is
characteristics change depending on the suitable for the off-road terrain. To avoid
material ingressing the brakes. Clean the damaging the vehicle, make sure there is
brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a always sufficient ground clearance.
reduced braking effect or grinding noises, RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
have the brake system checked in a qualified stowed safely and are well secured
specialist workshop as soon as possible. (Y page 337).
Adapt your driving style to the different RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
braking characteristics.
when driving on a downhill gradient.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of Activate DSR (Y page 246).
damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windows
to failure of the mechanical assembly or
and sliding sunroof closed while driving.
systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the
RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The
terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have
damage to the vehicle rectified immediately rougher, steeper or more ruts on the
at a qualified specialist workshop. terrain, the slower your speed should be.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
Do not switch to transmission position N
when driving off-road. You could lose control the water. Ensure that a bow wave does not
of the vehicle if you attempt to brake using form as you drive.
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep, RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-
drive backwards in reverse gear. road routes where visibility is poor. For
safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first
General notes and survey the off-road route.
RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks,
Read this section carefully before driving your holes, tree stumps and furrows.
vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
RCheck the depth of water before fording
gentle off-road terrain first.
rivers and streams.
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics
RWhen fording, do not stop and do not
of your vehicle and the gear shift operation
before driving through difficult terrain. switch off the engine.
ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the
rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's
wheels could become stuck in loose
ground.

Driving tips 189
RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will Checklist after driving off-road
interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
when driving on a slope. immediately at a qualified specialist
RDo not shift the automatic transmission to
workshop.
Driving and parking

transmission position N.
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 246).
i Do not use the HOLD function when X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill lower the vehicle to a ride height suitable
gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. for the road conditions, e.g. to the
The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle highway/high-speed level.
on such surfaces. X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
check for damage.
Checklist before driving off-road X Clean the front and rear license plates.
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and
while the vehicle is in motion, stop the remove any foreign objects.
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the
Check the engine oil level. The engine oil vehicle underside with a water jet; check
warning lamp warning must not be ignored. for any foreign objects and damage.
Continuing the journey while the symbol is X Check whether twigs or other parts of
displayed could lead to engine damage.
plants have become trapped. These
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level increase the risk of fire and can damage
and add oil if necessary. fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber
When driving on steep gradients, the bellows of the axle joints and propeller
engine oil level must be sufficiently high to shafts.
ensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle. X After the trip, examine without fail the
X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,
level and top up if necessary (Y page 177). bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack exhaust system for damage.
is working and make sure you have the lug X After driving for extended periods across
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
spade in the vehicle. conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
depth and tire pressure. and cleaned.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
objects, e.g. small stones, from the travel, check for foreign objects in the
wheels/tires. wheels and drive train and remove them if
X Replace any missing valve caps.
necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
balance and cause vibrations.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a
Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on
loss of tire pressure and damage the tire
normal roads. After driving off-road, check
bead. Therefore, check your rims before
the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
driving off-road and replace them as
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident
required.
to yourself and other road users.
Z
190 Driving tips
Driving on sand vehicle when doing so in order to avoid

injury as a result of unexpected vehicle
Observe the following rules when driving on
movements. After driving off-road or over
sand:
obstacles, check the vehicle for possible
Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package: damage, especially to the underbody and
select a raised vehicle level.
Driving and parking
the components of the chassis.

Ravoid high engine speeds.
Ruse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate
to the terrain.
Rdrive quickly to overcome the rolling
resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels
could become stuck in loose ground.
Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if
possible. Make sure that:
- the tire ruts are not too deep.
- the sand is sufficiently firm.
Observe the following rules when driving over
- the ground clearance of the vehicle is tree stumps, large stones and other
sufficient. obstacles:
Rraise the vehicle level.
Tire ruts and gravel roads Ravoid high engine speeds.
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and Rshift to a lower gear using the left-hand
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. steering wheel paddle shifter.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged Rdrive very slowly.
or bottom out and get stuck. Rdrive straight over the center of obstacles.
Observe the following rules when driving
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with
loose gravel: Traveling uphill
Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
Approach/departure angle
select a raised vehicle level.
Ravoid high engine speeds. G WARNING
Rshift to a lower gear using the left-hand If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
steering wheel paddle shifter. turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
Rdrive slowly. could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
Rwhere ruts are too deep, drive with the a risk of an accident.
wheels of one side on the center grassy Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
area, if possible. fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
Driving over obstacles RObserve the rules on off-road driving.
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask or gradients, but instead follow the direct
passengers for guidance when driving over line of fall. The maximum gradient-climbing
large obstacles. The passenger should capability of your vehicle is 100%, which
always keep a safe distance from the corresponds to an approach/departure

Driving systems 191
angle of 45°. Note that the climbing ability Driving downhill

of your vehicle depends on the terrain RDrive slowly.
conditions.
RDo not drive at an angle down steep
RWhen driving down an incline, make use of
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
the engine's braking effect. Observe the
with the front wheels aligned straight.
Driving and parking

engine speed; do not overrev the engine.
Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,
RDrive slowly.
tip and rollover.
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
appropriate engine speeds (maximum paddle shifter before tackling steep
3,000 rpm). downhill gradients.
RUse the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
a lower gear in good time on long and steep gently. When doing so, make sure that the
downhill gradients. vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road of fall.
driving. RCheck that the brakes are working normally
i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling after a long downhill stretch.
away on a hill. i The special off-road ABS setting enables
For further information about hill start a precise, brief and repeated locking of the
assist, see (Y page 161). front wheels. This causes them to dig into
Do not switch to transmission position N loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels
when driving off-road. If you try to brake the easily skid across the ground surface if
vehicle using the service brake, you could completely braked and therefore lose their
lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is ability to steer.
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure Driving systems
angle values (Y page 454). Cruise control
Maximum gradient-climbing capability General notes

Always observe the maximum gradient Cruise control maintains a constant road
climbing ability values (Y page 455). speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
Hilltops select a lower gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
reduce pressure on the accelerator so, you will make use of the braking effect of
immediately before reaching the brow of the the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
hill. Use the vehicle's own impetus to drive system and prevents the brakes from
over the top of the hill. overheating and wearing too quickly.
This style of driving prevents: Use cruise control only if road and traffic
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
brow of a hill steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down store any road speed above 20 mph
the other side (30 km/h).
Z
192 Driving systems
i Cruise control should not be activated When you activate cruise control, the stored
when driving off-road. speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds.
Activation conditions
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
Driving and parking
control can neither reduce the risk of an To activate cruise control, all of the following
accident nor override the laws of physics. activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Cruise control cannot take into account the Rthe electric parking brake must be
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise released.
control is only an aid. You are responsible for Ryou are driving faster than 20mph
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
(30 km/h).
speed, for braking in good time and for
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
staying in your lane.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Do not use cruise control:
RDSR must be deactivated.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels Storing, maintaining and calling up a
to lose traction and the vehicle could then speed
skid
Storing and maintaining a speed
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
: To activate or increase speed

pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
; To activate or reduce speed automatically maintains the stored speed.
= To deactivate cruise control
You can accept the current speed if you are
? To activate at the current speed/last driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
stored speed
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The

Driving systems 193
stored speed is resumed when the gradient Setting a speed

evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Storing or calling up a speed
Driving and parking

G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Pay attention to the road and traffic until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
conditions before calling up the stored speed. the speed set.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
desired speed again.
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
stores the current speed or regulates the depress the accelerator pedal. For
speed of the vehicle to the previously example, if you accelerate briefly to
stored speed. overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
Z
194 Driving systems
Deactivating cruise control if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By

doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Driving and parking
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving

vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle
in front.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
There are several ways to deactivate cruise prevent a collision without your intervention.
control: An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
forwards :.
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
or in front or take evasive action provided it is
X Brake. safe to do so.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when
Ryou
driving, the radar sensor system must be:
engage the electric parking brake.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph Ractivated(Y page 276)
(30 km/h). Roperational
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC

Ryou activate DSR. PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
while driving.
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear you, it operates in the speed range between
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
Control Off message in the multifunction 200 km/h).
display for approximately five seconds. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
i When you switch off the engine, the last roads with steep gradients.
speed stored is cleared. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
it can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
DISTRONIC PLUS relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
General notes
i USA only:
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the This device has been approved by the FCC
distance to the vehicle detected in front. as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so sensor is intended for use in an automotive
that the set speed is not exceeded. radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
You must select a lower gear in good time on
warranties, and is not permitted by the
long and steep downhill gradients, especially

Driving systems 195
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in There is a risk of an accident.

any non-approved way. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
Any unauthorized modification to this brake, in particular when warned to do so by
device could void the user’s authority to DISTRONIC PLUS.
operate the equipment.
Driving and parking

i Canada only: This device complies with G WARNING
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
subject to the following two conditions: to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this
1. This device may not cause harmful braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
interference, and warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
of an accident.
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
cause undesired operation of the device. try to take evasive action.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
device will void any warranties, and is not is activated, the vehicle brakes
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use automatically in certain situations. To
in any non-approved way. prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Any unauthorized modification to this DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
device could void the user's authority to the following or other similar situations:
operate the equipment. Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: of accident nor override the laws of physics.
Rpeople or animals DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
stopped or parked vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
Roncoming and crossing traffic
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give time and for staying in your lane.
warnings nor intervene in such situations. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
situation and be ready to brake.
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
identify other road users and complex traffic
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
situations.
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
heavy rain or snow
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
brake the vehicle vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
vehicles driving on a different line.
Raccelerate unexpectedly
Z
196 Driving systems
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rsnow or heavy rain
Driving and parking
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

Rinterference by other radar sources
to two minutes after pulling away before
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
parking garages
Rthe electric parking brake must be
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a released.
vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
stored speed. Rthe transmission must be in position D.
This speed may: Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
Rbe
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
too high if you are driving in a filter lane
fastened.
or an exit lane
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
must be closed.
lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated
hand lane
Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
RDSR must be deactivated.
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
lane Rthe vehicle must not skid.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Activating

driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever

you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
: To activate or increase speed
; To activate or reduce speed
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS press the cruise control lever up : to the
? To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
A To set the specified minimum distance

Driving systems 197
pressure point for a higher speed or down or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
= for a lower speed. accident.
Every time the cruise control lever is Pay attention to the road and traffic
pressed up or down, the last speed stored conditions before calling up the stored speed.
is increased or reduced. If you do not know the stored speed, store the
Driving and parking

or desired speed again.
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : past the pressure point for a higher
speed or down = for a lower speed.
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
is increased or reduced.
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
stored speed. you :.
When driving at speeds below 20 mph X Remove your foot from the accelerator
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC pedal.
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
and is shown in the multifunction display. If time it is activated, the current speed is
the vehicle in front is no longer detected and stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
displayed, for example because it has speed to the previously stored value.
changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated. You will hear a warning tone if
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
this is the case.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator Pulling away and driving
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive
message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
Z
198 Driving systems
X If you want to pull away with Stopping

DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from G WARNING
the brake pedal.
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
you ; or press it up : or down =.
Driving and parking
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

or the voltage supply.
X Accelerate briefly.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
speed to that of the vehicle in front. vehicle occupant or from outside the
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC vehicle.
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise Rthe electrical system in the engine
control. compartment, the battery or the fuses have
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle been tampered with.
in front has slowed down, it brakes your Rthe battery is disconnected.
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
selected is maintained. e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
to the speed you have stored. DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
Changing lanes in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when: Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph brake.
(60 km/h)
After a time, the electric parking brake
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
distance to a vehicle in front brake.
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
Depending on the specified minimum
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
of collision at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle front. The specified minimum distance is set
is accelerated. Acceleration will be using the control on the cruise control lever.
interrupted if changing lanes takes too long The electric parking brake automatically
or if the distance between your vehicle and secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is
the vehicle in front becomes too small. activated and:
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive seat belt is unfastened.
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
drive vehicles. automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.

Driving systems 199
Ra system malfunction occurs. Setting the specified minimum distance

Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there

is a malfunction, the transmission may also
automatically be shifted into position P.
Driving and parking

Setting a speed
You can set the specified minimum distance

for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
(Y page 201).
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set. X To increase: turn control ; in direction
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a =.

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in
press the cruise control lever up : or
direction :.
down ; to the pressure point.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
increments (10 km/h increments): safe distance from the vehicle in front.
briefly press the cruise control lever Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if
up : or down ; to the pressure point. necessary.
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Z
200 Driving systems
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Ryou activate DSR
Driving and parking
Ryou activate off-road program 2 on vehicles

with the ON&OFFROAD package
Rthe vehicle has skidded
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five
There are several ways to deactivate seconds.
DISTRONIC PLUS:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever Displays in the instrument cluster
forwards :.
Displays in the speedometer
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speedometer
speed stored after you have finished When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
overtaking. two segments ; in the set speed range light
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically up.
deactivated if: If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
the vehicle is automatically secured with front : and stored speed = light up.
the electric parking brake i For design reasons, the speed displayed
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou switch off the radar sensor system
(Y page 276)

Driving systems 201
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is In the Assistance menu of the on-board

deactivated computer, you can select the assistance
display.
X Select the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
Driving and parking

(Y page 272).
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
: Vehicle in front, if detected Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
; Distance indicator, current distance to
Rcornering, going into and coming out of a
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the bend
vehicle in front; adjustable Rvehicles traveling on a different line
? Own vehicle Rother vehicles changing lanes

Rnarrow vehicles
In the Assistance menu of the on-board
Robstructions and stationary vehicles
computer, you can select the assistance
display. Rcrossing vehicles
X Select the Distance Display function In such situations, brake if necessary.

using the on-board computer DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
(Y page 272).
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is bend
activated
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect

: Vehicle in front, if detected vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
vehicle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? DISTRONIC PLUS activated
Z
202 Driving systems
Vehicles traveling on a different line because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
Other vehicles changing lanes obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the

vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
Level control (vehicles with the

ON&OFFROAD package)
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Level control adapts the vehicle level
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, automatically to the current operating and
driving situation. This results in reduced fuel
consumption and improved handling.

Driving systems 203
Make changes to the vehicle level while the height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle of an accident.
to adjust to the new level as quickly as Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you G WARNING
Driving and parking

park the vehicle and the outside temperature Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
changes. If the temperature drops, the may start to skid and roll over in the event of
vehicle level is lower; with an increase in an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
temperature, the vehicle level rises. the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle begins to compensate for load Always adapt your speed and driving style to
discrepancies while still parked. However, for the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
significant level changes, such as after the prevailing road and weather conditions.
vehicle has been stationary for a long period,
the engine must be on. For safety reasons, ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are select a high vehicle level in good time.
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is Make sure there is always sufficient ground
opened, and it continues once the door has clearance. You will otherwise damage the
been closed. vehicle.
For information about driving off-road, see RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher
(Y page 187). rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
G WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
When the vehicle is being lowered, people result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
could become trapped if their limbs are and severe or fatal injury.
between the vehicle body and the wheels or RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of significantly more likely to die than a
injury. person wearing a seat belt.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle You and all vehicle occupants should
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel always wear your seat belts.
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
Basic settings
G WARNING
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
lowered depends on the basic setting
driving characteristics could be impaired by
selected.
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The
vehicle could rollover more easily, for Select:
example on a bend. There is a risk of an Rhighway/high-speed level for driving on
accident. normal roads
Always select as low a vehicle level as Roff-road level 1 for driving on easily
possible and adjust your driving style. negotiable off-road terrain
Roff-road level 2 for driving on normal off-
G WARNING road terrain
When you drive with the chassis lowered or Roff-road level 3 for freeing the vehicle in
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving particularly rough terrain at low speeds
characteristics can be significantly impaired. only
You could also exceed the permissible vehicle
Z
204 Driving systems
The individual vehicle levels differ from

highway level as follows:
Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)
Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)
Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+ 30 mm)
Driving and parking

Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground During the adjustment, the Lowering
clearance when the vehicle is being message, for example, appears in the
lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, multifunction display.
damaging the underbody. If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message
will disappear. Once highway level has been
reached, all indicator lamps = go out.
The vehicle automatically selects highway
level if you are driving at a speed above
70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a speed
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph
(115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level if
you are traveling at higher speeds.
: Selector wheel
; To raise the level
Off-road levels
= Indicator lamps General notes
? To lower the level ROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-
X Start the engine. road in particularly rough terrain.

RAdjust your driving style to the altered
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
handling characteristics.
selector wheel :.
RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph
Selector wheel : extends.
(20 km/h).
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn selector wheel : counter-
clockwise ? until all indicator lamps =
that are lit start to flash.
The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As
soon as the next lowest level is reached,
the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes
out.

Driving systems 205
Only select an off-road level when this is

appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise,
fuel consumption increases and handling may
be affected.
X Start the engine.
Driving and parking

selector wheel :.
X To raise: turn selector wheel :
clockwise ;.
The vehicle is raised. While the adjustment from off-road level 2 to
or off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a
message such as the following in the
X To lower: turn selector wheel : counter-
multifunction display: Raising Max. Speed
clockwise ?.
12 mph (20 km/h).
The vehicle is lowered.
The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h)
Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road message draws your attention to the
level flash: maximum speed permitted for off-road
ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp level 3.
flashes Once off-road level 3 has been reached, you
ROff-road level 2: the lower and center will see a message shown in white in the
indicator lamps flash multifunction display, for example: Max.
ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
flash If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at off-
The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level road level 3, you will see the following
selected. As soon as an off-road level is message in red in the multifunction display:
reached, the corresponding indicator lamp Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
stops flashing and lights up constantly. i You cannot clear these messages.
Raising the vehicle You also hear a warning. The vehicle is
During the adjustment, the Raising lowered and off-road level 3 is canceled.
message, for example, appears in the If you continue to increase your speed, the
multifunction display. red message continues to be shown in the
The vehicle rises from highway level to off- multifunction display. The newly set level is
road level 1. not displayed until the vehicle has been set
to a level suitable for the current speed.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message
will disappear.
i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the
messages using the % or a button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Once off-road level 2 has been reached, the
lower and center indicator lamps of the
selector wheel are on.
Z
206 Driving systems
Lowering the vehicle You will see a message in the multifunction

display, for example: Lowering.
HOLD function
Driving and parking
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will
Rwhen waiting in traffic
see a message in white in the display while
the vehicle is being lowered, such as the The vehicle is kept stationary without the
following: Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph driver having to depress the brake pedal.
(20 km/h). The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2. function deactivated when you depress the
If you select an off-road level when driving at accelerator pedal to pull away.
too high a speed, the Please Reduce i Do not use the HOLD function when
Speed message appears in the multifunction driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill
display. gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.
You can select from the following: The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle
ROff-road
on such surfaces.
level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph
(100 km/h)
ROff-road level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph
(65 km/h) G WARNING
ROff-road level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
(20 km/h) despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) or Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
drive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and the voltage supply.
50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
20 seconds, off-road level 2 will be canceled.
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1.
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
You will see a message in the multifunction Rthe electrical system in the engine
display, for example: Lowering.
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h) been tampered with.
or drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and Rthe battery is disconnected
70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be canceled. There is a risk of an accident.
Depending on the vehicle's speed and the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
ADS mode selected (Y page 207), the vehicle the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
is automatically lowered to highway or high- against rolling away.
speed level.

Driving systems 207
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
is activated, the vehicle brakes certain amount of pressure until ë
automatically in certain situations. To disappears from the multifunction display.
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in parking brake.
Driving and parking

the following or other similar situations: Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Rwhen towing the vehicle
i After a time, the electric parking brake
Rin the car wash
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
Deactivating the HOLD function brake.
(Y page 207). The electric parking brake automatically
secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is
Activation conditions activated and:
You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
Rthe vehicle is stationary seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt Ra system malfunction occurs.
is fastened Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Rthe electric parking brake is released On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N is a malfunction, the transmission may also
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
be automatically shifted into position P.
Activating the HOLD function AIRMATIC package

X Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.
General notes
X Depress the brake pedal. AIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further As well as level control (Y page 209), your
until ë appears in the multifunction vehicle can be equipped with ADS (Adaptive
display. Damping System) (Y page 207) and ACTIVE
The HOLD function is activated. You can CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 208).
release the brake pedal. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 253).
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function, ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
wait briefly and then try again.
General notes
Deactivating the HOLD function ADS adapts the damping characteristics to
The HOLD function is deactivated the current operating and driving situation.
automatically if: This depends on:
Ryou Ryour driving style
accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R. Rthe road surface conditions
Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Rthe ADS setting
Rthe vehicle level setting
Z
208 Driving systems
Your selection remains stored even if you Comfort tuning

remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Sports tuning
Driving and parking
Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD

package
: Suspension tuning button
Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD
package ; Indicator lamp for sports tuning
: Suspension tuning button = Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
; Indicator lamp for sports tuning X Press button :.
= Indicator lamp for comfort tuning Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning
is selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in
X Start the engine.
(15 mm).
X Press button :.
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports of your vehicle are more comfortable.
suspension tuning is selected. The vehicle Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm). more comfortable driving style. Select
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode comfort mode also when driving fast on
ensures even better contact with the road. straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
Select this mode when employing a sporty freeway.
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
Active Curve System
The Active Curve System uses active
stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort
and vehicle agility. Depending on the ADS
mode selected (Y page 207), the Active Curve
System also changes the setting.
If you select ADS comfort mode:
Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of
changing surface undulations
Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced
Rthe driving style is agile
If you select ADS sport mode:

Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly
Rthe driving style is even more agile

Driving systems 209
Level control clearance. You will otherwise damage the

vehicle.
! When you raise the vehicle in such a way
G WARNING that not all wheels have contact with the
When the vehicle is being lowered, people ground, remove the SmartKey from the
Driving and parking

could become trapped if their limbs are ignition lock.
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
injury.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
and severe or fatal injury.
RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
G WARNING significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
driving characteristics could be impaired by You and all vehicle occupants should
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The always wear your seat belts.
vehicle could rollover more easily, for General notes
example on a bend. There is a risk of an
Further information about "Driving off-road"
accident.
(Y page 187).
Always select as low a vehicle level as
Level control adapts the vehicle level
possible and adjust your driving style.
automatically to the current operating and
driving situation. This results in reduced fuel
G WARNING
consumption and improved handling.
When you drive with the chassis lowered or
If you select ADS comfort mode
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving
(Y page 207), the vehicle is lowered to high-
characteristics can be significantly impaired.
speed level as the speed increases. As the
You could also exceed the permissible vehicle
vehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raised
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk
back up to highway level.
of an accident.
If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 207),
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
the vehicle skips highway level and lowers
directly to high-speed level depending on the
G WARNING
basic setting (Y page 210).
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
may start to skid and roll over in the event of
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
to adjust to the new level as quickly as
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
possible.
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
park the vehicle and the outside temperature
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
changes. If the temperature drops, the
vehicle level is lower; with an increase in
! When driving on extremely rough terrain, temperature, the vehicle level rises.
select a high vehicle level in good time. If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
Make sure there is always sufficient ground vehicle begins to compensate for load
discrepancies while still parked. However, for
Z
210 Driving systems
significant level changes, such as after the If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
vehicle has been stationary for a long period, X Press button :.
the engine must be on. For safety reasons,
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle rises
the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is to raised level.
Driving and parking
opened, and it continues once the door has

been closed.
Basic settings (excluding AMG vehicles)
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
lowered depends on the basic setting
selected. Select raised level for off-road
driving or highway/high-speed level for
normal roads.
The individual vehicle levels differ from
highway level as follows:
Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm) During the adjustment, the Raising
Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm) message, for example, appears in the
multifunction display.
Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm)
If you press the % or a button on the
Basic settings for AMG vehicles multifunction steering wheel, the message
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or will disappear.
lowered depends on the AMG adaptive sport Once the vehicle has reached raised level,
suspension setting selected. Select the indicator lamp ; remains lit. The Raising
raised level for off-road driving or highway/ message disappears from the multifunction
high-speed level for normal roads. display.
The raised level corresponds to a vehicle If you try to select raised level at a speed
position raised by 50 mm compared with above 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More
highway level in comfort mode. Slowly message appears in the multifunction
display.
Raised level
Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being
lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground,
damaging the underbody.
Only select raised level if this is appropriate

for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel
consumption may increase and handling may
be affected.
X Start the engine.

Driving systems 211
The vehicle automatically adjusts to highway

level when you:
Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately
Driving and parking

20 seconds
Depending on the ADS mode selected
(Y page 207), the vehicle is lowered to high-
speed level at high speeds.
: Level control button

; Level control indicator lamp AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X Press button :. G WARNING
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle is When the vehicle is being lowered, people
adjusting to highway/high-speed level. could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
G WARNING
The vehicle is lowered if:
Ryou have selected the Comfort or Sport
suspension tuning and
During the adjustment, the Lowering Rlock the vehicle after switching off the
message, for example, appears in the engine
multifunction display. Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the
If you press the % or a button on the underbody may thus become trapped. There
multifunction steering wheel, the message is a risk of injury.
will disappear. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
Once highway level has been reached, wheel arch or the underbody when you switch
indicator lamp ; goes out. The Lowering off the engine.
message disappears from the multifunction
display. ! The vehicle is lowered by approximately
10 mm if:
Ryou have selected the Sport or Comfort
suspension tuning and
Ryou switch off the engine and then
Rlock the vehicle
Z
212 Driving systems
When parking, position your vehicle so that The damping is tuned individually to each
it does not make contact with the curb as wheel and depends on:
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could Ryour driving style
otherwise be damaged. Rthe road surface conditions
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport +
Driving and parking
Vehicle level
or Comfort
Level control adapts the vehicle level Your selection remains stored even if you
automatically to the current operating and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
driving situation. Level control ensures the
best possible suspension and constant Sport mode
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
This improves driving safety and fuel
consumption.
The AIRMATIC package and ACTIVE CURVE
SYSTEM are always components of AMG
adaptive suspension system (Y page 207).
Due to the sportier suspension settings
compared to standard vehicles, the levels and
speed thresholds for sinking and raising the
vehicle are different.
In Comfort and Sport driving modes, after
locking the vehicle it lowers to the Sport+ The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
level. When locking the vehicle at the raised ensures even better contact with the road.
level, the vehicle does not lower. Select this mode when employing a sporty
The settings will remain stored after you driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
switch off the engine. When starting the X Press button : once.
engine, the selected setting, e.g. AMG Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have
adaptive suspension system Comfort, is selected Sport mode.
restored. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
i The vehicle level may change visibly if you appears in the multifunction display.
park the vehicle and the outside
temperature changes. If the temperature Sport + mode
drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
increase in temperature, the vehicle level in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
rises. contact with the road. Select this mode
preferably when driving on race circuits.
Suspension tuning If indicator lamps = and ; are off:
General notes X Press button : twice.

The electronically controlled damping system Indicator lamps = and ; light up. You
works continuously. This improves driving have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle is
safety and ride comfort. lowered by 10 mm.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
appears in the multifunction display.

Driving systems 213
If indicator lamp ; lights up: when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
X Press button : once.
or the objects.
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
The sensors may not detect snow and other
have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle is
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
lowered by 10 mm.
Driving and parking

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
Comfort mode PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select uneven terrain.
this mode if you prefer a comfortable driving PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
style. Select comfort mode also when driving you:
fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight Rswitch on the ignition
stretches of freeway.
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
Rrelease the electric parking brake
lamps = and ; go out.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
You have selected Comfort mode. The
11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lower
vehicle is raised by 10 mm compared with
speeds.
Sport + suspension tuning.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
display.
PARKTRONIC
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
immediate surroundings. You are always side (example)
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
Z
214 Driving systems
Range of the sensors Rear sensors
General notes Center Approx. 48in (approx.

PARKTRONIC does not take objects into 120cm)
consideration that are: Corners Approx. 32in (approx.
Driving and parking
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, 80cm)

animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g.
Minimum distance
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
loading ramps.
Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Warning displays
Side view
Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
Top view ; Segments on the right-hand side of the
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or vehicle
slush. They can otherwise not function = Segments showing operational readiness
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them The warning displays show the distance
(Y page 374). between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
Front sensors on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is in the
Center Approx. 40in (approx. roof lamp in the rear compartment.
100cm)
The warning display for each side of the
Corners Approx. 24in (approx. vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
60cm) segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if

Driving systems 215
yellow segments showing operational i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated

readiness = light up. when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
The selected transmission position and the in the ignition lock.
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
determine which warning display is active Towing a trailer
Driving and parking

when the engine is running. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
Transmission Warning display hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC
position measures the minimum detection range to
an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball
D Front area activated coupling.
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
is rolling activated when you establish an electrical connection
backwards between your vehicle and a trailer.
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Indicator lamp
; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also
deactivated.
Z
216 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five
seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 374).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
approximately five ultrasound waves.
seconds.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist persons, animals or objects in the area in

which you are maneuvering.
General notes When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking Parking Assist is also unavailable.
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on G WARNING
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
While parking or pulling out of a parking
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
steering intervention can assist you during
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
parking.
result in a collision with another road user.
You may also use PARKTRONIC There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 213).
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active
Parking Assist parking procedure.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
immediate surroundings. You are always obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
and exiting a parking space. When the wheels or tires.
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no

Driving systems 217
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
parking spaces which are not suitable for loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
parking, for example: vehicles.
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited G WARNING
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits If there are objects above the detection range,
Driving and parking

Ron unsuitable surfaces Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
Parking tips: You may cause a collision as a result. There is
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the
parking space as possible. If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
RParking spaces that are littered or
overgrown might be identified or measured For further information on the detection
incorrectly. range (Y page 214).
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
Active Parking Assist does not support you
by trailer drawbars might not be identified with parking spaces parallel to the direction
as such or be measured incorrectly. of travel if:
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
Rthe parking space is on a curb
space being measured inaccurately.
Rthe system reads the parking space as
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
being blocked, for example by foliage or
(Y page 214) warning messages during the
grass paving blocks
parking procedure.
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
RAt any time, you can intervene in the
maneuver into
steering procedure to correct it. Active
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
Parking Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the : Detected parking space on the left
vehicle.
; Parking symbol
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
= Detected parking space on the right
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Active Parking Assist is switched on
automatically when driving forwards. The
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
system is operational at speeds of up to
not on the pavement approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
operation, the system independently locates
Detecting parking spaces and measures parking spaces on both sides
Objects located above the height range of of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
Z
218 Driving systems
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking X To cancel the procedure: press the
spaces: % button on the multifunction steering
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel wheel or pull away.
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide or
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than X To park using Active Parking Assist:
Driving and parking
your vehicle press the a button on the multifunction

When driving at speeds below 19 mph steering wheel.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a The Park Assist Active Accelerate
status indicator in the instrument cluster. and Brake Observe Surroundings
When a parking space has been detected, an message appears in the multifunction
arrow towards the right or the left also display.
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
only displays parking spaces on the front- X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake
passenger side. Parking spaces on the at all times. When backing up, drive at a
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn speed below approximately 6 mph
signal on the driver's side is activated. When (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist
parking on the driver's side, this must remain will be canceled.
switched on until you acknowledge the use of i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
the best parking results by backing up as
button on the multifunction steering wheel. far as possible. When doing so, also
A parking space is displayed while you are observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
driving past it, and until you are
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Maneuvering may be required in tight
Parking
parking spaces.
G WARNING The Park Assist Active Select D
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by Observe Surroundings message appears in
intervening actively in the steering. If you do the multifunction display.
not brake there is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position D while
Always apply the brakes yourself when the vehicle is stationary.
maneuvering and parking. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
symbol shows the desired parking space in
and Brake Observe Surroundings
the instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
display.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
i You will achieve the best results by
% message appears in the multifunction
waiting for the steering procedure to
display.
complete before pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
continuous warning tone, if not before.

Driving systems 219
The Park Assist Active Select R X Start the engine.

Observe Surroundings message appears in X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
the multifunction display. you are pulling away.
As soon as the parking procedure is X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
complete, the Park Assist Switched Off The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
Driving and parking

message appears and a warning tone sounds. %message appears in the multifunction
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you display.
with steering interventions. When Active X To cancel the procedure: press the
Parking Assist is finished, you must steer % button on the multifunction steering
again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. wheel or pull away.
Parking tips: or
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the X To exit a parking space using Active
parking space after parking is dependent Parking Assist: press the a button on
on various factors. These include the the multifunction steering wheel.
position and shape of the vehicles parked The Park Assist Active Accelerate
in front and behind it and the conditions of and Brake Observe Surroundings
the location. It may be the case that Active message appears in the multifunction
Parking Assist guides you too far into a display.
parking space, or not far enough into it. In X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
some cases, it may also lead you across or
X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
onto the curb. If necessary, you should
cancel the parking procedure with Active ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed
Parking Assist. a maximum speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking
RYou can also preselect transmission
space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will
position D. The vehicle redirects and does be canceled.
not drive as far into the parking space.
Should the gear change occur too soon to
achieve a sensible parking position, the continuous warning tone, if not before.
parking procedure will be aborted. X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
required while the vehicle is stationary.
Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
In order that Active Parking Assist can i You will achieve the best results by
support you when you exit the parking space: waiting for the steering procedure to
Ryou need to have parked using Active complete before pulling away.
Parking Assist. If you back up after activation, the steering
Rthe border of the parking space must be wheel is moved to the straight-ahead
high enough at the front and the rear. A position.
curb stone is too small, for example. X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being
Rthe border of the parking space must not
ready to brake at all times.
be too wide, as the position of the vehicle X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
must not exceed an angle of 45° to the continuous warning tone, if not before.
starting position as it is maneuvered into
X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
the parking space.
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
times if necessary.
(1.0 m) must be available.
Z
220 Driving systems
Once you have exited the parking space Towing a trailer

completely, the steering wheel is moved to
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone
minimum length for parking spaces is slightly
and the Park Assist Switched Off
increased.
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
Driving and parking
display. You will then have to steer and merge

into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still you should not use Active Parking Assist.
available. You can take over the steering, Once the electrical connection is established
before the vehicle has exited the parking between your vehicle and the trailer, Active
space completely. This is useful, for example Parking Assist is no longer available.
when you recognize that it is already possible PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist Rear view camera
X Stop the movement of the multifunction General notes

steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled
display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
center console (Y page 215).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display. Rear view camera : is in the handle on the
tailgate.
Active Parking Assist is canceled
automatically if: Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND
Rtransmission position P is selected
display.
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
longer possible mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
i The text of messages shown in the
(10 km/h)
COMAND display depends on the language
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
setting. The following are examples of rear
÷ warning lamp lights up in the view camera messages in the COMAND
instrument cluster. display.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display Important safety notes
shows the Park Assist Canceled
message. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
immediate surroundings. You are always
steer again yourself.
responsible for safe maneuvering and

Driving systems 221
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make X To change the function mode for
sure that there are no persons, animals or vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the
objects in the area in which you are COMAND controller, select symbol : for
maneuvering. the "Reverse parking" function or
Under the following circumstances, the rear symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see
Driving and parking

view camera will not function, or will function the separate COMAND operating
in a limited manner: instructions).
Rthe tailgate is open The symbol of the selected function is
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
highlighted.
Rat night or in very dark places To deactivate: the rear view camera is
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
deactivated if you:
Rshift the transmission to position P
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker) Rdrive 33 ft (10 m) forwards
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, Rshift the transmission from R to another
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in position after 15 seconds
winter Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed (10 km/h)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and Displays in the COMAND display
setting checked at a qualified specialist The rear view camera may show a distorted
workshop view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
Activating/deactivating the rear view objects in the following positions:
camera Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey Ra slanted post
is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Use the guidelines only for orientation.
X Make sure that the function "show rear Approach objects no further than the
view camera display" is selected in bottom-most guideline.
COMAND.
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display with guide lines.
Z
222 Driving systems
Driving and parking
: White guide line without turning the Additional messages for vehicles with
steering wheel, vehicle width including PARKTRONIC
the exterior mirrors (static) : Front warning display
; Yellow guide line at a distance of ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear operational readiness indicator
of the vehicle = Rear warning display
= Red guide line for the vehicle width
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
including the exterior mirrors, for current
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 214), an
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
additional operational readiness indicator will
? Yellow lane marking tires at current appear in COMAND display ;. If the
steering wheel angle (dynamic) PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
A Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
: White guide line without turning the
The guide lines are shown when the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
transmission is in position R.
the exterior mirrors (static)
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line for the vehicle width
objects that are at ground level. including the exterior mirrors, for current

Driving systems 223
= Yellow guide line at a distance of parking space until red guide line :
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear reaches parking space marking ;.
of the vehicle X Keep the steering wheel in that position
? Red guide line at a distance of and back up carefully.
Driving and parking

rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 221).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide,
carefully back up until you reach the end
position.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
: Red guide line for the vehicle width
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly
steering wheel at an angle in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as
possible.
Turning the steering wheel

: Red guide line for the vehicle width
steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving to the final position
; Parking space marking : White guide line at current steering wheel
X Make sure that the rear view camera is angle
switched on (Y page 221). ; Parking space marking
The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Turn the steering wheel to the center
X Drive past the parking space and bring the position while the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle to a standstill.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the
Z
224 Driving systems
Driving and parking
: Red guide line at a distance of : Vehicle center point on the yellow guide
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the line at a distance of approximately 3 ft
rear of the vehicle (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without turning the ; Trailer drawbar
steering wheel = Ball coupling
= End of parking space
This function is only available on vehicles with
X Back up carefully until you have reached a trailer tow hitch.
the final position. X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of
the parking space.
trailer drawbar ;.
"Coupling up a trailer" function

! The following distance specifications
refer to trailer tow hitches with ball
coupling that have been approved for this
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may
differ if you use other ball couplings. In this
case, take into account that actual
distances will not match the following
distance specifications. Otherwise you
could damage the trailer and vehicle.
: Ball coupling
; Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball
coupling
= Trailer drawbar marker assistant
? Trailer drawbar
A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"
function

Driving systems 225
X Use the COMAND controller to select Rtop view and enlarged front view
symbol A, see the separate operating Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with
instructions for COMAND. trailer tow hitch)
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is Rtop view and pictures from the rearward
selected. The distance specifications now facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
Driving and parking

only apply to objects that are at the same Rtop view and pictures from the forward
level as the ball coupling.
facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)
X Back up carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar marker assistant = points i The top view and trailer view are available
approximately in the direction of trailer for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow
drawbar ?. hitch.
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ? When the function is active and you shift the
reaches red guide line ;. transmission from position D or R to N, you
see the previous view in the COMAND
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 253).
display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
360° camera (surround view)
selected front or rear view.
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras. The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
The system analyzes images from the replacement for your attention to your
following cameras: immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering and
RRear view camera parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
RFront camera sure that there are no persons, animals or
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view objects in the area in which you are
mirrors maneuvering.
The cameras capture the immediate The 360° camera may show a distorted view
surroundings of the vehicle. The system of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at
supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is all. It cannot show objects in the following
restricted at an exit. areas:
The 360° camera images can be shown in full Runder the front bumper
screen mode or in seven different split-screen Rvery close to the front bumper
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen Rvery close to the rear bumper
view also includes a top view of the vehicle. Runder the rear bumper
This view is calculated from the data supplied
Rin close range above the handle on the
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
trunk lid
The seven split-screen views are:
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle) You are always responsible for safety, and
Rtop view and picture from the front camera
must always pay attention to your
surroundings when parking and
(without displaying the maximum steering
maneuvering. This applies to the areas
wheel angle)
behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Z
226 Driving systems
could otherwise endanger yourself and Activating the 360° camera with
others. COMAND
The 360° camera will not function or will X Press the W button, see the separate
function in a limited manner: COMAND operating instructions.
Rif the doors are open X Select System by turning cVd the
Driving and parking
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in COMAND controller and press W to
Rif the trunk lid is open confirm.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog X Select 360° Camera and press W to
Rat night or in very dark places confirm.
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright Depending on whether position D or R is
light engaged, the following is shown:
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Ra split screen with top view and the
lighting (the display may flicker) image from the front camera or
Rif you exit a heated garage in winter, Ra split screen with top view and the
resulting in a rapid change in temperature image from the rear view camera
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered For further information about the COMAND
Rif the vehicle components in which the controller, see the separate COMAND
cameras are installed are damaged. In this operating instructions.
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Activating the 360° camera using
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You reverse gear
can otherwise injure others or cause damage The 360° camera images can be
to objects or the vehicle. automatically displayed by engaging reverse
gear.
Activation conditions X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
The 360° camera image can be displayed if: 2 in the ignition lock.
Ryour X Make sure that the Activation by R
vehicle is equipped with a 360°
camera gear setting is active in COMAND, see the
RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate
separate COMAND operating instructions.
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
COMAND operating instructions
Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
reverse gear.
The COMAND display shows the area
behind the vehicle in split screen:
Activating the 360° camera using the
Rvehicle with guide lines
SYS button
Rtop view of the vehicle
X Press and hold the W button for longer
than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND
Selecting the split-screen and full
operating instructions.
screen displays
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown: X To switch between split screen views:
Rfull screen display with the image from switch to the line with the vehicle icons by
the front camera sliding ZV the COMAND controller.
Rfull screen display with the image from X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
the rear camera select one of the vehicle symbols.

Driving systems 227
X To switch to full screen mode: select

Full Screen by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Driving and parking

Displays in the COMAND display
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle A Yellow guide line at a distance of
Rthe drawbar of a trailer approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
C Red guide line at a distance of
Use the guidelines only for orientation. rear of the vehicle
Approach objects no further than the
D Bumper
bottom-most guideline.
The guide lines are shown when the
Top view with picture from the rear view transmission is in position R.
camera
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front
camera
: Symbol for the split screen setting with

top view and rear view camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle : Symbol for the split screen setting with
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width top view and front camera image
including the exterior mirrors, for current ; Yellow guide line at a distance of
steering wheel angle (dynamic) approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front
? Yellow lane marking tires at current of the vehicle
steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
? Yellow lane marking tires at current
Z
228 Driving systems
A Yellow guide line at a distance of Top view with picture from the mirror
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front camera
of the vehicle
B Red guide line at a distance of
Driving and parking
front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view
: Symbol for the top view and forward-

facing mirror camera setting
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side
of vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
: Symbol for the split screen setting with
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
top view and rear view camera image vehicle)
enlarged
; Red guide line at a distance of Top view with trailer view
rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the
distance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
: Symbol for the trailer view setting

; Trailer drawbar marker assistant
= Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball
coupling

Driving systems 229
Display with the PARKTRONIC display ATTENTION ASSIST

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
Driving and parking

It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC
display fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
the following criteria into account:
view camera image Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
and the function is active (Y page 215),
warning displays ; in the COMAND display of journey
are also active or light up accordingly. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
PARKTRONIC appears: driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
Rin split screen view as red or yellow recognize them at all. The system is not a
brackets around the vehicle icon in the top substitute for a well-rested and attentive
view, or driver.
Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets restricted and warnings may be delayed or
around the vehicle icon not occur at all:
i The full screen display can also be Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
selected as front view. surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Exiting 360° camera display mode Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of with high cornering speeds or high rates of
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function acceleration
activated, the function switches off. The Rif you are predominantly driving slower
COMAND display switches back to the than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
previously selected view. You can also switch 112 mph (180 km/h)
the display by selecting the & symbol in the Rif you are currently using COMAND or
display and pressing W the COMAND making a telephone call with it
controller. Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Z
230 Driving systems
Warning and display messages in the uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
multifunction display Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- the infrared light and displays a monochrome
board computer (Y page 273). image in COMAND. The image displayed in
COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high-
X If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not
Driving and parking
beam headlamps. This enables you to see the

warn you until at least 20 minutes after road's course and any obstacles in good time.
your journey has begun. You then hear an If pedestrian recognition is activated,
intermittent warning tone twice and the pedestrians recognized by the system are
Attention Assist: Take a Break! highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus
message appears in the multifunction display.
display.
Light from the headlamps of oncoming
If necessary, take a break. vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist
X Press the a or % button to confirm Plus display in the multifunction display. This
the message. is also the case if you cannot switch on the
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good high-beam headlamps due to oncoming
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you traffic.
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST i Infrared light is not visible to the human
still detects increasing lapses in eye and therefore does not glare. Night
concentration, you will be warned again after View Assist Plus can therefore remain
15 minutes at the earliest. switched on even if there is oncoming
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you traffic.
continue your journey and starts assessing
your tiredness again if: Important safety notes
Ryou switch off the engine. Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are
to take a break. responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Drive carefully and always adapt
Night View Assist Plus your driving style to suit the prevailing road
and traffic conditions.
General notes
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
gradients
In addition to the illumination provided by the

normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus

Driving systems 231
Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or i The infrared headlamps only switch on

inoperative if: when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
Rpedestrians are partially or entirely of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This
obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles means that you do not have the full visual
Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night
range while the vehicle is stationary and
Driving and parking

cannot check whether Night View Assist
View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
Plus is working.
interrupted, e.g. by powerful light
reflections
Pedestrian recognition
Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately
from the background
Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
Activating Night View Assist Plus

You can only activate Night View Assist Plus
if:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock. : Night View Assist Plus display
Rit is dark. ; Pedestrian recognized
Rthe light switch is in the Ã or L = Framing
position. ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
Rreverse gear has not been engaged.
i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian
Switching on Night View Assist Plus recognition.
Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize
pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a
silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically if:
RNight View Assist Plus is activated
Ryou exceed a speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h)
Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when
driving outside built-up areas without
X Make sure that COMAND is switched on. street lighting
X Press button :. If pedestrian recognition is active,
The Night View Assist Plus display appears symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are
in the COMAND display. detected, they are highlighted with framing
You can read about how to adjust the =. If the pedestrian recognition system has
brightness of the COMAND display in the brought a pedestrian to your attention, look
COMAND operating instructions. through the windshield to evaluate the
situation. The actual distance to objects and
Z
232 Driving systems
pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by

looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted
as well as pedestrians.
Driving and parking
Fogged up or dirty windshield

If the windshield in front of the camera is
fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the
Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To defrost: check the automatic air
conditioning settings (Y page 150) and fold
down the camera cover (Y page 375).
X To defrost the inside of the windshield:
fold down the camera cover (Y page 375)
and clean the windshield (Y page 373).

Driving systems 233
Problems with Night View Assist Plus

The picture quality of The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 133).
Driving and parking

has deteriorated.
The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a
car wash.
X Clean the windshield (Y page 373).
There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windshield.
The windshield is fogged up on the inside.

X Defrost the windshield (Y page 150).
The windshield is iced up.

X De-ice the windshield (Y page 149).
There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.

X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 373).
Lane Tracking package For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be:
General notes Ractivated(Y page 276)
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Roperational
Spot Assist (Y page 233) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 235). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
General notes Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system placing them in the blind spot area
to monitor the areas on both sides of your Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of differential and overtake your vehicle
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
display in the exterior mirrors draws your warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
attention to vehicles detected in the an accident.
monitored area. If you then switch on the Always observe the traffic conditions
corresponding turn signal to change lanes, carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
you will also receive a visual and audible
collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
purposes. attentive driving.
i USA only:
Z
234 Driving systems
This device has been approved by the FCC If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
sensor is intended for use in an automotive be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
radar system only. Removing, tampering driving in the middle of their lane. This may
with, or altering the device will void any be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
Driving and parking
warranties, and is not permitted by the inner edge of their lanes.

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Due to the nature of the system:
any non-approved way. Rwarnings may be issued in error when
Any unauthorized modification to this driving close to crash barriers or similar
device could void the user’s authority to solid lane borders.
operate the equipment. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Monitoring range of the sensors extended period next to long vehicles, such
In particular, the detection of obstacles can as trucks.
be impaired if: The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
Rdirt
are integrated into the sides of the rear
on the sensors or anything else
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
covering the sensors
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
The sensors must not be covered, for
snow or spray example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or Following a severe impact or in the event of
bicycles damage to the bumpers, have the condition
Rthe road has very wide lanes of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Rthe road has narrow lanes specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane otherwise not work properly.
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Indicator and warning display
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
indicated. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the
10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

Driving systems 235
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 273) are activated in the on-board
is operational. computer.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph ignition lock.
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
Driving and parking

corresponding side lights up red. This warning light up red for approximately
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Towing a trailer
the warning only occurs if the difference in When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). correctly established the electrical
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse connection. This can be accomplished by
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot checking the trailer lighting. In this event,
Assist is no longer active. Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow,
lamps is adjusted automatically according to and the Blind Spot Assist Currently
the ambient light. Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Collision warning display.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the the exterior mirrors.
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
are indicated by the flashing of red warning ignition lock
lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Rthe engine is not running
Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
has been established
Lane Keeping Assist

General notes
X Make sure that the radar sensor system

(Y page 276) and Blind Spot Assist
: Lane Keeping Assist camera

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of a
Z
236 Driving systems
camera : at the top of the windshield. Lane The system may be impaired or may not
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the function if:
road and warns you before you leave your Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
lane unintentionally. insufficient illumination of the road, or due
If you select km on the on-board computer in to snow, rain, fog or spray
Driving and parking
the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
function (Y page 274), Lane Keeping Assist the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the surface is wet)
miles display unit is selected, the assistance Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
range begins at 40 mph. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
A warning may be given if a front wheel vicinity of the camera
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
by means of intermittent vibration in the markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. construction work
Important safety notes Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
G WARNING
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings. small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
Rgive an unnecessary warning lanes branch off, cross one another or
Rnot give a warning merge
There is a risk of an accident. Rthe road is narrow and winding
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
G WARNING the on-board computer; to do so, select
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Standard or Adaptive(Y page 273).
return the vehicle to the original lane. There If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
is a risk of an accident. (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
(Y page 272) are shown in green. Lane
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Keeping Assist.
Standard
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
an accident nor override the laws of physics. occurs if:
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are period of time.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good ABS, BAS or ESP®.
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.

Driving systems 237
Adaptive monitored area. If you then switch on the

When Adaptive is selected, no warning corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
vibration occurs if: will also receive an optical and audible
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, warning. If a risk of lateral collision is
the warnings are suppressed for a certain detected, corrective braking may help you
Driving and parking

period of time. avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist
evaluates the free space in the direction of
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
travel and to the side before making a course-
ABS, BAS or ESP®. correcting brake application. For this, Active
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which
Ryou brake hard. are pointed in the direction of travel.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
obstacle or change lanes quickly. speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
In order that you are warned only when when driving, the radar sensor system must
necessary and in good time if you cross the be:
lane marking, the system recognizes certain Ractivated(Y page 276)
conditions and warns you accordingly. Roperational
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou
approach the outer lane marking on a
bend. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
fail to detect some vehicles and is no
substitute for attentive driving.
highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. G WARNING
The warning vibration occurs later if: Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rtheroad has narrow lanes. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
Active Driving Assistance package As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
General notes situations. There is a risk of an accident.
The Active Driving Assistance package Always observe the traffic conditions
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194), carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) and
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 241). i USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
Active Blind Spot Assist The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
General notes tampering, or altering of the device will void
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor any warranties, and is not permitted by the
system to monitor the side areas of your FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning any non-approved way.
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
Z
238 Driving systems
Any unauthorized modification to this

device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Driving and parking
subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
device could void the user's authority to to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
operate the equipment. directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot
Radar sensors Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are In particular, the detection of obstacles can
integrated into the front and rear bumpers be impaired if:
and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following snow or spray
a severe impact or in the event of damage to Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
the bumpers, have the function of the radar indicated.
sensors checked at a qualified specialist Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect
workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or
otherwise no longer work properly. bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
Monitoring area If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
G WARNING be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all driving in the middle of their lane. This may
traffic situations and road users. There is a be the case if there are vehicles at the inner
risk of an accident. edge of your lane.
Always make sure that there is sufficient Due to the nature of the system:
distance on the side for other traffic or
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
obstacles.
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.

Driving systems 239
Indicator and warning display Visual and acoustic collision warning
Driving and parking

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If you switch on the turn signals to change
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
speeds below approximately 20 mph monitoring range, you receive a visual and
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
are then not indicated. double warning tone and red warning
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights detected vehicles are indicated by the
up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no
(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph further warning tones.
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Course-correcting brake application
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph course-correcting brake application is carried
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
corresponding side lights up red. This warning collision.
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or G WARNING
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, A course-correcting brake application cannot
the warning only occurs if the difference in always prevent a collision. There is a risk of
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). an accident.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
Spot Assist is no longer active. you or makes a course-correcting brake
The brightness of the indicator/warning application. Always maintain a safe distance
lamps is adjusted automatically according to at the sides.
the ambient light.
Z
240 Driving systems
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.

ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles
Driving and parking
without the ON&OFFROAD package).

Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
If a course-correcting brake application

occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; underlining
the danger of a side collision appears in the X Make sure that the radar sensor system
multifunction display. (Y page 276) and Active Blind Spot Assist
In very rare cases, the system may make an (Y page 273) are activated in the on-board
inappropriate brake application. A course- computer.
correcting brake application may be X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in ignition lock.
the opposite direction or accelerate. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
The course-correcting brake application is light up red for approximately
available in the speed range between 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course- Towing a trailer
correcting brake application adapted to the When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
driving situation occurs if: correctly established the electrical
Rthere
connection. This can be accomplished by
are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot
barriers, located on both sides of your
Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp
vehicle.
lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently
side. Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with message appears in the multifunction
high cornering speeds. display.

Driving systems 241
Active Lane Keeping Assist In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
General notes
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Driving and parking

Rnot give a warning or intervene

Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Terminate the intervention in a non-critical
driving situation.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area The system may be impaired or may not
in front of your vehicle by means of function if:
camera : at the top of the windshield. Active Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on insufficient illumination of the road, or due
the road and warns you before you leave your to snow, rain, fog or spray
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
warning, a lane-correcting application of the the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the surface is wet)
original lane. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
If you select km in the Display Unit or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-board vicinity of the camera
computer(Y page 274), Active Lane Keeping Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
Assist is activated starting at a speed of markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, construction work
the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Important safety notes covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the small and the lane markings thus cannot be
risk of accident nor override the laws of detected
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
account the road, traffic and weather lanes branch off, cross one another or
conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an merge
aid. You are responsible for the distance to Rthe road is narrow and winding
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for Rthere are highly variable shade conditions
braking in good time and for staying in your
on the roadway
lane.
Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
and there are broken lane markings
continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always A warning may be given if a front wheel
clearly detect lane markings. passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
Z
242 Driving systems
by means of intermittent vibration in the

steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
Driving and parking
conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
highway. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. display : appears in the multifunction
The warning vibration occurs later if: display.
Rtheroad has narrow lanes. If you leave your lane, under certain
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
on one side. This is meant to assist you in
Lane-correcting brake application bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
This function is available in the range between
G WARNING
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
200 km/h).
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident. A lane-correcting brake application can only
be made after driving over a solid,
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
warning must be given by means of
you or makes a lane-correcting brake
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
application.
In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized. The brake
G WARNING application also slightly reduces vehicle
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect speed.
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropriate i A further lane-correcting brake
brake application, e.g. after intentionally application can only occur after your
driving over a solid lane marking. There is a vehicle has returned to the original lane.
risk of an accident. No lane-correcting brake application occurs
An inappropriate brake application may be if:
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
the opposite direction. Always make sure that accelerate.
there is sufficient distance on the side for Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
other traffic or obstacles.
Ryou have switched on the turn signal.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.

Driving systems 243
RESP® is switched off. When Adaptive is selected, no warning

Rthe transmission is not in position D. vibration occurs if:
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this
electrical connection to the trailer has been event, the warnings are suppressed for a
correctly established. certain period of time.
Driving and parking

Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
without the ON&OFFROAD package). ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Ryou brake hard.

Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect Towing a trailer
traffic situations or road users. An When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
inappropriate brake application may be correctly established the electrical
interrupted at any time if you: connection. This can be accomplished by
Rsteer
checking the trailer lighting.
slightly in the opposite direction
Rswitch on the turn signal
Rclearly brake or accelerate On-road programs (vehicles with the
A lane-correcting brake application is ON&OFFROAD package)
interrupted automatically if:
General notes
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind The on-road programs assist you during on-
Spot Assist. road driving and the off-road programs when
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
driving off-road (Y page 248).
The following program messages remain in
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist the multifunction display until the
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using corresponding vehicle level has been set. Up
the on-board computer; to do so, select to off-road level 2, you can hide the program
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 273). messages using the % or a button on
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph the multifunction steering wheel.
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 272) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Z
244 Driving systems
AUTO program SPORT program

Driving and parking
Select the AUTO program for a more Select the SPORT program for sporty,
comfortable ride under all normal driving dynamic handling.
conditions. Your selection remains stored even if you
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :.
selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends.
Selector wheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until
X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on.
indicator lamp ; comes on. SPORT indicator = appears in the
AUTO indicator = appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. RThe high-speed level of –15 mm when
RHighway level is set. compared with highway level is set.
RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts
comfortable damping characteristics to sporty damping characteristics to the
the current operating and driving current operating and driving conditions.
conditions. RThe automatic transmission selects the
RThe automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a sporty
automatic drive program for a driving style.
comfortable driving style that provides RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve is
for optimum fuel consumption. selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no

Driving systems 245
longer has to be pressed as far to RHighway level is set.

accelerate. RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts
RThe sporty steering curve is selected, comfortable damping characteristics to
e.g. greater force is required when the current operating and driving
steering. conditions.
Driving and parking

R4ETS and the differential lock are
i You cannot select the SPORT program if
adapted for driving on snow-covered
LOW RANGE has been selected. The
roads.
Drive Program SPORT Not in LOW
RThe automatic transmission selects the
RANGE message then appears in the
multifunction display. automatic drive program for a
comfortable driving style that provides
Snow program for optimum fuel consumption.
RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is
selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal must
be pressed significantly further to
accelerate.
RThe optimum gear for pulling away is
engaged.
Trailer program
Select the snow program for driving in snow

with or without snow chains.
selector wheel :.
X To select: turn selector wheel : until
indicator lamp ; comes on.
Snow indicator = appears in the Select the trailer program when towing a
multifunction display. trailer.
Z
246 Driving systems
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press otherwise damage the drive train or the
selector wheel :. brake system.
Selector wheel : extends. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are
X To select: turn selector wheel : until permanently driven. Together with ESP® and
indicator lamp ; comes on. 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle
Driving and parking
Trailer indicator = appears in the whenever a drive wheel spins due to

multifunction display. insufficient grip.
RHighway level is set. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
comfortable damping characteristics to you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
the current operating and driving chains if necessary.
conditions. Further information about "Driving off-road"
RThe automatic transmission selects the (Y page 187).
automatic drive program for a
comfortable driving style that provides DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
for optimum fuel consumption, changing
gear at optimum points. Important safety notes
RWhile pulling away, the differential locks DSR assists you when driving downhill. It
are engaged. keeps the speed of travel at the speed set on
the on-board computer. The steeper the
downhill gradient, the greater the DSR
Off-road driving systems braking effect on the vehicle. When driving on
flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient,
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) the DSR braking effect is minimal or
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC nonexistent.
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor DSR controls the set speed when it is active
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot and the automatic transmission is in the D,
take account of road, weather and traffic R or N position. By accelerating or braking,
conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are you can always drive at a higher or a lower
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in speed than that set on the on-board
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good computer.
time and for staying in your lane. Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 187).
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
raised. This may damage the transfer case. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
Damage of this sort is not covered by the neither reduce the risk of accident nor
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take
wheels must remain either on the ground account of road, weather and traffic
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
contact with the ground. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
! A function or performance test should You are always responsible for keeping
only be carried out on a two-axle control of the vehicle and for assessing
dynamometer. Before you operate the whether the downhill gradient can be
vehicle on such a dynamometer, please managed. DSR may not always be able to
consult a qualified workshop. You could keep to the set speed, depending on road

Driving systems 247
surface and tire conditions. Select a set If the current vehicle speed is too high, the
speed suitable for the prevailing conditions Ã DSR symbol appears in the
and when necessary, apply the brakes multifunction display with the Max. Speed
manually. 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h).
G WARNING i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on-
Driving and parking

If the speed driven and the set speed deviate road program is activated. The Ã DSR
and you activate DSR on a slippery road symbol and the Not in Drive Program
surface, the wheels may lose traction. If the SPORT message then appear in the
wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no longer multifunction display.
be steered. There is an increased danger of
Deactivating DSR
skidding and accidents.
X Press button :.
Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Activating DSR The Ã DSR symbol appears in the
G WARNING multifunction display with the Off
If you drive faster than the set speed and message.
activate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on DSR switches off automatically if you drive
downhill gradients. If you do not know the set faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The
speed, the vehicle could decelerate Ã DSR symbol appears in the
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. multifunction display with the Off message.
Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before The status indicator in the multifunction
activating DSR. If you do not know what the display goes out. You also hear a warning. On
stored set speed is, store the desired set vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package, if
speed again. you select a different on-road/off-road
program, DSR is also deactivated.
Changing the set speed
Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package

: DSR button
; DSR indicator lamp
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The Ã DSR symbol appears in the
You can only activate DSR when driving at
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z
248 Driving systems
X To increase or decrease in 1 mph Off-road program 1

increments (Canada: 1 km/h
increments): briefly press the cruise
control lever up : for a higher set speed
or down ; for a lower set speed.
Driving and parking
The set speed appears in the multifunction

display with the Ã DSR symbol. It is also
displayed in status indicator =.
When DSR is activated, you can change the
set speed to a value between 1 mph and
11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and
18 km/h).
i The DSR set speed is always changed in
1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h
increments). This is regardless of whether
you press the cruise control lever to or
beyond the pressure point.
Off-road programs (vehicles with the

ON&OFFROAD package)
General notes
The off-road programs assist you in driving X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
off-road. The engine’s performance selector wheel :.
characteristics and the gearshifting Selector wheel : extends.
characteristics of the automatic transmission X To select: turn selector wheel : until
are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and
indicator lamp ; comes on.
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
Off-road indicator = appears in the
driving are activated. An accelerator pedal
curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. multifunction display.
the accelerator pedal must be depressed Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+ 30 mm)
further to accelerate. above the highway level.
Do not use the off-road programs on roads If you drive at a speed above 70 mph
that are snow-covered or icy or if you have (110 km/h), off-road program 1 switches to
mounted snow chains on your vehicle. AUTO program.
For information on driving off-road, see Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-road
(Y page 187). terrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces or
The following program messages are shown tracks. The engine's torque is restricted to a
in the multifunction display until the limited degree and the drive wheels can spin.
applicable vehicle level is set. Up to off-road The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect
level 2, you can hide the program messages for better traction.
using the % or the a button on the You can only activate off-road program 1
multifunction steering wheel. when driving at speeds below 60 mph
(100 km/h). The Drive Program OFFROAD
1 Max Speed 60 mph (100 km/h) message

Driving systems 249
Off-road program 2 The differential lock improves the vehicle’s

traction. 4ETS (Y page 71) controls the
balance between both wheels on an axle.
You can only activate off-road program 2
when driving at speeds below 25 mph
Driving and parking

(40 km/h).
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles

with the ON&OFFROAD package)
G WARNING
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
traction:
Rif you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal when driving
Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking
If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no

longer be steered. There is an increased
danger of skidding and accidents.
Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press when driving on slippery road surfaces.
selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends. G WARNING
X To select: turn selector wheel : until If you do not wait for the transfer case gear
indicator lamp ; comes on. change process to complete, the transfer
Off-road indicator = appears in the case could remain in the neutral position. The
multifunction display. power transmission to the driven wheels is
ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in then interrupted. There is a danger of the
(+60 mm) above the highway level. vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is
RDSR is switched on.
RThe differential lock is closed.
Wait until the transfer case shift process is
completed.
Off-road program 2 automatically switches to
off-road program 1 if you drive faster than Do not turn off the engine while changing gear
30 mph (45 km/h). and do not shift the automatic transmission
Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain, to another position.
e.g. for steep and/or rough terrain or driving
on rocky terrain.
i Your vehicle has an automatically
activated differential lock for the transfer
case. It controls the balance between the
front and rear axles.
Z
250 Driving systems
General notes Further information about "Driving off-road"

(Y page 187). You will find information about
driving safety systems in conjunction with
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section
(Y page 66).
Driving and parking
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE

! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below
: LOW RANGE off-road gear button
40 km/h
; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on- Indicator lamp ; flashes.
road driving conditions When the gear change is complete,
LOW RANGE Off-road position for indicator lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE
driving off-road and indicator appears in the multifunction
fording display and in the status indicator.
The transmission ratio While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
between the engine and cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
wheels is only RANGE button : again.
approximately one third of
i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
that in the HIGH RANGE
SPORT on-road program is activated. The
road position. Drive torque
is thus proportionately LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program
higher. SPORT message then appears in the
Do not use LOW RANGE:
Ron slippery road From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
surfaces, e.g. in the case ! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
of slush RANGE if:
Ron snow or ice-covered Rtheengine is running.
roads Rthetransmission is in position N
Rif you have mounted Ryou are driving at a speed below
snow chains to your 70 km/h
vehicle
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in
driving off-road and when fording. When LOW When the gear change is complete,
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance indicator lamp ; goes out. In the
characteristics and the gearshifting multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off
characteristics of the automatic transmission message appears and status indicator =
are adapted for this purpose. goes out.

Driving systems 251
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can

cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
Driving and parking
Z
252 Driving systems
Messages in the multifunction display

If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed
in the multifunction display:
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Driving and parking
LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the
Speed 40 km/h indicator lamp on the button in the center console blinks.
X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.
LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
Position N Briefly 40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change
process.
LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out.
Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out
Reactivate the gear change process again.
LOW RANGE Stop A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no
connection between the engine and the drive wheels.
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the
vehicle's drive train.
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic
conditions when doing this.
X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 180).
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.
ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMAND You can display some driving systems, driving
display (vehicles with the programs and additional information in the
ON&OFFROAD package) COMAND display.
X Make sure that COMAND is activated, see
the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
X Press function button :.
The corresponding displays appear in the
COMAND display:
Rlevel control
Rsteering angle
Rvehicle's angle of inclination

Towing a trailer 253
Ruphillor downhill gradient in percentage cause the braking system to fail. There is a
Ron-road/off-road program selected risk of an accident.
Rcondition of the differential lock for the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
transfer case depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected pedal at the same time.
Driving and parking

Rcondition of the LOW RANGE off-road
gear G WARNING
Rthe on-road trailer program is selected When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The
vehicle/trailer combination could even
rollover. There is a risk of an accident.
Towing a trailer
On no account should you attempt to
Notes on towing a trailer straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
Important safety notes speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
G WARNING brake as necessary.
If you install a ball coupling other than the one ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
delivered with the vehicle, the trailer tow hitch results in excessive and premature wear to
and the rear axle may be overloaded. This the brake pads.
applies especially if the ball coupling in
question is longer or angled differently. This Please observe the manufacturer's operating
could seriously impair the driving instructions for the trailer coupling if a
characteristics and the trailer can come detachable trailer coupling is used.
loose. There is a risk of an accident. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
Only install the ball coupling delivered with you do not couple the trailer to the towing
the vehicle or a ball coupling that is designed vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
to meet your trailer towing requirements. Do detached.
not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow Make sure that the following values are not
hitch. exceeded:
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
G WARNING Rthe permissible trailer load
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
not secured with the bolt provided and the
vehicle
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
trailer
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and The applicable permissible values, which
the corresponding spring cotter. must not be exceeded, can be found:
Rin the vehicle documents
G WARNING Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while hitch, the trailer and the vehicle
driving, the braking system can overheat. This If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
increases the stopping distance and can even You will find the values approved by the
manufacturer on the vehicle identification
Z
254 Towing a trailer
plates and those for the towing vehicle under vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire
"Technical data" (Y page 456). pressure table in the fuel filler flap
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling (Y page 419).
characteristics will be different in comparison Please note that when towing a trailer,
with when driving without a trailer. PARKTRONIC (Y page 213) and Blind Spot
Driving and parking
The vehicle/trailer combination: Assist (Y page 233) are only available with
Ris heavier limitations, or not at all.
Ris restricted in its acceleration and i On vehicles without level control, the
gradient-climbing capability height of the ball coupling will alter
Rhas an increased braking distance according to the load placed on the vehicle.
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds If necessary, use a trailer with a height-
adjustable drawbar.
Rdemands more sensitive steering
Rhas a larger turning radius You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 455).
This could impair the handling
characteristics.
Driving tips
When towing a trailer, always adjust your
speed to the current road and weather i Observe the information on ESP® trailer
conditions. Do not exceed the maximum stabilization (Y page 73) and on pulling
permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer away with a trailer (Y page 160).
combination. The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
General notes trailer. Before beginning the journey, check
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed the trailer's documents to see what the
maximum speed for vehicle/trailer maximum permissible speed is. Observe the
combinations in the relevant country. legally prescribed maximum speed in the
relevant country.
This lowers the risk of an accident.
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the
maximum permissible rear axle load is
your vehicle.
increased when towing a trailer. See
Further information on availability and on "Technical data" to find out whether this
installation is available from any authorized applies to your vehicle (Y page 456). If you
Mercedes-Benz Center. utilize any of the added maximum rear axle
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer
suitable for installing detachable trailer combination may not exceed a maximum
couplings. speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or concerning the operating permit. This also
other detachable trailer couplings on the applies in countries in which the permissible
bumpers of your vehicle. maximum speed for vehicle/trailer
RIf you no longer need the ball coupling, combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).
remove it from the ball coupling recess. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
This will reduce the risk of damage to the characteristics will be different in comparison
ball coupling. with when driving without a trailer.
i When towing a trailer, set the tire Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into
pressure on the rear axle of the towing a lower gear in good time on long and steep
downhill gradients.

i This also applies if you have activated G WARNING

cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
This will use the braking effect of the engine, not secured with the bolt provided and the
so that less braking will be required to corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
maintain the speed. This relieves the load on come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Driving and parking

the brake system and prevents the brakes Always install and secure the ball coupling as
from overheating and wearing too quickly. If described. Before every journey, ensure that
you need additional braking, depress the the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
brake pedal repeatedly rather than the corresponding spring cotter.
continuously.
G WARNING
Driving tips If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
If the trailer swings from side to side: correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
X Do not accelerate.
Install and secure the ball coupling as
X Do not counter-steer.
described in the ball coupling installation
X Brake if necessary. instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling
RMaintain a greater distance from the is installed and secured correctly before every
vehicle in front than when driving without a journey.
trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine
and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-
climbing capability, decreases with
increasing altitude.
Cover cap
X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the
Installing the ball coupling arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
G WARNING X Place protective cap : in the ball coupling
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured recess.

correctly it can become detached while the
vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
Z
Driving and parking
Ball coupling recess Bolt and spring cotter

X Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.
Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recess

X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball Correctly installed and secured ball coupling
coupling recess ; in the direction of the X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring
arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are cotter for correct installation.
in line with the holes in ball coupling
recess ?. If the ball coupling cannot be correctly
mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under
these circumstances, the ball coupling must
not be used for trailer towing.
If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the
key cannot be removed, remove the ball
coupling and clean it. If the ball coupling can
still not be installed (locked) after it has been
cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer
tow hitch must then not be used to tow a
trailer, as safe operation cannot be
guaranteed.
Bolt Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball
coupling recess and the ball coupling to the
stop. Coupling up a trailer
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system
(if featured) to the hydraulic brake system

of the towing vehicle, as the latter is Leave enough play in the chains to make
equipped with an anti-lock brake system. tight cornering possible.
Doing so will result in a loss of function of RA separate brake system for certain types
the brake systems of both the vehicle and of trailer.
the trailer. RA safety switch for braked trailers. Check
Driving and parking

X Make sure that the automatic transmission the specific legal requirements applicable
is set to position P. to your state.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. If the trailer detaches from the towing
X Start the engine. vehicle, the safety switch applies the
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: trailer's brakes.
select highway level.
X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO or
Towing a trailer
COMF.
X Switch off the engine. There are numerous legal requirements
concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
restrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/
X Couple up the trailer.
trailer combination complies with the local
X Establish all electrical connections. requirements not only in your area of
X Check that the trailer lighting system is residence but also at any location to which
working. you are traveling. The police and local
authorities can provide reliable information.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
Please observe the following when towing a
with a trailer attached, the vehicle will
trailer:
always remain at highway level. When
coupling up a trailer, please observe the RIn order to accumulate driving experience
following: and accustom yourself to the new handling
RUnless highway level has been set characteristics, practice the following at a
manually, the vehicle is automatically location where there is no traffic:
lowered to highway level. This is the case - Cornering
if a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached. - Stopping
RHigh-speed level is not available. - Backing up
These restrictions apply to all accessories RBefore driving, check:
powered through a connection to the trailer - the trailer tow hitch
power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle - the safety switch for braked trailers
carrier.
- the safety chains
Observe the maximum permissible trailer - electrical connections
dimensions (width and length).
- the lights
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces
- the wheels
require by law:
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle unobstructed view of the rear section of the
and the trailer. The chains should be cross- trailer.
wound under the trailer drawbar. They must RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
be fastened to the vehicle's trailer
brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually
coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.
using the brake controller and check
whether the brakes function correctly.
Z
RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer
the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is combination, you will have to travel an
in motion. additional distance beyond the vehicle you
RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check are overtaking before returning to the
that the cargo is securely fastened and previous lane.
Driving and parking
make sure that the trailer lamps and (if

applicable) the trailer brakes are
functioning correctly. Decoupling a trailer
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
G WARNING
stable when towing a trailer than when
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
driving without one. Avoid sudden steering
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
movements.
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
gradient climbing capability and a longer
is engaged.
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and G WARNING
requires more careful steering.
Vehicles with level control:
RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you
the brake pedal moderately at first, so that
disconnect the trailer cable. This could result
the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then
in your limbs or those of other people that are
increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
between the vehicle body and tires or
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
underneath the vehicle being trapped. There
shifts between gears on uphill or downhill is a risk of injury.
gradients, shift to a lower gear using the
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
risk of engine failure.
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
to utilize the engine's braking effect. engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
Avoid continuous brake application as this vehicle could be damaged by the
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if rebounding of the overrun brake.
installed, the trailer brakes. X Make sure that the automatic transmission
RIf the coolant temperature increases is set to position P.
dramatically while the air-conditioning X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
system is switched on, switch off the air- X Start the engine.
conditioning system.
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.
by opening the windows and by setting the
blower fan and the interior temperature to X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the
maximum. trailer.
RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention X Switch off the engine.
to the extended length of your vehicle/
trailer combination.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbar Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
loads RTo check that the weights of the towing
Weight specifications vehicle and the trailer comply with the
maximum permissible values, have the
Maximum permissible gross vehicle vehicle/trailer combination (including the
Driving and parking

weight rating driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully
The gross trailer weight is calculated by laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated
adding the weight of the trailer to the weight weighbridge.
of the load and equipment on the trailer. RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the
You will find installing dimensions and loads front and rear axles, the gross weight of the
under "Technical data" (Y page 455). trailer and trailer drawbar load.
Permissible noseweight
You will find installing dimensions and loads Removing the ball coupling
under "Technical data" (Y page 455). X Remove the spring cotter.
X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling
Loading a trailer recess.
RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that X Remove the ball coupling from the ball
neither the permissible gross weight of the coupling recess.
trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of tow hitch can be found at (Y page 374).
the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible
Storing the ball coupling
values on the type plates of your vehicle
and the trailer. When calculating how much G WARNING
weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle
pay attention to the respective lowest interior if it is not secured.
values.
Otherwise, you and others could be injured by
RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
the ball coupling being thrown around if you:
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid Rbrake sharply
exceeding the permissible gross axle
Rchange direction suddenly
weight. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification Rare involved in an accident
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of

the vehicle.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer Trailer power supply
load where the trailer drawbar noseweight ! You can connect accessories with a
accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's maximum power consumption of 240 W to
permissible gross weight. the permanent power supply.
i The weight of additional accessories, You must not charge a trailer battery using
passengers, and cargo reduces the the power supply.
permissible trailer load and drawbar load The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped
for your vehicle. at the factory with a permanent power supply.
Z
The permanent power supply is supplied via

trailer socket pin 4.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
Driving and parking
A qualified specialist workshop can provide

more information about installing the trailer
electrics.

261
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 263
Menus and submenus ...................... 266
Display messages ............................. 282
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 316

262 Important safety notes
Useful information multifunction display. You should therefore

make sure your vehicle is operating safely at
i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident.
equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel
time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 33).
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the

Displays and operation 263
Displays and operation

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster: miles

: Speedometer with segments (Y page 264)
; Fuel gauge
= Tachometer (Y page 264)
? Coolant temperature (Y page 263)
A Multifunction display (Y page 265)
B Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 263)
Instrument cluster lighting In daylight, the displays in the instrument

cluster are not illuminated.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the brightness Coolant temperature display
control knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the G WARNING
bottom left of the instrument cluster Opening the hood when the engine is
(Y page 33). overheated or when there is a fire in the
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise engine compartment could expose you to hot
or counter-clockwise. gases or other service products. There is a
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or risk of injury.
L, the brightness is dependent upon Let an overheated engine cool down before
the brightness of the ambient light. opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster and contact the fire department.
automatically controls the brightness of
the multifunction display. ! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
Z
264 Displays and operation
If the coolant temperature is over Operating the on-board computer

248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged. Overview
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 33).
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
: Multifunction display
; Switches on the Voice Control System;
Outside temperature display see the separate operating instructions
= Right control panel
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around ? Left control panel
freezing point. A Back button
The outside temperature display is in the X To activate the on-board computer: turn
multifunction display (Y page 265). the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Changes in the outside temperature are lock.
displayed after a short delay.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
Speedometer with segments
wheel.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 191):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 194):
One or two segments in the set speed

range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the

vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.

Displays and operation 265
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: operating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial
: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a call

RExitsphone book/redial
memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call : Time
RSwitches to the redial memory ; Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 274)
= Text field
? Menu bar
Z
266 Menus and submenus
A Drive program (Y page 165) RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 274)

B Transmission position (Y page 165) RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 278)

RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 278)
X To show menu bar?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds. Trip menu
Text field = shows the selected menu or
Standard display
submenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using the audio
system or COMAND; see the separate
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
XjY Active Parking Assist
(Y page 216) X Press and hold the % button on the
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 191) steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
LOW LOW RANGE off-road gear
shown.
RANGE (Y page 249)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 126) Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 161)
ë HOLD function (Y page 206)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Example: trip computer "From Start"
Press the = or ; button on the
: Distance
steering wheel to call up the menu bar and
; Time
select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer = Average speed
(Y page 264). ? Average fuel consumption
Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press the = or ; button on the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
RTrip menu (Y page 266) X Press 9 or : to select From Start
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) or From Reset.
(Y page 268) The values in the From Start submenu are
RAudio menu (Y page 269) calculated from the start of a journey, while
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 270) the values in the From Reset submenu are
RDriveAssist menu (assistance) calculated from the last time the submenu
(Y page 272) was reset (Y page 267).
RService menu (Y page 273)

Menus and submenus 267
The From Start trip computer is The approximate range that can be covered

automatically reset when: depends on the fuel level and your current
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more driving style. If there is only a small amount
than four hours. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
R999 hours have been exceeded. a vehicle being refueled C instead of the
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
range.
The From Reset trip computer is Digital speedometer
automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
ECO display
: Shift recommendation (Y page 170)

; Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the
Example: ECO display steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the 9 or : button to select the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. digital speedometer.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
i If the gearshift recommendation is shown
ECO DISPLAY. at the top of the multifunction display, it is
If the ignition remains switched off for longer no longer shown at the bottom of the
than four hours, the ECO display will be multifunction display.
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display Resetting values
(Y page 183).
Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X Press the = or ; button on the function that you wish to reset.
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
current fuel consumption (not for AMG press the a button to confirm.
vehicles) and the approximate range.
Z
You can reset the values of the following Route guidance active
functions:
No change of direction announced
RTripodometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
i When you reset the values in the "ECO

display", the values in the trip computer
"From Start" are likewise reset. When you
: Distance to the destination
reset the values in the trip computer "From
Start", the values in the "ECO display"are ; Distance to the next change of direction
likewise reset. = Current road
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
Navigation system menu Change of direction announced without a

lane recommendation
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
For more information, see the separate
X Switch on the audio system with Becker®
MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
steering wheel to select the Navi menu. distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
Route guidance not active
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
: Direction of travel
; Current road

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu

lane recommendation
Selecting a radio station
: Road into which the change of direction

leads : Waveband
; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Channel frequency with memory position
distance display
i Station ; is displayed with the station
= New lane during a change of direction
frequency or station name. The memory
? Uninterrupted lane position is only displayed along with
A Lane recommendation station ; if this has been stored.
B Change-of-direction symbol X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; see
On multilane roads, the system can display the separate operating instructions.
lane recommendation = for the next change X Press the = or ; button on the
of direction. During the change of direction, steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
additional lanes may be displayed. X To select a stored station: briefly press
Lane recommendations are only displayed if the 9 or : button.
the relevant data is available on the digital X To select a station from the station
map. list: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
Other status indicators of the
If no station list is received:
navigation system
X To select a station using the station
RO: you have reached the destination or an search: press and briefly hold the 9
intermediate destination. or : button.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:
calculating a new route i For information on switching waveband
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle and storing stations; see the separate
position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position). i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to normal radio.
the selected destination. For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Z
Operating an audio player or audio Video DVD operation

media
Example: CD/DVD changer display

: Current title : Current scene
Audio data from various audio devices or X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;
media can be played, depending on the see the separate operating instructions.
equipment installed in the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the
X Switch on COMAND and activate audio steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the X To select the next/previous scene:
separate operating instructions. briefly press the 9 or : button.
X Press the = or ; button on the X To select a scene from the scene list
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
X To select the next/previous track: 9 or : button until desired
briefly press the 9 or : button. scene : has been reached.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired Telephone menu
track ; has been reached.
Introduction
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all G WARNING
audio drives or data carriers support this If you operate information systems and
function. communication equipment integrated in the
If track information is stored on the audio vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
device or medium, the multifunction display from traffic conditions. You could also lose
will show the number and title of the track. control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
The current track does not appear in audio accident.
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external Only operate the equipment when the traffic
audio source connected). situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the

legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the
separate operating instructions).
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to X Press the 9 or : button to select the

COMAND; see the separate operating desired name.
instructions. or
X Press the = or ; button on the X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
steering wheel to select the Tel menu. the 9 or : button for longer than
You will see one of the following display one second.
messages in the multifunction display: Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
RPhone
button or reach the end of the list.
READY or the name of the network
X If only one telephone number is stored
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive. for a name: press the 6 or a button
RPhone No Service: there is no network
to start dialing.
available or the mobile phone is searching or
for a network. X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
Accepting a call button to display the numbers.
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
X To exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.
Example: incoming call
If someone calls you when you are in the Redialing
Tel menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display. The on-board computer saves the last names
X Press the 6 button on the steering
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
wheel to accept an incoming call. X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You can accept a call even if you are not in
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
the Tel menu.
redial memory.
Rejecting or ending a call X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X Press the ~ button on the steering
X Press the 6 or a button to start
wheel.
dialing.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not or
in the Tel menu.
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button.
Dialing a number from the phone book
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
Z
Assistance menu The assistance graphic shows:

Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST
Introduction
(Y page 229) is deactivated.
Rthe lane markings in green when Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 235) or Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 241) is activated.
Rthe æ symbol when the distance
warning function (Y page 69) is
deactivated.
Rthe æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options: (Y page 74) is deactivated.
RDisplaying the assistance graphic Rthe f symbol when DSR (Y page 246)
(Y page 272) is activated.

RActivating/deactivating the distance Rthe Ç symbol when the Off-road
warning function (Y page 272) program (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD

RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake package) (Y page 248) is activated.
(Y page 272)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
Switching the distance warning
function on and off
ASSIST (Y page 273)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Press the = or ; button on the
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 273) steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping menu.
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist X Press 9 or : to select Distance
(Y page 273) Warning.
X Press the a button.
Displaying the assistance graphic The current selection is displayed.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X To activate/deactivate: press the a
to select the DriveAssist menu. button again.

X Press 9 or : to select Assistance When the distance warning function is
Graphic. deactivated, the assistance graphic shows
X Press the a button. the æ symbol in the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows the Further information on the distance warning
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the function (Y page 69).
assistance graphic (Y page 201).
X Press 9 or : to display the Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
ATTENTION ASSIST assessment Brake
(Y page 229). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
The assistance graphic can display the status with DISTRONIC PLUS.
of and information from other driving systems X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
or driving safety systems.
to select the DriveAssist menu.
PRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press the a button. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

The current selection is displayed. Assist
X To activate/deactivate: press the a X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
button again. to select the DriveAssist menu.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the X Press 9 or : to select Lane
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in Keeping Assist.
the multifunction display. X Press the a button.
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, The current selection is displayed.
see (Y page 74). X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
Standard or Adaptive.
ASSIST
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Lane Keeping
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
Assist, see (Y page 235).
menu.
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 241).
ATTENTION ASSIST.
The current selection is displayed. Maintenance menu
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 229).
In the Service menu, you have the following
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot options:
Assist RCalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 282)
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
to select the DriveAssist menu.
system (Y page 406)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
Blind Spot Assist.
(Y page 406)
RCalling up the service due date
The current selection is displayed. (Y page 369)
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 233).
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 237).
Z
Settings menu The selected unit of measurement for

distance applies to:
Introduction Rdigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
Rodometer and the trip odometer
Rtrip computer
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menu
Rcruise control
In the Sett. menu, you have the following RDISTRONIC PLUS
options: RASSYST PLUS service interval display
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 274) Selecting the permanent display function
RChanging the light settings (Y page 274) You can determine whether the multifunction
RChanging the vehicle settings
display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
(Y page 276)
RChanging the convenience settings X Press the = or ; button on the
(Y page 277) steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
RRestoring the factory settings X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 278) Instrument Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.
Instrument cluster submenu X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
Selecting the unit of measurement for
You will see the selected setting Outside
distance
Temperature or Additional
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Speedometer [km/h] (USA)/
function allows you to choose whether Additional Speedometer [mph]
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles (Canada).
in the multifunction display.
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
kilometers. (Canada).
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. Light submenu
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Setting the daytime running lamps
Instrument Cluster submenu. i This function is not available in Canada.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or Lights submenu.
miles. X Press a to confirm.

X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime Setting the ambient lighting color

Running Lights: function. X Press the = or ; button on the
If the Daytime Running Lights: have steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
been switched on, the cone of light and the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
W symbol in the multifunction display Lights submenu.
are shown in red.
Further information on daytime running Ambient Light Color function.
lamps (Y page 120). X Press a to confirm.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ X Press the : or 9 button to set the
off color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the a or % button to save the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. setting.
Lights submenu. Surround lighting and exterior lighting
delayed switch-off
Adaptive Highbeam function.
If the Adaptive Highbeam function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the Light submenu.
_ symbol in the upper multifunction X Press a to confirm.
display are shown in red. X Press : or 9 to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Surround Lighting function.
When the Surround Lighting function is
For further information about Adaptive
activated, the light cone and the area
Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 126).
around the vehicle are displayed in red in
Setting the brightness of the ambient the multifunction display.
lighting X Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. exterior lighting temporarily:
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
Lights submenu.
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the ignition lock.
Amb. Light +/-. function. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
You will see the selected setting. deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the reactivated the next time you start the
brightness to any level from Off to Level engine.
5 (bright). If you have activated the Surround
X Press the a or % button to save the Lighting function and the light switch is set
setting. to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Z
RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting Vehicle submenu

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, Activating/deactivating the automatic
the surround lighting is switched off and door locking mechanism
the automatic headlamp mode is activated If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
(Y page 120). function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
exterior lighting remains lit for X Press the = or ; button on the
60 seconds after the engine is switched off. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
If you close all the doors and the tailgate, X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
the exterior lighting goes off after submenu.
5 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, X Press : or 9 to select the
when the surround lighting and delayed Automatic Door Lock function.
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
When the Automatic Door Lock function
following light up:
is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
RParking lamps
in red in the multifunction display.
RDaytime running lamps X Press the a button to save the setting.
RSide marker lamps
For further information on the automatic
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
locking feature, see (Y page 88).
Activating/deactivating the interior Activating/deactivating the acoustic
lighting delayed switch-off locking verification signal
If you activate the Interior Lighting If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
Delay function, the interior lighting remains an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
on for 20seconds after you remove the vehicle.
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
Interior Lighting Delay function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
When the Interior Lighting Delay the & symbol in the multifunction
function is activated, the vehicle interior is display lights up red.
displayed in red in the multifunction
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.

X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

X Press the 9 or : button to select Easy Entry/Exit: function.
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
You will see the selected setting: Enabled activated, the vehicle steering wheel
or Disabled. appears in red in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a button to save the setting.
The following systems are switched off when Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
the radar sensor system is deactivated: feature (Y page 113).
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194) Switching the belt adjustment on/off
RBAS PLUS (Y page 68) X Press the = or ; button on the
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74) steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 233) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) Convenience submenu.

Convenience submenu X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment function.
Activating/deactivating the EASY- When the Belt Adjustment function is
ENTRY/EXIT feature activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed
G WARNING in red in the multifunction display.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts X Press the a button to save the setting.
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
For further information on belt adjustment,
see (Y page 57).
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Switching the fold-in mirrors with the
making adjustments, make sure that no one locking feature on/off
has any body parts in the sweep of the This function is only available on vehicles with
steering wheel. the memory function (Y page 117).
If somebody becomes trapped: When you activate the Auto. Mirror
Rpress one of the memory function position Folding function, the exterior mirrors are
buttons, or folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
Rmove the switch for steering wheel unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the
adjustment in the opposite direction to that exterior mirrors fold out again.
in which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the = or ; button on the
The adjustment process is stopped. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the Convenience submenu.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
Convenience submenu. Mirror Folding function.
X Press a to confirm. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
Z
displayed in red in the multifunction ON&OFFROAD menu

display.
Example: multifunction display

steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD
menu.
You can set the current settings to appear in
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out the ON&OFFROAD menu:
ROn-road program (Y page 243)
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror
ROff-road program (Y page 248)
Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrors
in using button : , they will not fold out
automatically (Y page 115).
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :. AMG displays
Restoring the factory settings

Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm. : Digital speedometer
The Reset All Settings? message ; Gear indicator
appears.
= Upshift indicator
X Press the : or 9 button to select
? Engine oil temperature
No or Yes.
A Coolant temperature
X Press a to confirm the selection.
B Status indicator (indicator not available in
If you select Yes, the multifunction display
shows a confirmation message. USA/Canada)
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running

X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Lights function in the Lights submenu is to select the AMG menu.
only reset if the vehicle is stationary. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
Upshift indicator UP = fades out other
messages until you have shifted up.
If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡
(80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue.

Avoid driving at full engine output during this You can start the RACETIMER when the

time. engine is running or if the SmartKey is in
SETUP X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time

: Drive program (C/S/M)
; ESP® mode (ON/OFF)
= Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/
SPORT+)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
suspension tuning.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
The intermediate time is displayed for five
SETUP is displayed.
seconds.
RACETIMER Starting a new lap
Displaying and starting RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function
on public roads.
: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
: Lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of
; RACETIMER
sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be
completed with Finish Lap.
Z
Stopping the RACETIMER Overall statistics

X Press the % button on the steering : RACETIMER overall evaluation

wheel. ; Total time driven
X Press a to confirm Yes. = Average speed
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you ? Distance covered
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to A Maximum speed
position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the
This function is shown if you have stored at
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
a to confirm Start, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown.
Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics
Deleting all laps
: Lap
; Lap time
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER
= Average lap speed
is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted. ? Lap length
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If A Top speed during lap
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.

This function is only available if you have

stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
Z
282 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 206)
RParking (Y page 179)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

Display messages 283
Safety systems

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
Currently start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily
Unavailable See unavailable.
Operator's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosisis not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
Z


can increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.


÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
÷ stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
can increase.
Z

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 180).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking
brake (Y page 180).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada
To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to P.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

X Do not drive on.


The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 422).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180).
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of
Inoperative overvoltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the
only) ignition was switched off.
Turn On the X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
Ignition to X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
Release the
Parking Brake


$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In
addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp
only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
only)
G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
Level The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system
are malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID
system are malfunctioning.
X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified
X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified
PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z

PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive

Functions Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Limited Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty.
Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 374).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 72).


PRE-SAFE Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:
Functions PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Limited Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.

message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 374).
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 72).
PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive

Functions Limited Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also have
See Operator's failed.
Manual Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:
PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning
function may also have failed.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System).
SRS Malfunction The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 43).
Z

6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left
Malfunction G WARNING
Service The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
RequiredorFront triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Right Malfunction be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Left
Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
or Rear Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Malfunction be triggered.
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp

also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center
Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
be triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the
Left Side Curtain instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service G WARNING
RequiredorRight The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
Side Curtain unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
Airbag Malfunction triggered.


Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Ran adult
Manual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
Manual system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional

weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in


X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

Check Left
Cornering Light or
Check Right
Cornering Light
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Low
(Y page 129).
BeamorCheck Right
Low Beam or
b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Check Trailer Left
trailer manufacturer.
Turn Signal or
Check Trailer
Right Turn Signal
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 129).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left
Turn SignalorCheck
Front Right Turn
Signal
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
(Y page 129).
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 129).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 129).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

License Plate Lamp


b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
Check Front Left
(Y page 129).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

or
Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.
Right Tail Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
Running
LightorCheck Right
Daytime Running
Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 394).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.

Z

b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 367).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.


? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
Z

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 365).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
Check Engine Oil
(Y page 365).
Level (Add 1 quart)
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:


8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
Ultra Low-sulfur X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Diesel Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace Air Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Check Fuel Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ø The DEF tank is almost empty.

X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified
Check Additive See
specialist workshop (Y page 177).
Operator's Manual
Ø The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
further 16 times.
Remaining Starts: X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist
16
workshop (Y page 177).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added,
it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF
tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (Y page 177).
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Z

Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:

Ryou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
Drive More Slowly
Ryou are towing a trailer.
Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level
again.
RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 202)
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 209)
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 253).
Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first

needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.
Compressor Is X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
Cooling
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message
disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected
level.
Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not
Malfunction
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.
Max. Speed12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicle
icon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle could tip and rollover.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering
movements.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached
off-road level 2.


ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling
SYSTEM Malfunction characteristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling
SYSTEM Malfunction characteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's
Manual
G WARNING
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Avoid sudden acceleration in tight bends and fast steering
movements.
Á The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display

message informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-
Raising Max. Speed road level 3.
12 mph X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).
g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level

2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed
Lowering Max. permissible for off-road level 3.
Speed 12 mph X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached
off-road level 2.
8 The differential lock is malfunctioning.

Different. Lock
Sys. Malfunction
8 The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.

Different. Locking
X Allow the differential lock to cool down.
Sys. Cooling Down
Please Wait The differential lock reengages as soon as it has cooled down.
Z

LOW RANGE Stop A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the
Apply Parking Brake neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and
the drive wheels.
X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under
any circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
LOW RANGE LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.

Malfunction To X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
park, Apply Brake X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 179).
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic
Position N Briefly transmission is not in position N.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.
LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled.

Canceled Please X Repeat the gearshift process.
Reactivate
Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a

malfunction.
Inoperative X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 206).
Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated.

Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 276).
Operator's Manual


Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
or Active Lane
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Keeping Assist
Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
Operator's Manual message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
InoperativeorActiv
e Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe sensors are dirty.
Operator's Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
or Active Blind
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Spot Assist
Currently range.
Unavailable See Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 374).
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while

towing a trailer.
You have established the electrical connection between the trailer
and your vehicle.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display
message.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
Active Blind Spot mirrors.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
Canceled fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.


The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 216).
Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
Inoperative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 216).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 194).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 194).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

Currently Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Unavailable See Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 374).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be
inoperative as well.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Passive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 194).


Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
--- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 191).
Z
Tires

Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Pressure Soon loss in pressure.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 381).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 406).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 406).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 406).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 409).


Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
increase.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406).
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Z

Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
'N' to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
Malfunction being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.


Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
in P Risk of or D.
Vehicle Rolling A warning tone also sounds.
Away X Shift the transmission to position P.
Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.
? The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open.

X Close all the doors.
Z

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering
Malfunction See G WARNING
Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

service receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 368).
Wiper The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

Malfunctioning X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunctioning
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key


Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 83).
Replace Key Battery
Â This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds

and is simply a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display
message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Vehicle
Z
316 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Â KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A

warning tone also sounds.
Remove 'Start' X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
Button and Insert
desired position.
Key
Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps in the % Diesel engine: preglow

instrument cluster (Y page 159)
h Tire pressure monitor
Overview (Y page 329)
L Low-beam headlamps
(Y page 121)
T Parking lamps (Y page 122)
K High-beam headlamps
(Y page 124)
#! Turn signal (Y page 123)
ü Seat belts (Y page 317)
$ (USA) Brakes (Y page 318)
J (Canada) Brakes (Y page 318)
! ABS (Y page 319)
÷ ESP®(Y page 321)
å ESP® OFF (Y page 321)
F (USA) Electric parking brake (red)
(Y page 324)
! (Canada) Electric parking brake (red)
(Y page 324)
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) (Y page 324)
6 SRS (Y page 324)
; Check Engine (Y page 325)
8 Reserve fuel (Y page 325)
? Coolant (Y page 326)
· Distance warning function
(Y page 328)

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 317
Safety

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 57).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 57).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 57).
warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You
The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven
warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 57).
audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
sounds. ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving

faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than
15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

$ (USA only) G WARNING
J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking
The red brake system characteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
display.
$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
display.


! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a
The yellow ABS warning malfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS,
lamp is lit while the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE®
engine is running. Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill
start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also deactivated, for
example.
G WARNING
can increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Z

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,

The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD
engine is running. function, hill start assist, and ESP® trailer stabilization, for
example, are also deactivated.
Rself-diagnosisis not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
can increase.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.


! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,
The yellow ABS warning PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,
lamp is lit while the the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,
engine is running. A for example, are not available either.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
can increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,
J (Canada only) PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,
÷å! the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,
The red brake warning for example, are also not available.
lamp, the yellow ESP® ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
and ESP® OFF warning G WARNING
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
can increase.
display.
Z

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
motion. necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION

The yellow ESP® and PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® OFF warning ESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to a malfunction.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
increase.
display.


÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
The yellow ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
lamps are lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
increase.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
Z

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red electric parking
brake indicator lamp
flashes or lights up
and/or
!
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
The red SRS warning System).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
be triggered.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).

Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with a gasoline engine)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 176).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency
running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
Check Engine warning workshop.
lamp may light up.
Z

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.


? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
warning lamp comes on cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
while the engine is
running. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 367).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is G WARNING
running. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
Z


display.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 367).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
Driving systems

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance of travel at too high a speed.
warning function X Be prepared to brake immediately.
warning lamp comes on X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
while the vehicle is brake or take evasive action.
moving. A warning tone
also sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194).
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74).
Further information on the distance warning function
(Y page 69).

Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
increase.
display.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406).
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
Z
330

331

Stowage areas .................................. 332
Features ............................................. 343
Stowage and features

332 Stowage areas
Useful information never be exceeded. The gross load limit and

the GVWR are specified on the vehicle
i This Operator's Manual describes all identification plate on the B-pillar of the
models and all standard and optional driver's door (Y page 409).
equipment of your vehicle available at the The load must also be distributed so that the
time of publication of the Operator's weight on each axle never exceeds the gross
Manual. Country-specific differences are axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and
possible. Please note that your vehicle may rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and
not be equipped with all features GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate
described. This also applies to safety- on the B-pillar of the driver's door
related systems and functions. (Y page 409).
i Read the information on qualified Observe the notes on the loading the vehicle
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). (Y page 409).
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
Stowage areas the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
Loading guidelines transporting a load:
G WARNING RNever exceed the maximum permissible
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip weight rating of the vehicle (including
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants).
occupants. There is a risk of injury, RThe cargo compartment is the preferred
particularly in the event of sudden braking or place to carry objects.
a sudden change in direction. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
Always store objects so that they cannot be possible and as low down in the cargo
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or compartment as possible.
loads against slipping or tipping before the RThe load must not protrude above the
journey. upper edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or
G WARNING front seat backrests. Make sure that the
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust seat backrests are securely locked into
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate place.
is open when the engine is running, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust seats if possible.
fumes could enter the passenger RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
Turn off the engine before opening the RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle size of the load.
weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare RHook in the cargo net when loading.
wheel, installed accessories, vehicle RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
occupants and luggage/cargo. wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
The gross load limit and the gross vehicle for protection.
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must

Stowage areas 333
Stowage space
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change

in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be 1 Glove box unlocked
thrown around in such situations. 2 Glove box locked
RAlways make sure that objects do not
The glove box can be locked and unlocked
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets using the mechanical key.
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332).
Glove box
Partition : for stowing flat objects is located

in the upper section of the glove box. It can
be removed to increase the stowage space in
the glove box.
X To remove: pull partition : forwards and
out
X To install: insert partition : and push it
back until it engages.
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i The glove box can be cooled
(Y page 153).
Z
334 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the X To open: press marking :.

armrest The eyeglasses compartment opens
downwards.
X To close: press marking : again and
eyeglasses compartment returns upwards
and engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front

center console
X To open: pull handle : up.

The armrest folds out.
In the stowage compartment, there is a
stowage tray.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment.
Media Interface is a universal interface for
mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®
X To open: slide cover : forwards.
or MP3 Player. Stowage compartment ; appears.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will
i There is a removable stowage tray in the
go.
storage compartment, in which objects
such as an iPod® can be stored.
Stowage compartment in the rear
Eyeglasses compartment center console
X To open: briefly press the stowage

compartment marking.
The stowage compartment opens.

Stowage areas 335
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,

there may be open stowage spaces above
and below the stowage compartment.
Stowage net
G WARNING
Vehicles with the Occupant Classification

System (OCS):
If the gross weight of the objects in the
stowage net on the back of the front- The through-loading facility is opened from
passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), the cargo compartment.
OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's X Release the seat backrests in the second
weight category. The front-passenger front air row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/load
bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to position (Y page 108).
deploy in the event of an accident. This poses X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
Never exceed the permissible gross weight of bench seat into the uppermost position
4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects (Y page 106).
in the cargo compartment.
X Slide release catch : to the left and swing
Stowage nets are located in the front- flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear
passenger footwell and on the back of the side of the rear bench seat.
driver's and the front-passenger seat.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 333).
Through-loading facility in the rear

If objects or loads are not secured when being
transported in the through-loading facility,
they could slip or be thrown around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332)
X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the
and the safety notes regarding stowage rear seat armrest.
spaces (Y page 333).
Cargo compartment enlargement

G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
Z
336 Stowage areas
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the i If the driver's or front-passenger seat is
event of an accident. set for a larger person, it may not be
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be possible to fold the rear bench seat
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench forwards. In this case, move the front seats
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The as far forward as possible.
seat belt can no longer offer the intended X Move the head restraints to the lowest
level of protection and could even cause position (Y page 108).
injuries. X Fold seat cushion : upwards.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo
compartment cannot be restrained by the

seat backrest.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Fold the seat cushion upwards before

folding the rear bench seat forward.
Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the X Pull release handle ; upwards in the
front seats should not be moved to their direction of the arrow until the backrest is
rearmost position. Otherwise, the front fully released.
seats and the rear bench seat could be X Fold the backrest forwards until it reaches
damaged.
the cargo compartment position.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
Folding the rear bench seat forwards

! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take
care when folding it down. Make sure that
the head restraints are pushed all the way
in so that the backrests and seat cushions
are not damaged.
X Guide seat belts ; under respective
clips :.

Stowage areas 337
Folding the rear bench seat back RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Cargo compartment

X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.
Make sure not to trap the seat belt while
doing so.
X Swing seat cushion : back.
There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if cargo compartment.
necessary (Y page 108). Before using the cargo tie-down rings on the
front right-hand side of the cargo
compartment, the stowage net must be
Securing cargo pushed down.
Cargo tie-down rings
Bag hook
General notes
G WARNING
G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a or items of luggage. Objects or items of
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
in direction or in the event of an accident. The Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk objects on the bag hooks.
of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
securing a load. of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
Z
338 Stowage areas
Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargo
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy

objects on top of the cargo compartment
There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment cover.
on the left-hand side.
A cargo compartment cover or a combined
X Press bag hook marking :. cargo cover and net (cargo compartment
X Turn bag hook : until it engages. cover with cargo net) is installed, depending
on equipment, behind the rear bench seat
backrest.
Securing hooks
Extending/retracting the cargo
compartment cover
There is one securing hook : on each side

of the cargo compartment.
Only secure lightweight luggage items on the X To extend: pull the cargo compartment
securing hooks (maximum 9 lbs (4 kg)). cover back by grab handle : and clip it
into retainers ; on the left and right.
Cargo compartment cover X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from left-hand and right-hand
Important safety notes retainers ;.
X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards
G WARNING
by grab handle : until it is completely
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, rolled up.
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event
of an accident. There is an increased risk of

Stowage areas 339
Removing/installing the cargo Removing/installing the combined

compartment cover (without integrated cargo cover and net (cargo
cargo net) compartment cover with integrated
cargo net)

X To remove: make sure that cargo
compartment cover : is rolled up. You can install and remove the combined
X Push end cap = of cargo compartment cargo cover and net from the cargo
cover : in the direction of the arrow on compartment.
the right or left-hand side. X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargo
X Push cargo compartment cover : into compartment cover are rolled up.
X To remove: press button ;.
opposite anchorage ;.
X Remove cargo compartment cover :. X Swing the combined cargo cover and net in
the direction of the arrow.
X To install: if installed, remove the
X First, detach the combined cargo cover and
protective caps from the side panels of the
seat row in which the cargo compartment net from left-hand catch : and then
cover is to be installed. Use a suitable remove it from right-hand fixture =.
object here, e.g. a coin. X To install: push the combined cargo cover
X Install the protective caps to the side and net up to the stop into right-hand
panels of the other seat row. fixture =.
X Place cargo compartment cover : into X Place the combined cargo cover and net
anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side. into the left-hand fixture and push it into
X Push in opposite end cap = of cargo
catch : until the combined cargo cover
and net engages audibly.
compartment cover : in the direction of
the arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
Z
340 Stowage areas
X Make sure that red lock status Coat hooks on the tailgate
indicator ? is no longer visible. The
combined cargo cover and net will
otherwise not be locked in place.
Cargo net in combined cargo cover

and net
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
: Coat hook
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There EASY-PACK load-securing kit
is an increased risk of injury or even fatal Components and storage
injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or to use your cargo compartment for a variety
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by of purposes. The accessory parts are located
using tie downs, even if you are using the under the cargo compartment floor.
cargo net. X Open the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 342).
It is important to use a cargo net if you load
the vehicle with small objects above the seat
backrests. For safety reasons, always use a
cargo net when transporting loads.
Attaching the cargo net
EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts

: Bag containing the brackets and luggage
holder
; Telescopic rod
X Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook it

into eyelets ; using both hands.

Stowage areas 341
Inserting the brackets into the loading X To install: insert two brackets A into the
rail left or right loading rail (Y page 340).
X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out slightly.
X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A
and, while doing so, press release button
= and push the luggage holder downwards
until it engages.

X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out in the direction
of the arrow.
X Place the load between the strap and the
X Insert bracket : into the center of loading cargo compartment side wall.
rail ?. X Using one hand, press locking button : of
X Press release button ; and push the luggage holder.

X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly
bracket : into the desired position in
loading rail ?. until the load is secured.
X Make sure that locking button ? on
X Let go of release button ;.
brackets A is pressed.
X Press locking button =.
This keeps brackets A in place on the
Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.
loading rail.
X If necessary, fold cargo tie-down ring A
X To remove: press release button = on
upwards. respective bracket A and remove luggage
holder ; by pulling upwards and out.
Luggage holder
! Only use the luggage holder to secure Telescopic rod
cargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs
(7 kg) and with dimensions that the luggage
holder can safely and securely contain.
The telescopic rod can be used to secure the

load against the rear seats to prevent it from
moving around.
The luggage holder can be used to secure
light loads against the side wall of the cargo
compartment to prevent them from moving
around.
Z
342 Stowage areas
X To install: insert one bracket ; into both X To open: holding the ribbing, press
the left and the right loading rails and slide handle : downwards ;.
it to the desired position (Y page 340). Handle : folds up.
X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ; X Swing the cargo compartment floor
and, while doing so, press release upwards using handle : until it rests
button ? and push the rod downwards against the cargo compartment cover.
until it engages.
X Make sure that locking button = on
brackets ; is pressed.
This keeps brackets ; in place on the

loading rail.
X To remove: press release button ? on
respective bracket ; and remove
telescopic rod : by pulling it upwards and
out.
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the

Stowage well under the cargo
cargo compartment floor in the direction of
compartment floor
the arrow.
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
X Attach hook = to the cargo

compartment's upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo
compartment's upper seal ?.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the cargo compartment floor.
X Fold the trunk floor down.
X Press the cargo compartment floor
A removable insert under the cargo down ; until it engages.
compartment floor contains the parts of the
EASY-PACK load-securing kit. The tire- i To remove the cargo compartment floor,
change tool kit is stored beneath this insert. undo the press studs below the cargo
compartment floor. When you re-install the

Features 343
cargo compartment floor, fasten it with the Attaching the roof carrier
press studs.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity

of the vehicle rises and the driving
characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a doing so, observe the manufacturer's
risk of an accident. installation instructions.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
Features
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested Cup holder
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the
vehicle. G WARNING
Position the load on the roof carrier in such If objects in the passenger compartment are
a way that the vehicle will not sustain stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
damage even when it is in motion. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
ensure that when the roof carrier is event of sudden braking or a sudden change
installed you can: in direction.
Rraise RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
the sliding sunroof fully
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
sliding panel fully
Ropen the tailgate fully protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg). RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors
provide space for bottles with a capacity of
up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).
Z
344 Features
The bottles are not secured or prevented from The temperature-controlled cup holder can
tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm
drink containers in the stowage drinks warm.
compartments. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Cup holder in the front-compartment X To switch on the cooling function: press
center console and hold button = until the blue indicator
lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch on the heating function: press
and hold button = until the red indicator

lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch off the function: press and hold
button = until the indicator lamp on the
button goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal
insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a
certain temperature is reached, residual heat
: Cup holder indicator lamp ; lights up. This means that
; Cover the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For
X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost this reason, you must not reach into the cup
holder metal insert.
position.
X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the
cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.
go.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
water only. ! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
Temperature-controlled cup holder in down, as you could otherwise damage it.
the front-compartment center console
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

: Cup holder Cup holder : is located in the rear seat
; Residual heat indicator lamp
armrest.
= Switch

Features 345
Sun visors X Fold down sun visor :.

X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
Overview
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
G WARNING X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
windshield.
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down
Roller sunblinds on the rear side
while driving.
windows
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
would damage the automatic roller
mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller
sunblind hooked in and the side windows
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring
back suddenly when driving at high speeds,
e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could
: Mirror light damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either
; Bracket close the side window or retract the roller
sunblind before driving at high speeds.
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
back of the window.
Z
346 Features
X Lift insert = up ; and out.

X To re-install the insert: place insert =
into the holder and press it down on the
right until it engages.
go.
Rear-compartment ashtray
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and

before you fold the rear seats forward. You
The roller sunblind can be hooked back into
can otherwise damage the ashtray.
place should it pop out from the top of the
guide rail.
X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.
X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide
rail =.
X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
! The holder under the ashtray is not heat
The ashtray opens.
resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the
X To remove the insert: push into recess
ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder = from the right.
could be damaged. Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the
right.
X Lift insert : up and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert :
into the holder and press down on the right
until it engages.
Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment
System have an ashtray in the center console
in the rear compartment.
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost Cigarette lighter

position.
G WARNING
X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
X To remove the insert: push insert = to heating element or the socket of the cigarette
the left ?. lighter.
Insert = slides out slightly to the right.

Features 347
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: 12 V sockets

Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls General notes
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. With the exception of the socket in the front
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is center console, all sockets can be used for
out of reach of children. Never leave children accessories with a maximum current draw of
240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center

unsupervised in the vehicle.
console can be used for accessories with a
! The cigarette lighter in the center console maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).
in the front compartment is not intended Accessories include such items as lamps or
for operating the tire inflation compressor. chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center

Your attention must always be focused on the console
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions ! The socket is not suitable for operating
permit. the tire inflation compressor.
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost
position.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
go.
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost
position.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
go.
Z
348 Features
Socket in the rear-compartment center RUse only connector cables that are dry and
console free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified
specialized workshop if it is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a
115 V power socket that is damaged or has

been pulled out of the trim.
G DANGER
X Lift up the cover of socket :. If you reach into the power socket or plug
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment inappropriate devices into the power socket,
System have two sockets in the center you could receive an electric shock. There is
console in the rear compartment. a risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
Socket in the cargo compartment power socket.
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V

power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic
devices can be connected. These devices,
such as games consoles, chargers and
laptops, should not consume more than a
X Lift up the cover of socket :. maximum of 150 watts altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has
115 V socket a suitable connector and conforms to
Important safety notes standards specific to the country you are
in.
G DANGER Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
When a suitable device is connected, the correctly into 115 V power socket.
115 V power socket will be carrying a high Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
voltage. You could receive an electric shock connected must not exceed 150 watts.
if the connector cable or the 115 V power Rthe on-board power supply is within a
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged permissible voltage range.
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment
and the cargo compartment are
operational.

Features 349
Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.
X Open flap =.
X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To turn off: disconnect the plug from
115 V power socket :.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Z
350 Features
Problems with the 115 V power socket

The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
the 115 V power socket X Start the engine.
is not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 388).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant

nominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-on
current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,
the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable device.
mbrace Shortly after successfully registering with the

service, a user ID and password will be sent
General notes to you by post.
You must have a license agreement to USA only: you can use this password to log
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"
your system is activated and operational. To at http://www.mbusa.com.
log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If The system is available if:
any of the steps mentioned are not carried Rit has been activated and is operational
out, the system may not be activated. Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
If you have questions about the activation, is available for transmitting data to the
contact one of the following telephone Customer Center
hotlines: Ra service subscription is available
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) i Determining the location of the vehicle on
or 1-866-990-9007 a map is only possible if:
RCanada: Customer Service at RGPS reception is available.
1-888-923-8367 Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.

Features 351
The mbrace system expected. In the event of an emergency, help

will have to be summoned by other means.
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed
as follows: Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
X Press the W or X button on the the following service hotlines:
multifunction steering wheel.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
or Center at
X Use the volume controller of the audio 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
system/COMAND. or 1-866-990-9007

The system offers various services, e.g: RCanada: Customer Service at
RAutomatic and manual emergency call 1-888-923-8367

RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
Emergency call
USA only: you can find information and a Important safety notes
description of all available features under
G WARNING
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
System self-test
emergency if:
After you have switched on the ignition, the Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the
system carries out a self-diagnosis. vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
A malfunction in the system has been accident
detected if one of the following occurs: Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does road
not come on during the system self-test. Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside seen by other road users, particularly when
Assistance button does not light up during dark or in poor visibility conditions
self-diagnosis of the system. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
button does not light up during self- similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
diagnosis of the system. so. Move to a safe location along with other
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
following buttons continues to light up red the vehicle in accordance with national
after the system self-diagnosis: regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
- SOS button
You must have a license agreement to
- F Roadside Assistance call button
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that
- ï MB Info call button your system is activated and operational. To
RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the register, press the ï MB Info call button.
Inoperative or Service Not If any of the steps mentioned are not carried
Activated message appears in the out, the system may not be activated.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
Z
352 Features
If you have questions about the activation, If no voice connection can be established to
contact one of the following telephone the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
hotlines: Center, the system has been unable to initiate
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance an emergency call.
Center at This can occur, for example, if the relevant
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) mobile phone network is not available. The
or 1-866-990-9007 indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
RCanada: Customer Service at continuously.
1-888-923-8367 The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.

General notes In this case, summon assistance by other
An emergency call is dialed automatically if means.
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered. Making an emergency call
i You cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the X To initiate an emergency call
multifunction display. manually: press cover : briefly to open.
All important information on the emergency X Press SOS button ; briefly.
is transmitted, for example: The indicator lamp in SOS button ;

RCurrent location of the vehicle (as flashes until the emergency call is
determined by the GPS system) concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the
RVehicle identification number
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Center.
Shortly after the emergency call has been X After the emergency call, close cover :.
initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer i If the mobile phone network is
Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. unavailable, mbrace will not be able to
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the make the emergency call. If you leave the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS
Center attempts to get more information button, you will not know whether mbrace
on the emergency. placed the emergency call. In this case,
RIf there is no response from the vehicle always summon assistance by other
occupants, an ambulance is immediately means.
sent to the vehicle.

Features 353
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or makes arrangements for

your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate
a roadside assistance call, if:

Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
X Press Roadside Assistance button :. continuously.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Customer Assistance Center. Benz Customer Assistance Center was
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance established.
button : flashes while the call is active. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
The multifunction display shows the network is not available, for example.
Connecting Call message. The audio The Call Failed message appears in the
output is muted. multifunction display.
If a connection can be made, the Call X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
Connected message appears in the multifunction steering wheel.
multifunction display. or
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception X Press the corresponding button for ending
are available, the system transfers data to the a phone call on the audio system or on
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, COMAND.
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle MB Info call button
RVehicle identification number
i The audio system or COMAND display

indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction X Press MB Info call button :.
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of Customer Assistance Center.
the problem (Y page 357).
The indicator lamp in MB Info call
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance button : flashes while the connection is
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- being made. The multifunction display
Z
354 Features
shows the Connecting Call message. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The audio system is muted. multifunction steering wheel.
If a connection can be made, the Call or
Connected message appears in the X Press the corresponding button for ending
multifunction display. a phone call on the audio system or on
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception COMAND.
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, Call priority
for example:
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

RCurrent location of the vehicle Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
RVehicle identification number call can still be initiated. In this case, an
i The audio system or COMAND display emergency call will take priority and override
indicates that a call is active. During the all other active calls.
call, you can change to the navigation menu The indicator lamp of the respective button
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, flashes until the call is ended.
for example. An emergency call can only be terminated by
Voice output is not available. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Center and the vehicle occupants. Rthe ~ button on the multifunction
You receive information about operating your steering wheel
vehicle, about the nearest authorized Rthe corresponding button on the audio
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other system or on COMAND for ending a
products and services from Mercedes-Benz. telephone call
USA only: you can find further information on i When a call is initiated, the audio system
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
http://www.mbusa.com. connected to COMAND. However, if you
i The system has not been able to initiate want to use your mobile phone, do so only
an MB Info call, if: when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
Rthe
location.
indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was Downloading destinations
established. Destination Download gives you access to a
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone data bank with over 15 million Points of
network is not available, for example. Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
The Call Failed message appears in the the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
multifunction display. know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to 20 way points.

Features 355
You are prompted to confirm route guidance Specifying and sending the destination
to the address entered. address
The system calculates the route and X Go to the website http://
subsequently starts the route guidance with www.maps.google.com and enter a
the address entered. destination address into the entry field.
X To send the destination address to the
i If you select No, the address can be saved
in the address book. e-mail address of your mbrace
account: click on the corresponding
i The destination download function is button on the website.

available if the relevant mobile phone i Example:
network is available and data transfer is
possible. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
i The destination download function can will be sent to your vehicle.
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
a navigation system.
Enter the e-mail address you specified
Route Assistance when setting up your mbrace account into
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS the corresponding field.
Package and cannot be purchased X Click "Send".
separately.
i Information on specific commands such
i You can also use the Route Assistance as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
function if your vehicle is not equipped with on the website.
a navigation system.
Calling up destination addresses
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave The destination address is loaded into the
your vehicle. vehicle's navigation system.
The customer service representative finds a A display message appears, asking
suitable route depending on your vehicle's whether navigation should be started.
current position and the desired destination. X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding
You will then be guided live through the XVY the COMAND controller and press
current route section. W to confirm.
The system calculates the route and
Search & Send subsequently starts the route guidance
with the address entered.
General notes
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle i If you select No, the address can be saved
must be equipped with mbrace and a in the address book.
navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace i If you have sent more than one
service subscription must be completed. destination address, each individual
"Search & Send" is a destination entry destination must be confirmed separately.
service. A destination address which is found i Destination addresses are loaded in the
on Google Maps® can be transferred via same order as the order in which they were
mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation sent.
system.
Z
356 Features
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz Vehicle remote closing

vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace
The remote closing feature can be used when
accounts:
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
If multiple vehicles are registered under the are no longer nearby.
same e-mail address, the destination will
The vehicle can then be locked by the
be sent to all the vehicles.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Vehicle remote opening The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you turned off. After this time, the remote closing
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
a replacement SmartKey is not available. 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- remotely.
Benz Customer Assistance Center. X Contact the following service hotlines:
The vehicle can be immediately opened RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
remotely within four days of the ignition being Assistance Center at
turned off. After this time, the remote 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
unlocking may be delayed by 15 to (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no RCanada: Customer Service at
longer be opened remotely. 1-888-923-8367
X Contact the following service hotlines: You will be asked for your password.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
Assistance Center at you switch on the ignition, the Doors
1-800-FOR-MERCedes Locked Remotely message appears in the
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 multifunction display.
RCanada: Customer Service at
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
1-888-923-8367 locked via:
You will be asked for your password.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
section
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Assistance Center.
Blackberry)
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
To do this, you will need your identification
opened via:
number and password.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section i The vehicle remote closing feature is
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
available when the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
Blackberry)
possible.
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network
is accessible.

Features 357
Stolen vehicle recovery service X Confirm the message with Yes.

X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
If your vehicle has been stolen:
start ignition message appears, turn
X Notify the police. the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
The police will issue a numbered incident lock (Y page 157).
report.
X When the Please follow the
X This number will be forwarded to the
instructions received by phone and
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance move your vehicle to a safe
Center together with your PIN. position. message appears, follow the

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance customer service representative's
Center then tries to locate the system. The instructions.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance The message in the display disappears.
Center contacts you and the local law
enforcement agency if the vehicle is If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
located. malfunction diagnosis is canceled
completely.
However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle. The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated activated. message.
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- When the diagnosis is completed, the Send
Benz Customer Assistance Center is vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice
automatically informed. connection may be//interrupted
during data transfer) message appears.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis The vehicle data can now be sent to the
With the vehicle remote malfunction Customer Assistance center.
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the X Press OK to confirm the message.
Customer Assistance center can provide The voice connection with the Customer
improved support for problems with your Assistance center is terminated.
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
is transferred to the Customer Assistance Transferring data... message.
center. The customer service representative The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
can use the received data to decide what kind Assistance center.
of assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized Depending on what the customer service
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle representative agreed with you, the voice
is called. connection is re-established after the transfer
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during is complete. If necessary, you will be
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, contacted at a later time by another means,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance e.g. by e-mail or phone.
center. You will see the Roadside Further functions of the vehicle remote
Assistance Connected message in the malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
Request for vehicle diagnosis the COMAND display shows a message
received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
Z
358 Features
about various special offers at your Speed alert

workshop.
You can define the upper speed limit, which
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
If this selected speed is exceeded by the
etc. If applicable, you will receive
vehicle, a message will be sent to the
information on special offers in the e-mail.
Customer Assistance center. The Customer
USA only: this information can also be Assistance center then forwards this
called up under "Owners Online" at http:// information to you.
www.mbusa.com.
You can select the way in which you receive
Information on the data stored in the vehicle this information beforehand. Possible options
(Y page 29). include text message, e-mail or an automated
Information on Roadside Assistance call.
(Y page 25). The data you receive contains the following
information:
Downloading routes
Rthe location where the speed limit was
Downloading routes allows you to transfer exceeded
and save predefined routes in the navigation Rthe time at which the speed limit was
system. To do this, an SD memory card must exceeded
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no Rthe selected speed limit which was
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
exceeded
the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving.
Geo fencing
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
mbrace portal on the Internet. the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
Each route can include up to 20 way points. be informed if the vehicle crosses the
Once a route has been received by the boundaries of the selected areas. You can
navigation system, you will see the <route select the way in which you receive this
name> has been saved to memory card. information beforehand. Possible options
Do you want to start route include text message, e-mail or an automated
guidance? message in the COMAND display. call.
The route is saved to the SD memory card. The area can be determined as either a circle
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas
An overview of the route is shown in the
simultaneously. Different settings are
display.
possible for each area.
i If you select No, the saved route can be
USA only: these settings can be called up
called up later via the navigation menu.
under "Owners Online" at http://
X Select Start. www.mbusa.com.
Route guidance is started. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
i Downloaded and saved data can be called and inform the customer service
up again in COMAND. representative that you wish to activate geo
fencing.
You can find further information in the
separate COMAND Operating Instructions. Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.

Features 359
Triggering the vehicle alarm opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
With this function, you can trigger the
vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An Alternatively, you can call the following
alarm sounds and the exterior lighting telephone assistance services:
flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, Assistance Center at
the alarm switches off. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100

Garage door opener RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
Important safety notes (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or
G WARNING compatible products is also available
When you operate or program the garage door online at http://www.homelink.com.
with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the i Notes on the declaration of conformity
garage door can become trapped or struck by (Y page 27).
the garage door. There is a risk of injury. USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
When using the integrated garage door Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage Programming
door.
Programming buttons
G WARNING Observe the "Important safety notes"
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust (Y page 359).
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener

integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that: Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
mirror
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Garage door remote control A is not part of
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
the integrated garage door opener.
When programming a garage door opener,
X The first time before programming, clear
park the vehicle outside the garage.
the integrated garage door opener memory
i Certain garage door drives are (Y page 361).
incompatible with the integrated garage X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
door opener. If you have difficulty ignition lock.
programming the integrated garage door
Z
360 Features
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on Synchronizing the rolling code

the integrated garage door opener. Observe the "Important safety notes"
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights (Y page 359).
up yellow. Your vehicle must be within reach of the
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
the first time. If the selected button has objects are present within the sweep of the
already been programmed, indicator door or gate.
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
seconds have elapsed. ignition lock.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator X Press the program button of the door or
lamp : flashes yellow. gate drive (see the door or gate drive
operating instructions, e.g. under
X Point garage door remote control A
"programming of additional remote
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view controls").
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
20 cm).
initiate the next step.
i The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
X Press previously programmed button ;,
opener depends on the garage door drive = or ? of the integrated garage door
system. Several attempts might be opener until the door closes.
necessary. You should test every position The rolling code synchronization is then
for at least 25 seconds before trying complete.
another position.
Notes on programming the remote
X Press and hold button B on remote control control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. Canadian radio frequency laws require a
If indicator lamp : lights up green or "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
flashes, then programming has been signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
successful. Therefore, these signals may not last long
X Release button B on remote control A for enough for the integrated garage door
the garage door drive system. opener. The signal is not recognized during
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also
the programming procedure for the
feature a "break".
corresponding button on the rear-view
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance Proceed as follows:
between remote control A and the rear- Rif you live in Canada
view mirror. Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
you live) when using the programming
successful programming, the garage door
steps
system is using a rolling code. After
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
view mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.

Features 361
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on same programming steps with this remote
the integrated garage door opener. control. Before performing these steps,
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights make sure that new batteries have been
up yellow. installed in garage door drive remote
X Release the button. control A.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RNote that some remote controls only
X Press button B of garage door remote transmit for a limited amount of time (the
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
control A for two seconds, then release it
out). Press button B on remote control
for two seconds.

A again before transmission ends.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
opener unit. This can improve signal
remote control A until indicator lamp : reception/transmission.
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the Opening/closing the garage door
process.
X Continue with the other programming
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
steps (see above).
the garage door system remote control.
Problems when programming Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of ignition lock.
the following instructions: X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage programmed to operate the garage door.
door drive remote control A. This can Garage door system with a fixed code:
usually be found on the back of the remote indicator lamp : lights up green.
control. Garage door system with a rolling code:
The integrated garage door opener is indicator lamp : flashes green.
compatible with devices that have units i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
which operate in the frequency range of long as the button is pressed. The
280to 433MHz. transmission is halted after a maximum of
RReplace the batteries in garage door ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
remote control A. This increases the up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
likelihood that garage door remote control if necessary.
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
to the integrated garage door opener in the Clearing the memory
rear-view mirror. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RWhen programming, hold remote control
ignition lock.
A at varying distances and angles from the X Press buttons ; and ?.
button that you are programming. Try
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
various angles at a distance between 2and
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances. indicator lamp turns green.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
Z
362 Features
i Make sure that you clear the memory of Infrared reflective windshield
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Floormats
G WARNING

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz
securely and as specified in order to ensure
range.
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on To enable operation of radio-controlled
top of one another. equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas
on the windshield are permeable to radio
waves :. In these areas, you can install
radio-controlled systems.
These areas can best be seen from outside
the vehicle by observing the light reflected off
the windshield.
Floormat on the driver's side (example)

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:
slide the respective seat back.
X Rear seats: slide the respective seat
forwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat from
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

363

Engine compartment ........................ 364
Maintenance ...................................... 368
Care .................................................... 370
Maintenance and care

364 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
equipment of your vehicle available at the again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
time of publication of the Operator's is a risk of injury.
Manual. Country-specific differences are If you need to do any work inside the engine
possible. Please note that your vehicle may compartment,
Rswitch off the ignition
related systems and functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
i Read the information on qualified such as the fan rotation area

specialist workshops: (Y page 28). Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
Engine compartment G WARNING

The ignition system and the fuel injection
Hood system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
Important safety notes could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
G WARNING injury.
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when Never touch components of the ignition
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. system or fuel injection system when the
There is a risk of an accident. ignition is switched on.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
Certain components in the engine
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
a risk of injury to persons within range of
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
movement of the hood.
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
Open and close the hood only when no one is poses a risk of injury.
within its range of movement.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
G WARNING
following.
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
G WARNING
engine compartment could expose you to hot
When the hood is open and the windshield
gases or other service products. There is a
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
risk of injury.
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
the ignition before opening the hood.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You

Engine compartment 365
could otherwise damage the windshield Radiator

wipers or the hood.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator, for example with a winter front
or bug cover. The readings of the on-board-
diagnostic system may otherwise be
inaccurate. Some of these readings are
required by law and must be accurate at all
times.
Engine oil

General notes
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
turned off.
consumes up to 0.9 US qts (0.8 l) of oil over
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
a distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil
The hood is released. consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
handle ; up and lift the hood. started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut. Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick
Closing the hood G WARNING
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height Certain components in the engine
of approximately 8 in (20 cm). compartment, such as the engine, radiator
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
poses a risk of injury.
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
following.
Z
366 Engine compartment
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful

to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide caused by the following:
tube. Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. not been specifically approved for the
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide service system
tube to the stop, and take it out again. Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
If the level is between MIN mark = and the interval for replacement specified by
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. the service system has been exceeded
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark Rusing engine oil additives.
= or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) engine ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
oil. engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
Adding engine oil excess engine oil siphoned off.
G WARNING
following.

Engine compartment 367
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot

coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
clockwise. Only check the coolant level when the
Ensure that the cap locks into place vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
securely. has cooled down.
X Check the oil level again with the oil X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
dipstick (Y page 365). ignition lock (Y page 157).

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Further information on engine oil Start/Stop button twice (Y page 158).
(Y page 448).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in
Additional service products The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
Checking coolant level X Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.
G WARNING
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
poses a risk of injury. remove it.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
touch only the components described in the = in the filler neck when cold, there is
following. enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
G WARNING If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
The engine cooling system is pressurized, (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
particularly when the engine is warm. When neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in expansion tank ;.
Z
368 Maintenance
X If necessary, add coolant that has been

tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 450).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system
G WARNING Example: washer fluid reservoir

following.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles
engine components or the exhaust system it X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Add the premixed washer fluid.
Make sure that no windshield washer X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the
recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display
prompting you to add washer fluid
(Y page 314).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 451).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).

Maintenance 369
You can obtain further information from an Displaying service messages

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
does not show any information on the X Press the 9 or : button to select the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
engine oil level (Y page 365).
pressing the a button.
The multifunction display shows a service The service due date appears in the
message for several seconds, e.g.: multifunction display.
RNext Service A in .. Days

RService A Due Information about Service
RService A Exceeded by ... Days
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
Depending on the operating conditions of the interval display
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed. ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
setting can be corrected at a qualified
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service. Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
You can obtain further information from an otherwise lead to increased wear and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. damage to the major assemblies or the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display vehicle.
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
disconnected. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Maintaining the time-dependent service after the service work has been carried out.
schedule: You can also obtain further information on
X Note down the service due date displayed maintenance work, for example.
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery. Special service requirements
or The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract account. Under arduous operating conditions
the battery disconnection periods from the or increased load on the vehicle,
service date shown on the display. maintenance work must be carried out more
frequently, for example:
Hiding a service message Rregular city driving with frequent
X Press the % or a button on the intermediate stops
steering wheel. Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Z
370 Care
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter retaining the quality in the long term.
replaced or changed more frequently. Under Use care products and cleaning agents
arduous operating conditions, the tires must recommended and approved by Mercedes-
be checked more often. Further information Benz.
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network Automatic car wash
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any G WARNING

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
Care carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
General notes
H Environmental note ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
automatically in certain situations. To
cloths in an environmentally responsible
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
manner.
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any the following or other similar situations:
of the following: Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rdry, Rin the car wash
rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Rsolvents Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rcleaning agents containing solvents cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective ! Make sure that:
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or are fully closed.
damage the surfaces and protective film. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended (the OFF button has been pressed).
period straight after cleaning it, particularly Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel 0.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
should drive for a few minutes after make sure that the automatic transmission
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and is in transmission position N, otherwise the
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. vehicle could be damaged.
The vehicle can then be parked. RVehicles with a SmartKey:

Care 371
Do not remove the SmartKey from the Observe the legal requirements in all
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's countries concerned.
door or front-passenger door when the X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the vehicle in direct sunlight.
automatic transmission selects park X Use a soft sponge to clean.
position P automatically and locks the
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
beforehand. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards
Do not open the driver's door or front-
the air inlets.

passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
transmission selects park position P sponge frequently.
automatically and locks the wheels. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
Observe the following to make sure that the thoroughly with a chamois.
automatic transmission stays in position N: X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
X Turn the SmartKey to position traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
2 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock. soon as possible.
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. Power washers
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
G WARNING
X Shift the automatic transmission to
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
position N. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
X Release the brake pedal. to the tires or chassis components.
X Release the electric parking brake. Components damaged in this way may fail
X Switch off the ignition and leave the unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
SmartKey in the ignition lock. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
tires or chassis components replaced
wash from the very start.
immediately.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Always maintain a distance of at least
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
wax from the windshield and the wiper power washer nozzle. Information about
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce the correct distance is available from the
wiping noises caused by residue on the equipment manufacturer.
windshield. Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following:
In some countries, washing by hand is only Rtires
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Z
372 Care
Rbattery Do not use these care products in the sun or

Rconnectors on the hood while the hood is hot.
Rlights X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Rseals Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
Rtrim
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Rventilation slots
Matte finish care
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
Cleaning the paintwork shine.
! Do not affix: ! The following may cause the paint to

Rstickers
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
Rfilms
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
materials.
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise RFrequent use of car washes.
damage the paintwork.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
inadequate care cannot always be completely polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified wax. These products are only suitable for
specialist workshop. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
with matte finish leads to considerable
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
Always have paintwork repairs performed
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, treatment under any circumstances.
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
lighter fluid. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. treatment.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products i The vehicle should preferably be washed
recommended and approved by Mercedes- by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
Benz. This is the case approximately every and plenty of water.
three to five months, depending on the
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
climate conditions and the care product used.
from the range of recommended and
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.

Care 373
Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning wiper blades
Cleaning the wheels G WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
to remove brake dust. This could damage
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
wheel bolts and brake components.
injury.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended Always switch off the windshield wipers and
period straight after cleaning it, particularly the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wiper blades.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,

brake pads/linings. For this reason, you the wiper blade could be damaged.
should drive for a few minutes after
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
graphite coating could be damaged. This
The vehicle can then be parked.
could cause wiper noise.
Cleaning the windows ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
G WARNING the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
You could become trapped by the windshield X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
the windshield.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
injury.
damp cloth.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades. before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Cleaning the exterior lighting
solvents or cleaning agents containing
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows cloths which are suitable for plastic light
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the windows. the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
windshield and the rear window at regular
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage Mirror turn signals
and damage to electronic components. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
X Clean the inside and outside of the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
product that is recommended and cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
approved by Mercedes-Benz. lenses of the mirror turn signals.
Z
374 Care
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn

signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
Information about the correct distance is camera lens :.

available from the equipment
manufacturer.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
product tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

X Clean sensors : of the driving systems H Environmental note
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area power washer. Do not use solvents.
around the rear view camera with a power
washer. ! Observe the note on care provided by the
trailer manufacturer.

Care 375
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that

it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a
commercially available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

! Never clean the camera lens. When
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it cleaning the field of vision of the driving

becomes dirty or corroded. systems, make sure that you do not spray
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the
e.g. with a wire brush. camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or specialist workshop.
a brush.
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball
coupling :.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
i You can also have the maintenance work
on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
carried out by a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Fold down the camera cover by recess :.

Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in
when cleaning. This could lead to front of camera ;.
irreparable damage to the display.
Z
376 Care
Cleaning the plastic trim mostly made of anodized aluminum and

can lose their shine if chrome polish is
G WARNING used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
Care products and cleaning agents containing when cleaning the trim pieces.
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
come loose in the event of air bag are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
deployment. There is a risk of injury. are chrome-plated or not, consult an
Do not use any care products and cleaning authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
agents to clean the cockpit.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
! Do not affix the following to plastic a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
surfaces: cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Rstickers
products recommended and approved by
Rfilms
Mercedes-Benz.
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic. Cleaning the seat covers
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
General notes
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
look of the surfaces. genuine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free damage the cover.
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning
i Note that regular care is essential to
products recommended and approved by ensure that the appearance and comfort of
Mercedes-Benz. the covers is retained over time.
The surface may change color temporarily. Genuine leather seat covers
Wait until the surface is dry again.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or instructions:
selector lever
RClean genuine leather covers carefully
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use with a damp cloth and then wipe the
leather care agents that have been covers down with a dry cloth.
recommended and approved by Mercedes- RMake sure that the leather does not
Benz. become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ROnly use leather care agents that have
elements been tested and approved by Mercedes-
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Benz. You can obtain these from a
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, qualified specialist workshop.
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk Leather is a natural product.
of damaging the surface. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. example:
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are

Care 377
RDifferences in the texture Cleaning the headliner and carpets

RSigns of stretching and marking
X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
RSlight nuances of color or dry shampoo.
These are characteristics of leather and not X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
material defects. cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) or
placing them in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Z
378

379

Where will I find...? ........................... 380
Flat tire .............................................. 381
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 385
Jump-starting .................................... 389
Towing and tow-starting .................. 391
Fuses .................................................. 394
Breakdown assistance

380 Where will I find...?
Useful information changing a wheel are specific to the

vehicle. For more information on which
i This Operator's Manual describes all tools are required to perform a wheel
models and all standard and optional change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
equipment of your vehicle available at the specialist workshop.
time of publication of the Operator's Tools required for changing a wheel may
Manual. Country-specific differences are include, for example:
possible. Please note that your vehicle may RJack
not be equipped with all features RWheel chock
RLug wrench
RRatchet wrench
RAlignment bolt
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Where will I find...?
First-aid kit
Vehicle tool kit (example)

: Lug wrench
; Jack
X Open the tailgate. = Alignment bolt
X Remove first-aid kit : from the parcel net.
? Tire inflation compressor
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid A Tire sealant filler bottle
kit at least once a year. Replace the
B Folding wheel chock
contents if necessary, and replace missing
items. C Towing eye
D Ratchet wrench
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 383).
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the
stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor.
i Apart from certain country-specific
variations, the vehicles are not equipped
with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for

Flat tire 381
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
spare wheel (Y page 179).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
make sure that highway level is selected
(Y page 207).
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
Example: vehicles with AIRMATIC and trailer tow The on-board electronics now have status
hitch 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
: Folding wheel chock been removed.
; Lug wrench X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
= Alignment bolt
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 158).
? Towing eye
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
A Jack Make sure that they are not endangered as
B Ratchet wrench they do so.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up X Make sure that no one is near the danger
(Y page 342). area while a wheel is being changed.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel (Y page 436). wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
Flat tire traffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.
Preparing the vehicle X Unload heavy luggage.
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
i Only operate the tire inflation compressor
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is
properties) (Y page 382) turned off (Y page 347).
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
vehicles with MOExtended tires. board voltage does not drop too low. If the
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 380) on-board voltage is too low, the power to
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain the sockets is automatically cut. This
countries) (Y page 436) ensures that there is sufficient power to
Information on changing/mounting a wheel start the engine.
(Y page 421).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

382 Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat You must not exceed a maximum speed of
properties) 50 mph (80 km/h).
General notes i When replacing one or all tires, make sure

that you use only tires:
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
characteristics), you can continue to drive
Rmarked "MOExtended"
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
tire must not show any clearly visible damage. replaced with a MOExtended tire, a
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the standard tire may be used as a temporary
MOExtended marking which appears on the measure. Make sure that you use the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking proper size and type (summer or winter
next to the tire size designation, the load- tire).
bearing capacity and the speed index i Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
(Y page 415). equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.

MOExtended tires may only be used in It is therefore recommended that you
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss additionally equip your vehicle with a
warning system or with an active tire pressure TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
monitor. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
If the pressure loss warning message A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a
appears in the multifunction display: qualified specialist workshop.
RObserve the instructions in the display
messages (Y page 310). Important safety notes
RCheck the tire for damage. G WARNING
RIf driving on, observe the following notes. When driving in emergency mode, the driving
The maximum driving distance is characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the cornering, accelerating quickly and when
vehicle is partially laden and approximately braking. There is a risk of an accident.
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
laden. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
distance possible depends upon: off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
Rspeed
vehicle.
Rroad
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
condition
Routside temperature Ryou hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased RESP® is intervening constantly.
through a moderate style of driving. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
The maximum permissible distance which After driving in emergency mode, have the
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
the moment the tire pressure loss warning workshop with regard to their further use. The
appears in the multifunction display. defective tire must be replaced in every case.

Flat tire 383
TIREFIT kit The tire inflation compressor can be

operated again once it has cooled down.
Using the TIREFIT kit
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
unable to provide sufficient breakdown TIREFIT can be used to seal small punctures
assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire of up to 0.16 inches (4 mm), particularly on
properly: the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures
or on a flat tire.
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes
irritation. It must not come into contact with TIREFIT sticker, 2-part
your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. X Do not remove any foreign objects which
Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
away from children. There is a risk of injury. nails.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the
observe the following: accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin inflation compressor from the stowage well
immediately with water. underneath the cargo compartment floor
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with (Y page 380).
your eyes, immediately rinse them X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
thoroughly with clean water. the driver's field of vision.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! Do not operate the tire inflation

compressor for longer than eight minutes
at a time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
Z
384 Flat tire
X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
of the housing. has not been attained after five minutes:
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire (Y page 384).
sealant bottle :. i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
X Place tire sealant bottle : head can then be removed like a layer of film.
downwards into recess ; of the tire If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
inflation compressor. have them cleaned with perchloroethylene
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been achieved after five minutes:
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty X Pump up the tire again.
tire. After a maximum of five minutes the tire
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket in
your vehicle. G WARNING
Observe the notes on sockets If the required tire pressure is not reached
(Y page 347). after the specified time, the tire is too badly
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
ignition lock (Y page 157). tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
compressor to I. characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
on. The tire is inflated.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to
approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Tire pressure reached
Do not switch off the tire inflation G WARNING
compressor during this phase. A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run impairs the driving characteristics and is not
for five minutes. The tire should then have suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa accident.
(1.8 bar/26 psi). You should therefore adapt your driving style
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
has been attained after five minutes: the specified maximum speed with a tire that
(Y page 384). has been repaired using tire sealant.

Battery (vehicle) 385
! Residue from the tire sealant may come placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
out of the filler hose after use. This could or tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap).
cause stains. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic the tire inflation compressor.
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)

has been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire. E Pressure release button
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire F Pressure gauge
inflation compressor.
X To reduce the tire pressure: press
X Pull away immediately.
pressure release button E on the filler
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with hose.
tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper
part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
to the instrument cluster in the driver's inflation compressor.
field of vision. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
X Stop after driving for approximately ten workshop and have the tire changed there.
minutes and check the tire pressure with X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
the tire inflation compressor. soon as possible at a qualified specialist
The tire pressure must now be at least workshop.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist
G WARNING workshop.
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
Battery (vehicle)
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly Important safety notes
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
Special tools and expert knowledge are
characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
required when working on the battery, e.g.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified removal and installing. You should therefore
specialist workshop. have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,
see the Tire and Loading Information
Z
386 Battery (vehicle)
G WARNING G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery During the charging process, a battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
lead to function restrictions applying to gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or connected battery does not come into
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The contact with vehicle parts.
operating safety of your vehicle may be RNever place metal objects or tools on a
restricted. You could lose control of the battery.
vehicle, for example: RIt is important that you observe the
Rbraking described order of the battery terminals
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver when connecting and disconnecting a
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not battery.

adapted to the road conditions RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
There is a risk of an accident. battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar connected.
incident, contact a qualified specialist RIt is particularly important to observe the
workshop immediately. Do not drive any described order when connecting and
further. You should have all work involving the disconnecting the jumper cables.
battery carried out at a qualified specialist RNever connect or disconnect the battery
workshop. terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
an explosion. over the battery. Keep children away from
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic water and seek medical attention.
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
Batteries contain dangerous
charging the battery as well as when jump-
substances. It is against the
starting.
law to dispose of them with
Always make sure that neither you nor the the household rubbish. They
battery is electrostatically charged. A build- must be collected separately
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for and recycled to protect the
example: environment.
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic Dispose of batteries in an
fibers environmentally friendly
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats manner. Take discharged
Rif you push or pull the battery across the batteries to a qualified
carpet or other synthetic materials specialist workshop or a
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth

Battery (vehicle) 387
special collection point for Wear suitable protective clothing,

used batteries. especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a Rinse any acid spills immediately
qualified specialist workshop. with clear water. Contact a
Observe the service intervals in the physician if necessary.
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified Wear eye protection.
specialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist Keep children away.
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, recommends that you only use batteries
electronic components, such as the which have been tested and approved for
alternator, may be damaged. your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These
Ryou first remove the negative terminal batteries provide increased impact
clamp and then the positive terminal protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. suffering acid burns should the battery be
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic damaged in the event of an accident.
system may be damaged. In order for the battery to achieve the
Rthe transmission is locked in position P maximum possible service life, it must always
after disconnecting the battery. The be sufficiently charged.
vehicle is secured against rolling away. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
You can then no longer move the vehicle. discharge over time if you do not use the
The battery and the cover of the positive vehicle. In this case, have the battery
terminal clamp must be installed securely disconnected at a qualified specialist
during operation. workshop. You can also charge the battery
Comply with safety precautions and take with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
protective measures when handling Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
batteries. for further information.
Risk of explosion. Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
Fire, open flames and smoking are specialist workshop if you wish to leave your
prohibited when handling the vehicle parked for a long period of time.
battery. Avoid creating sparks.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid vehicle and do not require any electrical
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
Z
388 Battery (vehicle)
little energy, thus conserving battery thawed-out battery checked at a qualified

power. specialist workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
Charging the battery approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. An
accessory battery charge unit specially
G WARNING
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
During charging and jump-starting, explosive tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
gases can escape from the battery. There is a available. It permits the charging of the
risk of an explosion. battery in its installed position. Contact an
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient information and availability. Charge the
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. battery in accordance with the separate
Do not lean over a battery. instructions for the battery charger.
The jump-starting connection point is in the

G WARNING engine compartment (Y page 389).
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Read the battery charger's operating
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. instructions before charging the battery.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean X Open the hood.
over the battery. Keep children away from
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention. terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
G WARNING battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 389).
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a

maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case
you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. The service life of a
thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired,
particularly at low temperatures. Have the

Jump-starting 389
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
390 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:

Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.

Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). On vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 158). All indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster must be off.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
(Example)
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.

Towing and tow-starting 391
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the
G WARNING permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
Rthe engine is not running. automatically in certain situations. To
Rthe brake system or the power steering is prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
malfunctioning. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply the following or other similar situations:
or the vehicle's electrical system. Rwhen towing the vehicle
If your vehicle is being towed, much more Rin the car wash
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
make sure that the steering moves freely.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
G WARNING towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- available. You could otherwise damage the
started is greater than the permissible gross vehicle.
weight of your vehicle: ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
Rthe towing eye could detach itself this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could recover the vehicle with a crane.
rollover.
Z
392 Towing and tow-starting
! When towing, pull away slowly and The battery must be connected and charged.
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, Otherwise, you:
the vehicles could be damaged. Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the ignition lock
use the key instead of the Start/Stop Rcannot release the electric parking brake
button. Otherwise, the automatic Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
transmission may shift to position P when position N
the driver's or front-passenger door are
opened, which could lead to damage to the i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
transmission. before the vehicle is towed (Y page 276).
You could otherwise be locked out when
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. pushing or towing the vehicle.
This could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make
sure the differential locks are in automatic Installing/removing the towing eye
mode. When towing, the differential locks Installing the towing eye
must not be switched on. The transmission
may otherwise be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight of your
vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 442).
It is better to have the vehicle transported Example: towing eye mounting covers
than to have it towed. : Front cover
If the vehicle has suffered transmission ; Back cover
damage, have it transported on a transporter
or trailer. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible,
connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch
The automatic transmission must be in (Y page 253).
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front
and at the rear, under the covers.

Towing and tow-starting 393
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle Towing a vehicle with both axles on
tool kit (Y page 380). the ground
X To open the cover at the front: press the
It is important that you observe the safety
mark on cover : inwards in the direction
instructions when towing away your vehicle
of the arrow. (Y page 391).
X To open the cover at the rear: insert a
The automatic transmission automatically
flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever shifts to position P when you open the driver's
cover ; out of the bumper. or front-passenger door or when you remove
X Take cover : or ; off the opening. the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the In order to ensure that the automatic
stop and tighten it. transmission stays in position N when towing
the vehicle, you must observe the following
Removing the towing eye points:
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in
X Attach cover : or ; to the bumper and
position 0.
press until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle (Y page 158).
raised
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
! The ignition must be switched off if you X Shift the automatic transmission to
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle position N.
raised. Intervention by ESP® could X Release the brake pedal.
otherwise damage the brake system.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Only possible for vehicles without X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
4MATIC.
ignition lock.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 124). (Y page 124).
i In order to signal a change of direction
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey when towing the vehicle with the hazard
from the ignition lock. warning lamps switched on, use the
X When leaving the vehicle, take the combination switch as usual. In this case,
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. only the indicator lamps for the direction of
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle travel flash. After resetting the
raised, it is important that you observe the combination switch, the hazard warning
safety instructions (Y page 391). lamp starts flashing again.
Transporting the vehicle

! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
Z
394 Fuses
axle or steering components. Otherwise, evenly as possible. Excessive tractive

the vehicle could be damaged. power could damage the vehicles.
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be If the drive wheels have become stuck in
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or loose or muddy ground, pull the vehicle out
transporter if you wish to transport it. with extreme caution, especially so if the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the vehicle is loaded.
ignition lock. Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a
X Shift the automatic transmission to trailer attached.
position N. Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible
using the tracks it made when it became
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
stuck.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
X Shift the automatic transmission to

position P. starting)
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ! Vehicles with an automatic transmission
ignition lock and remove it. must not be tow-started. You could
X Secure the vehicle. otherwise damage the automatic
transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
Information on 4MATIC vehicles at (Y page 389).
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission. Fuses
If the vehicle has transmission damage or Important safety notes
damage to the front or rear axle, have it
transported on a transporter or trailer. G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
In the event of damage to the electrical
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
system
amperage, the electric cables could be
If the battery is defective, the automatic overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
transmission will be locked in position P. To is a risk of an accident and injury.
shift the automatic transmission to position
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
new fuses having the correct amperage.
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 389). ! For the fuse boxes in the engine
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter compartment and under the rear bench
or trailer. seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S".
Otherwise, components or systems could
be damaged.
Recovering a vehicle that has become
stuck The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
! When recovering a vehicle that has components on the circuit and their functions
become stuck, pull it as smoothly and stop operating.

Fuses 395
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
the same rating, which you can recognize by is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
in the fuse allocation chart. the operation of the fuses.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Before changing a fuse

Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 394)
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 179). X To open: pull cover : outwards in the
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
direction of the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of
ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). the dashboard.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
the ignition is switched off (Y page 158).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box on the front-passenger side of the Pay attention to the important safety notes
dashboard (Y page 394).
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed fuse box when the cover is open.
in the direction of travel ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
RFuse box under the rear bench seat
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
box under the rear bench seat (Y page 396). the operation of the fuses.
Dashboard fuse box

Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 394)
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
dashboard. You could damage the
dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
Z
396 Fuses
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is seated
correctly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box
into the retainers. X Release clamps ; by pressing them in the
X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X Close the hood. X Fold cover = up in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located under
Fuse box under the rear bench seat cover =.
Pay attention to the important safety notes X To close: insert cover = into the retainers
(Y page 394). on the side of the fuse box.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the X Fold down cover = until clamps ; engage
fuse box when the cover is open. audibly.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture (Y page 335).
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses or the cover
could be damaged by the rear bench seat.
X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward
(Y page 335).
X To open: lift and fold out carpet : in the


397

Operation ........................................... 398
Winter operation ............................... 400
Tire pressure ..................................... 402
Loading the vehicle .......................... 409
All about wheels and tires ............... 413
Changing a wheel ............................. 421
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 426
Emergency spare wheel ................... 436
Wheels and tires

398 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and
i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics).
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your
Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
possible. Please note that your vehicle may being used correctly can impair operating
not be equipped with all features safety.
described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved
related systems and functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i Read the information on qualified workshop and inquire about:
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
(Y page 426).
the wheel brakes or suspension components
Information on air pressure for the tires on
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
your vehicle can be found:
accident.
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original Information placard on the B-pillar
part. (Y page 409)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct: flap (Y page 174)
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Operation

correct:
Rdesignation
Information on driving
Rmanufacturer If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
Rmodel
pressures and correct them if necessary.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
G WARNING noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you
steering and braking characteristics of the
suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
Tires without run-flat characteristics: as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your causing the unusual handling characteristics.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Operation 399
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 402).
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or Observe the notes on the emergency spare
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over wheel (Y page 436).
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try The service life of tires depends on the
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. following factors amongst other things:
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the RDrivingstyle
sidewalls, may be damaged.
RTirepressure
RDistance covered
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING Important safety notes on the tire
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation tread
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of G WARNING
accident. Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
and replace any damaged tires immediately. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
Wheels and tires

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your speed is not adapted to suit the driving
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as conditions. There is a risk of accident.
well as after driving off-road or on rough If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of may exhibit different levels of wear at
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
damage such as: should regularly check the tread depth and
Rcuts in the tires the condition of the tread across the entire
Rpunctures
width of all tires.
Rtears in the tires
Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rbulges on tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the For safety reasons, replace the tires before
condition of the tread across the whole width the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
of the tire (Y page 399). If necessary, turn tire tread depth is reached.
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Z
400 Winter operation
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
into the tire tread. a flat tire (Y page 382).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
tread. They are visible once the tread depth factory. It is therefore recommended that
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the you additionally equip your vehicle with a
case, the tire is so worn that it must be TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
replaced. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Winter operation
type and make. General notes
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 382). section (Y page 421).
Wheels and tires
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.
Driving with summer tires
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
RDo not drive with tires which have too little braking power. Change the tires on your
tread depth, as this significantly reduces vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). very cold temperatures could cause cracks to
RReplace the tires after six years at the
form, thereby damaging the tires
permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
latest, regardless of wear.
responsibility for this type of damage.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 436).
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING
properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
characteristics), you can continue to drive and do not provide sufficient traction. There
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of is a risk of an accident.
pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
MOExtended tires may only be used in in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of
Mercedes-Benz. tire are identified by the M+S marking.

Winter operation 401
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake if you have installed snow chains. The
symbol in addition to the M+S marking vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
provide the best possible grip in wintry road ! On some tire sizes there is not enough
conditions. space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
Only these tires will allow driving safety the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
systems such as ABS and ESP® to function tire combinations" section under "Tires and
optimally in winter. These tires have been wheels".
developed specifically for driving in snow.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on recommends that you only use snow chains
all wheels to maintain safe handling that have been specially approved for your
characteristics. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
Always observe the maximum permissible corresponding standard of quality.
speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please
mounted. bear the following points in mind:
Once the winter tires are mounted: ROnly use snow chains when driving on
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 405). roads completely covered by snow.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor Remove the snow chains as soon as
(Y page 406). possible when you come to a road that is
Wheels and tires

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire not snow-covered.
pressure loss warning system RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
(Y page 406). speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436). snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
Snow chains RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
G WARNING wheel-tire combinations (Y page 426).
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
body or chassis components. This could pulling away with snow chains installed
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. (Y page 72). This way you can allow the
There is a risk of an accident. wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
achieving an increased driving force
To avoid hazardous situations:
(cutting action).
Rnever install snow chains to the front
For more information on driving with an
wheels
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436).
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
! You must drive at raised vehicle level

(height 1) if snow chains have been
installed. The vehicle may otherwise be
damaged.
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping
System (ADS): do not use the sports mode
Z
402 Tire pressure
Tire pressure Operation with a trailer: the applicable

value for the rear tires is the maximum tire
Tire pressure specifications pressure value stated in the table inside the
fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be
G WARNING obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks: Tire and Loading Information placard
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
Wheels and tires
and check the pressure of all the tires : Recommended tire pressures
including the spare wheel:
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
Rmonthly, at least on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rif the load changes (Y page 409).
Rbefore beginning a long journey The Tire and Loading Information placard
Runder different operating conditions, e.g. contains the recommended tire pressures for
off-road driving cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
i The specifications on the sample Tire and speed.
Loading Information placard and tire
pressure tables are examples. Tire Tire pressure table
pressure specifications are vehicle-specific The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
and may deviate from the data shown here. fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure specifications that are
valid for your vehicle can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with the emergency spare
wheel(Y page 436).
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory

Tire pressure 403
The tire pressure table contains the i The tire pressures for increased loads
recommended pressures for cold tires for and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
various operating conditions, i.e. differing tire pressure table, may have a negative
load and speed conditions. effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
Wheels and tires

laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking.
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
seats may differ.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. your vehicle onto the tire valve.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
(Y page 415). does not permit any reliable conclusion about
If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring
road speeds, the pressures should be reset system, the tire pressure can be checked
to the higher values: using the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase
and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Z
404 Tire pressure
Therefore, you should only correct tire Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
pressures when the tires are cold. tires, including the spare wheel.
The tires are cold:
Rif
Underinflated tires may:
the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Roverheat, leading to tire defects
hours and Rhave an adverse effect on handling
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further characteristics
than 1 mile (1.6 km) Rwear quickly and unevenly
The tire temperature changes depending on Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature Overinflation
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ G WARNING
1.5 psi). Take this into account when Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
checking the pressure of warm tires. Only because they are damaged more easily by
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
current operating conditions. If you check the also suffer from irregular wear, which can
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the severely impair the braking properties and the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
Wheels and tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the accident.

tire pressure to the value specified for cold Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be tires, including the spare wheel.
too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may:
cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling
on the B-pillar on the driver's side characteristics
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of Rwear quickly and unevenly
the fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the Rbe more susceptible to damage
emergency/collapsible spare wheel
(depending on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures
Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire
pressure

Tire pressure 405
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the (Canada only)
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure General notes
(Y page 402). While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- pressure loss warning system monitors the
specific and may deviate from the values in set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the illustration. the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
Checking the tire pressures a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction
Important safety notes display.
Observe the notes on tire pressure You can recognize the tire pressure loss
(Y page 402). warning by the Run Flat Indicator
Information on air pressure for the tires on Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
your vehicle can be found: which appears in the Serv. menu of the
multifunction display. Information on the
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading message display can be found in the
Information placard loading information
Wheels and tires

"Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
table on the B-pillar (Y page 409) system" section (Y page 406).
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap Important safety notes
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
The tire pressure warning system does not
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 402)
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
Checking tire pressures manually pressure (Y page 402).
To determine and set the correct tire The tire pressure loss warning does not
pressure, proceed as follows: replace the need to regularly check the tire
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
be checked. tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
the recommended value on the Tire and
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
Loading Information placard (Y page 402).
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
abrupt steering maneuvers.
the recommended value.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
system is limited or delayed if:
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire tires.
pressure gauge. Rroad conditions are wintry.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Z
406 Tire pressure
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style If you wish to confirm the restart:
(cornering at high speeds or driving with X Press the a button.
high rates of acceleration).
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof). Yes.
Restarting the tire pressure loss
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system display.
if you have: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Rchanged the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set
Rchanged the wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires.
Rmounted new wheels or tires If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire X Press the % button.
pressures are set properly on all four tires or
for the respective operating conditions. X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
The recommended tire pressures can be
Wheels and tires
appears, use the 9 or : button to

found on the Tire and Loading Information
select Cancel.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure values stored at the last
The tire pressure loss warning system can restart will continue to be monitored.
only give reliable warnings if you have set
the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire
pressure is set, these incorrect values will Tire Pressure Monitor
be monitored. General notes
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 402). If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the
vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. pressure monitor only functions if the correct
X Press the 9 or : button to select sensors are installed on all wheels.
Tire Pressure. Information on tire pressures is displayed in
X Press the a button. the multifunction display. After a few minutes
The Run Flat Indicator Active of driving, the current tire pressure of each
Press 'OK' to Restart message tire is shown in the Service menu of the
appears in the multifunction display. multifunction display.

Tire pressure 407
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
Example: current tire pressure display
flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer remain continuously illuminated. This
to the "Checking the tire pressure sequence will be repeated every time the
electronically" section (Y page 408). vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
G WARNING
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of
when cold and inflated to the pressure incompatible replacement or alternate tires
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheels and tires

TPMS from functioning properly. Always
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
Information placard or the tire pressure label, continue to function properly.
you should determine the proper tire pressure
for those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire (Y page 402). Note that the correct tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your pressure for the current operating situation
tires are significantly underinflated. must first be taught-in to the tire pressure
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check pressure, the warning threshold for the
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate warning message is aligned to the reference
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. cold tires (Y page 409). The current
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency pressures are saved as new reference values.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's As a result, a warning message will appear if
handling and stopping ability. the tire pressure drops significantly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire the notes on the recommended tire pressure
pressure, even if underinflation has not (Y page 402).
reached the level to trigger illumination of the The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
Z
408 Tire pressure
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Checking the tire pressure

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the electronically
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
2(Y page 157) in the ignition lock.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. steering wheel to select the Service
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up menu.
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or X Press the 9 or : button to select
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Tire Pressure.
Rif X Press the a button.
the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is The current tire pressure of each tire is
significantly too low. The tire pressure shown in the multifunction display.
monitor is not malfunctioning. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
minute and then remains lit constantly, the displayed after driving a few
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. minutes message appears.
i In addition to the warning lamp, a After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
message appears in the multifunction monitor automatically detects new wheels or
Wheels and tires
display. new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of

the tire pressure value to the individual
Further information can be found on
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
(Y page 310).
Monitor Active display message is shown
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire pressures are already being monitored.
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
malfunction by flashing for approximately one i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
minute and then remaining lit. When the the system may continue to show the tire
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure of the wheel that has been
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
minutes of driving. note that the value displayed for the
position where the spare wheel is mounted
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
is not the same as the current tire pressure
board computer may differ from those
of the emergency spare wheel.
measured at a gas station with a pressure
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
board computer refer to those measured at
Tire pressure monitor warning
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
messages
values indicated by a pressure gauge are If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
higher than those shown by the on-board loss in one or more tires, a warning message
computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire is shown in the multifunction display and the
pressures. yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can comes on.
be affected by interference from radio RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio appears in the multifunction display, the
headphones, two-way radios) that may be tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
being operated in or near the vehicle.

Loading the vehicle 409
and must be corrected at the next X Press the = or ; button on the

opportunity. steering wheel to select the Service
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the menu.
multifunction display, the tire pressure in X Press the 9 or : button to select
one or more tires has dropped significantly Tire Pressure.
and the tires must be checked. X Press the a button.
RIf the Tire Malfunction appears in the
The multifunction display shows the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in current tire pressure for the individual tires
one or more tires has dropped suddenly or the Tire pressure will be
and the tires must be checked. displayed after driving a few
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are minutes message.
rotated, the tire pressures may be X Press the : button.
displayed for the wrong positions for a The Use Current Pressures as New
short time. This is rectified after a few Reference Values message appears in
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures the multifunction display.
are displayed for the correct positions.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Restarting the tire pressure monitor X Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
Wheels and tires

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, message appears in the multifunction
all existing warning messages are deleted and display.
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
After driving for a few minutes, the system
the currently set tire pressures as the
checks whether the current tire pressures
reference values for monitoring. In most
are within the specified range. The new tire
cases, the tire pressure monitor will
pressures are then accepted as reference
automatically detect the new reference
values and monitored.
values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also define If you wish to cancel the restart:
reference values manually as described here. X Press the % button.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the The tire pressure values stored at the last
new tire pressure values. restart will continue to be monitored.
X Set the tire pressure to the value
recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading Loading the vehicle
Information placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 402). Instruction labels for tires and loads
Additional tire pressure values for different G WARNING
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
(Y page 174).
steering and driving characteristics and lead
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
on all four wheels.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
2 in the ignition lock. your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Z
410 Loading the vehicle
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle
the maximum possible load. weight rating
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle Information placard: "The combined weight
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You of occupants and cargo should never
can also find information about the exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
Wheels and tires
front and rear axle.

load and luggage must not exceed the
The maximum gross axle weight rating is specified value.
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never i The specifications shown on the Tire and
exceed the maximum load or the Loading Information placard in the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the illustration are examples. The maximum
front or rear axle. permissible gross vehicle weight rating is
vehicle-specific and may differ from that in
the illustration. You can find the valid
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to

Loading the vehicle 411
travel in the vehicle. This information can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Wheels and tires

Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Z
412 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 409).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 253).
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants

All about wheels and tires 413
Step 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
(maximum gross Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading
carefully, you should still make sure that the Standards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading
be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards
Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 409).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data.
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear
grade, ; traction grade and = temperature
grade. These regulations do not apply to
Trailer load/noseweight Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North
America are provided with the corresponding
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
quality grading markings on the sidewall of
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the tire.
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The Where applicable, the tire grading
trailer load/noseweight is usually information can be found on the tire sidewall
approximately 8% of the gross weight of the between the tread shoulder and maximum
trailer and its cargo. tire width.
Z
414 All about wheels and tires
Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road
RTemperature grade: A
conditions when temperatures are around
All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 399). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified Further information on winter tires (M+S
U.S. government course. For example, a tire tires) (Y page 400).
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government test track as Temperature
Wheels and tires
a tire graded 100. G WARNING

The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is
upon the actual conditions of their use, established for a tire that is properly inflated
however, and may depart significantly from and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
the norm, due to variations in driving habits, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
service practices and differences in road separately or in combination, can cause
characteristics and climate conditions. excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Traction
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
G WARNING B, and C. These represent the tire's
The traction grade assigned to this tire is resistance to the generation of heat and its
based on straight-ahead braking traction ability to dissipate heat when tested under
tests, and does not include acceleration, controlled conditions on a specified indoor
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
characteristics. temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage excessive temperature can lead to sudden
to the drive train. tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the
specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor required by law.
traction performance.

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
Wheels and tires

? Rim diameter
(Y page 419) A Load bearing index
; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 418)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 417) General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 404)
may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 418) If there is no letter preceding the size
C Tire size designation, load-bearing description (as shown above): these are
capacity and speed index (Y page 415) passenger vehicle tires according to
D Load index (Y page 417) European manufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales
designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards.
deviate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing tire width in millimeters.
capacity and the approved maximum speed Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. size ratio between the tire height and tire
There is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent. The aspect
Z
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Index Speed rating

the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
specified load limit. The maximum in the size description, depending on the
Wheels and tires
permissible load can be found on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The service specification is made up of
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side load-bearing index A and speed rating
(Y page 409). B.
Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
bear. For further information on the maximum order to find out the maximum speed.
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the
(Y page 417). maximum speed is limited according to the
For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification.
index, see "Load index" (Y page 417). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
approved maximum speed of the tire. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.
The maximum speed of the tire is limited to
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may 186 mph (300 km/h).
deviate from the data in the example. RThe size description for all tires with
Regardless of the speed rating, always maximum speeds of over 186 mph
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the
adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in
conditions. parentheses. Example:
Summer tires 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
Index Speed rating tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
speed.
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating
Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load
also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify the speed index B on the
the requirements of the Rubber sidewall of the tire (Y page 415).
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents a standard
regarding the tire traction on snow. They load (SL) tire
Wheels and tires

have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
on snow. tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your RLight Load: represents a light load tire
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: RC, D, E: represents a load range that
Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): depends on the maximum load that the tire
130 mph (210 km/h) can carry at a certain pressure
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: deviate from the data in the example.
174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the Maximum load rating
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 426).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum

permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
2 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Z
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as a code to describe
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
(Y page 409).
A provides information about the age of a
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent
specific and may deviate from the values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire
2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or
retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and
other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire
possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in
the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used
of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number
Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Bar
For further information about retreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure.
see (Y page 426). 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
1 bar. the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire
the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for
Transportation. which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The number of occupants which the vehicle The GTW is the weight of a trailer including
is designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms the weight of the load, luggage, accessories
(150 lb). etc. on the trailer.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
government testing procedures. The ratings applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
Wheels and tires

as specified on the vehicle identification plate
Recommended tire pressure on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The Tire and Loading Information placard The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
contains the recommended tire pressures for weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the the vehicle including all accessories,
maximum permissible vehicle speed. occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
The tire pressure table contains the noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
recommended pressures for cold tires for weight rating is specified on the vehicle
various operating conditions, i.e. differing identification plate on the B-pillar on the
load and speed conditions. driver's side.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional Maximum loaded vehicle weight

equipment The maximum weight is the sum of:
This is the combined weight of all standard Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
and optional equipment available for the Rthe weight of the accessories
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually Rthe load limit
installed on the vehicle or not. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rim equipment
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Kilopascal (kPa)
is mounted.
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
rating. The actual load on an axle must never (kPa) to 1 bar.
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Z
Load index Cold tire pressure

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load The tires are cold:
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall Rif the vehicle has been parked without
of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
capacity more precisely. hours and
Curb weight Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
The weight of a vehicle with standard 1 mile (1.6 km).

equipment including the maximum capacity Tread
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
The part of the tire that comes into contact
conditioning system and optional equipment
with the road.
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
not include passengers or luggage. Bead
Maximum load rating The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
The maximum tire load is the maximum
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for
coming loose from the wheel rim.
which a tire is approved.
Sidewall
Maximum permissible tire pressure
The part of the tire between the tread and the
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one

bead.
tire.
Weight of optional extras
Maximum load on one tire
The combined weight of those optional extras
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
that weigh more than the replaced standard
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
by two.
These optional extras, such as high-
PSI (pounds per square inch) performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. or a high-performance battery, are not
included in the curb weight and the weight of
Aspect ratio the accessories.
Relationship between tire height and tire
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
width in percent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used
Tire pressure by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
This is pressure inside the tire applying an example for a product recall, and thus identify
outward force to each square inch of the tire's the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
surface. The tire pressure is specified in manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal type code and the manufacturing date.
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
Load bearing index
be corrected when the tires are cold.
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.

Changing a wheel 421
Traction Rotating the wheels

Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface. G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) severely impair the driving characteristics if
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow The wheel brakes or suspension components
hitch can support. may also be damaged. There is a risk of
accident.
Treadwear indicators
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are and tires are of the same dimensions.
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
(1.6 mm) has been reached. monitor, electronic components are
located in the wheel.
Occupant distribution
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
near the valve. This could damage the
their designated seating positions.
electronic components.
Total load limit Only have tires changed at a qualified
Wheels and tires

Rated cargo and luggage load plus specialist workshop.
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the Always observe the instructions and safety
number of seats in the vehicle. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 422).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Changing a wheel differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Flat tire Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
You can find information on what to do in the wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown in the center.
assistance" section (Y page 381).
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Information on driving with MOExtended tires
can rotate the wheels according to the
in the event of a flat tire can be found under
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
book in your vehicle documents. If no
characteristics" (Y page 382).
warranty book is available, the tires should be
The "Breakdown assistance" section rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
(Y page 381) contains information and notes 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on not change the direction of wheel rotation.
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if
(Y page 382).
necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
Vehicles with an emergency spare warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount the
emergency spare wheel according to the
description under "Mounting a wheel"
(Y page 422).
Z
422 Changing a wheel
Direction of rotation X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

make sure that highway level is selected
Tires with a specified direction of rotation (Y page 207).
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
observed. the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation. driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
Storing wheels been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
(Y page 158).
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
Cleaning the wheels vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
G WARNING away.
Wheels and tires
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage i Apart from certain country-specific
to the tires or chassis components. variations, vehicles are not equipped with
Components damaged in this way may fail a tire-change tool kit. For information on
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult an
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced Necessary wheel-changing tools can
immediately. include, for example:
Rjack
Rwheel chock
Mounting a wheel Rlug wrench
Preparing the vehicle

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: rolling away
when mounting the emergency spare
wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the
additional notes on vehicle preparation
under "Flat tire" (Y page 381).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Unload heavy luggage.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, Raising the vehicle

it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 380). G WARNING
The folding wheel chock is an additional If you do not position the jack correctly at the
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
rolling away, for example when changing a jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
wheel. There is a risk of injury.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
X Fold out lower plate ;.
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into under the jacking point of the vehicle.
the openings in base plate =.
! AMG vehicles with "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel: use the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel only
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the
brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an
Wheels and tires

intact wheel from the rear axle must first
be replaced with the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel. The defective
Securing the vehicle on level ground wheel on the front axle can then be
replaced with the intact wheel from the rear
X On level ground: place chocks or other
axle.
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the Make sure to note the placard on the
wheel you wish to change. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
X On light downhill gradients: place
is being changed. It is not suited for
chocks or other suitable items in front of
performing maintenance work under the
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Z
424 Changing a wheel
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the The jacking points are located just behind the
jack will not be able to achieve its load- front wheel housings and just in front of the
bearing capacity due to the restricted rear wheel housings (arrows).
height. X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
Rmake sure that the distance between the tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
underside of the tires and the ground does the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
Wheels and tires
raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
; Jacking points
= Jack
? Crank
X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
The alignment bolt on the jack must be
inserted into the intended jacking point
hole.
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
Example damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
beneath the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits G WARNING
completely on jacking point ; and the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
over. There is a risk of injury.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
Wheels and tires

when the vehicle is on the ground.
ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
Removing a wheel the wheel securely against the wheel hub
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub Always pay attention to the instructions and
threads could otherwise be damaged when safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
you screw them in. section (Y page 421).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel could damage the
brake system.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt
completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
Z
426 Wheel and tire combinations
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
factory nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare visible.
wheel X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
Wheels and tires
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque

must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-
change tool kit in the stowage well under
the cargo compartment floor again.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check the tire pressure of the newly
surfaces. installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the Observe the recommended tire pressure
alignment bolt and push it on. (Y page 402).
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
finger-tight.
wheels mounted must be equipped with
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
functioning sensors.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
Wheel and tire combinations
Lowering the vehicle
General notes
G WARNING ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts recommends that you only use tires and
and bolts are not tightened to the specified wheels which have been approved by
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your
Have the tightening torque immediately vehicle.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.

Wheel and tire combinations 427
These tires have been specially adapted for The recommended pressures for various
use with the control systems, such as ABS operating conditions can be found:
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original with the recommended tire pressures on
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended the B-pillar on the driver's side
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics) Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only the fuel filler flap
certain AMG tires) Observe the notes on recommended tire
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires pressures under various operating conditions
may only be used on wheels that have been (Y page 402).
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
Only use tires, wheels or accessories the tires are cold. Comply with the
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. maintenance recommendations of the tire
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
vehicle noise emissions or fuel Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
consumption, may otherwise be adversely equip the vehicle with:
affected. In addition, when driving with a Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
load, tire dimension variations could cause right)
the tires to come into contact with the
Wheels and tires

Rthe same type of tires at a given time
bodywork and axle components. This could
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
tires)
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
damage resulting from the use of tires,
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
wheels or accessories other than those
is therefore recommended that you
tested and approved.
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
Information on tires, wheels and approved kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
combinations can be obtained from any flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
qualified specialist workshop. may be obtained from a qualified specialist
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor workshop.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
previous damage cannot always be available at the factory for all countries.
detected on retreaded tires. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle i On the following pages, you can find
safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do information on approved wheel rims and
not mount used tires if you have no tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
information about their previous usage. winter tires. Winter tires are not available
at the factory as standard equipment or
Overview of abbreviations used in the optional extras.
following tire tables:
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
RBA: both axles approved winter tires, you may also, in
RFA: front axle certain circumstances, require rims of the
RRA: rear axle appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
Z
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further

information, can be obtained at a qualified
Wheels and tires

Tires
ML 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 V BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 255/50 R 19 103 W3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 104 Y3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/40 R 21 105 Y XL4, 5, 6 BA: 9.0 J x 21 H2
3 Also available as MOExtended tires.

4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
5 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.
6 Only for vehicles with air suspension.
Z
All-weather tires
R 17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/65 R 17 104 H M+S BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Winter tires
R 17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/65 R 17 104 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 62
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 56
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 59
ML 350
All-weather tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2

4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
Wheels and tires

Winter tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2

7 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z
ML 350 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
Winter tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2


R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2

All-weather tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires

R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2

Z
Winter tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
ML 550 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2


Winter tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
Wheels and tires

BA: 265/45 ZR 20 108 Y XL7 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 ZR 21 107 Y XL7 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2
Winter tires
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/45 R 20 105 V XL M+Si BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 R 21 107 V XL M+Si7 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2

Z
436 Emergency spare wheel
Emergency spare wheel Snow chains must not be mounted on

emergency spare wheels.
G WARNING
General notes
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel Mounting the emergency spare wheel is
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. described under "Mounting a wheel"
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may (Y page 422).
severely impair the driving characteristics. You should regularly check the pressure of
There is a risk of an accident. the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
To avoid hazardous situations: to long trips, and correct the pressure as
Radapt
necessary (Y page 402). The value on the
your driving style accordingly and
wheel or as given in the "Wheels and tires"
drive carefully.
section is valid (Y page 438).
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
An emergency spare wheel may also be
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
wheel of a different size briefly. the speed limitation specified on the
Rdo not switch ESP® off. emergency spare wheel.
Wheels and tires
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
wheel of a different size replaced at the regardless of wear. This also applies to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop. emergency spare wheel.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
! AMG vehicles with "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel: use the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel only
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the
brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an
intact wheel from the rear axle must first
be replaced with the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel. The defective
wheel on the front axle can then be Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle without
replaced with the intact wheel from the rear lockable cargo compartment floor)
axle. : "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Make sure to note the placard on the ; Emergency spare wheel retainer
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can
When using an emergency spare wheel or be found in the stowage well under the cargo
spare wheel of a different size, you must not compartment floor.
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).

Emergency spare wheel 437
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up In vehicles with the Bang & Olufsen sound
(Y page 342). system, the "Minispare" emergency spare
X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: remove wheel is packed in the emergency spare
the ball coupling stowage tray wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag
(Y page 255). is attached to the cargo tie down rings in the
X Vehicles without a lockable cargo cargo compartment.
compartment floor: turn emergency X To remove the emergency spare
spare wheel retainer ; counter-clockwise wheel: open the tailgate.
and remove it. X Detach securing straps ;.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and =
wheel :. of securing straps ; from the cargo tie
down rings.
X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag
with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Wheels and tires

X To stow the emergency spare wheel:
place the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag
Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartment floor and close the bag.
: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel X Use the carrying strap to move the
; Stowage well emergency spare wheel bag with the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
X Vehicles with a lockable cargo towards the back of the cargo
compartment floor: remove the contents compartment.
of stowage tray ;. X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of
X Turn the central retaining screw of stowage securing straps ; onto the cargo tie down
tray ; and "Minispare" emergency spare rings.
wheel : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Tighten securing straps ;.
X Remove stowage well ;.
Always observe the instructions and safety
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
wheel :. (Y page 422).
Z
438 Emergency spare wheel
Technical data
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
ML 350
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2
ML 350 4MATIC
Wheels and tires

Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2

Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2
ML 550 4MATIC
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/80 R19 114 M 4.5 B x 19 H2

Emergency spare wheel 439
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/80 R19 114 M 4.5 B x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
Z
440

441

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 442
Warranty ............................................ 442
Identification plates ......................... 442
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 444
Vehicle data ...................................... 452
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 454
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 455
Technical data

442 Identification plates
Useful information Warranty
i This Operator's Manual describes all Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
models and all standard and optional warranties printed in the Service and
equipment of your vehicle available at the Warranty Information booklet.
time of publication of the Operator's Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Manual. Country-specific differences are replace and repair all factory-installed parts
possible. Please note that your vehicle may in accordance with the following warranty
not be equipped with all features terms and conditions:
described. This also applies to safety- RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
i Read the information on qualified REmission Performance Warranty
specialist workshops: (Y page 28). RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Information regarding technical data
Control System Warranty
General information RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
i The data stated here specifically refers to Laws)

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult Replacement parts and accessories are
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
the data for all vehicle variants and trim Accessories warranties. These are available
levels. at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Technical data
i If you lose the Service and Warranty

Information booklet, contact an authorized
Information in the printed Operator's Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
Manual replacement. It will be mailed to you.
In the printed Operator's Manual you can find
information about:
RVehicle
Identification plates
data
RTailgate opening dimensions Vehicle identification plate with
RTank capacity vehicle identification number (VIN)
RCoolant (engine)
REngine oil approval and capacity
RDEF filling capacity
RRefrigerant filling capacity and PAG oil
RTowing a trailer
ROff-road driving (fording depth, approach/
departure angle)
X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Identification plates 443
VIN
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

; Paint code
= VIN
X Open the front right-hand door.
X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
You will see the VIN.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 443)
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 442)
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
Engine number
; Paint code
= VIN
i The data shown on the vehicle

identification plate is used only as an
example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's
identification plate.
: Emission control information plate,

including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

444 Service products and filling capacities
Service products and filling Other designations or recommendations

capacities indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
Important safety notes MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Fuel
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels Important safety notes
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
G WARNING
containers. Always keep service products out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
of the reach of children. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
H Environmental note You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
Dispose of service products in an sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
environmentally responsible manner. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
Service products include the following:
RFuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)
G WARNING
RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
DEF
Technical data
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
RCoolant
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
RBrake fluid vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
RWindshield washer fluid If you or others come into contact with fuel,
RClimate control system refrigerant observe the following:
Comply with all valid regulations with respect RWash away fuel from skin immediately
to handling, storing, and disposing of service using soap and water.
fluids. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Components and service products must be immediately rinse them thoroughly with
matched. You should therefore only use clean water. Seek medical assistance
products that have been tested and approved without delay.
by Mercedes-Benz. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
Information on tested and approved products assistance without delay. Do not induce
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- vomiting.
Benz Center or on the Internet at RImmediately change out of clothing which
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. has come into contact with fuel.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Service products and filling capacities 445
Tank capacity Do not mix such fuels with the fuel

recommended for your vehicle. Do not use
Model Total additives. This can otherwise lead to engine
capacity damage. This does not include cleaning
additives for the removal and prevention of
All models 24.6 US gal
residue build-up. gasoline may only be
(93.0 l)
mixed with cleaning additives
recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see
Model Of which "Additives". You can obtain further
reserve information from any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC Approx.
3.7 US gal ! To ensure the longevity and full
(14.0 l) performance of the engine, only premium-
grade unleaded gasoline must be used.
All other models Approx. If standard premium-grade unleaded
3.2 US gal gasoline is unavailable and unleaded
(12.0 l) gasoline of a lower grade is used for
refueling, observe the following
Gasoline precautions:
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
Fuel grade
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
Technical data
as soon as possible.
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the speeds above 3000 rpm.
fuel system and the engine. Notify a Rnever refuel using fuel with an octane
qualified specialist workshop and have the number lower than 87. Otherwise,
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. engine failure could occur.
! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
a minimum octane rating of 91. permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded
gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be
! Only use the fuel recommended. used.
Operating the vehicle with other fuels can
You will usually find information about the fuel
lead to engine failure.
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
! Do not use the following: label on the pump, ask the staff for
RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) assistance.
RE100 (100% ethanol) i For further information, consult a
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) qualified specialist workshop or on the
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol) Information on refueling (Y page 174).
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Z
Additives gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may

! Operating the engine with fuel additives otherwise result in damage to the fuel
added later can lead to engine failure. Do system and engine.
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does You will usually find information about the fuel
not include additives for the removal and grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline label on the pump, ask the staff for
must only be mixed with additives assistance.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply
with the instructions for use on the product i For further information, consult a
label. More information about qualified specialist workshop or on the
recommended additives can be obtained Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz only).
Center. Information on refueling (Y page 174).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl ester)
fuel brands that have the additives.
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-
The quality of the fuel available in some diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The
countries may not be sufficient. Residue concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may
could build up as a result. In such cases, and not exceed 5% by volume.
in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-
Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher
Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with
percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can
the cleaning additive recommended by
damage the engine and the fuel system. For
Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).
this reason, they are not approved.
You must observe the notes and mixing ratios
Technical data
specified on the container. For more information, consult the gas station
staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline
pump must clearly state that the standard for
Diesel
ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not
Fuel grade clear, do not refuel the vehicle.
Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless
G WARNING
they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
Information on refueling (Y page 174).
When the engine is running, exhaust system Low outside temperatures
components could overheat without being i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
properties is available during the winter
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline months. Further information about fuel
with diesel fuel. properties can be obtained from oil
companies, e.g. at gas stations.
! Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, Flow improver
15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that To improve the low-temperature resistance of
meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached.
not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the The effectiveness of a flow improver is not
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment guaranteed for every fuel.
system of the vehicle. Only use flow improvers tested and approved
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with by Mercedes-Benz. During use, please
a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with observe the information on operation.

Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are RIffuel is swallowed, seek medical
decisive in improving low-temperature assistance without delay. Do not induce
resistance with the flow improver. vomiting.
Overdosage can potentially even decrease RImmediately change out of clothing which
low-temperature resistance and must has come into contact with fuel.
therefore be avoided. Follow the
manufacturer's guidelines on dosage. Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the
Mix the additive into the diesel in good time, following fuel types:
before the flow characteristics of the diesel Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline
become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions RE85 fuel
can arise through heating the fuel system,
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
e.g. through parking in a heated garage.
unleaded gasoline
More information about recommended flow
improvers can be obtained from any qualified i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
specialist workshop. by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
Flexible Fuel vehicles
Fuel consumption
Important safety notes The energy content of E85 fuel is less than
G WARNING that of the same amount of premium-grade
gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
therefore higher than with premium-grade
explosion.
Technical data
gasoline.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Maintenance
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz
refueling. Center that you are operating or have
operated the vehicle with E85 fuel.
G WARNING
Low outside temperatures
There is a risk of injury. If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡
(0 †) the starting procedure can take
noticeably longer when operating with E85
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside
temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately DEF
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, Important safety notes
immediately rinse them thoroughly with Comply with the important safety notes for
clean water. Seek medical assistance service products when handling DEF
without delay. (Y page 444).
Z
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: aftertreatment system.
Rnot poisonous If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.
Rcolorless and odorless during repair work, it must not be returned to
Rnot flammable
the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer
be guaranteed.
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Filling capacities
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous Model Total capacity
membranes and to the eyes. You may
experience a burning sensation in your eyes, ML 250 BlueTEC 7.3 US gal
nose and throat. Coughing and watering of 4MATIC (27.5 l)
the eyes are possible. ML 350 BlueTEC 4MAT
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF IC
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures Engine oil

DEF freezes at a temperature of General notes
approximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
delivered from the factory equipped with a
specification other than is necessary to
DEF preheating system. Winter operation can
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
thus be guaranteed even at temperatures
Technical data
not change the engine oil or oil filter in

below 12 ‡ (-11 †).
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. You could
Additives otherwise cause engine damage or damage
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and Follow the instructions in the service
do not dilute DEF with water. This may interval display regarding the oil change.
destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
aftertreatment system. the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Comply with the important safety notes for
Purity service products when handling engine oil
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other (Y page 444).
service products, cleaning agents or dust) The engine oils are matched to the
lead to: performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
Rincreased
service intervals. You should therefore only
emission values
use engine oils and oil filters that are
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
approved for vehicles with maintenance
Rengine damage systems.
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
aftertreatment system consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly Center. Or visit the website
important with respect to avoiding http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been Additives

approved for your vehicle.
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
Model Engine MB This could damage the engine.
model Approval
Engine oil viscosity
ML 250 BlueTEC 651 228.51,
4MATIC 229.31,
229.51
ML 350 276 229.5
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350 BlueTEC 642 228.51,
4MATIC 229.31,
229.51
ML 550 4MATIC 278 229.5
ML 63 AMG 157 229.5 Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
4MATIC of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
i MB approval is indicated on the oil means that it is thin.
containers. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
Technical data
Filling capacities temperatures. The table shows you which
The following values refer to an oil change SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
including the oil filter. temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
Missing values were not available at time of
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
going to print.
strongly recommended that you carry out
Model Capacity regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
ML 250 BlueTEC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
4MATIC
ML 350
Brake fluid
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
ML 350 4MATIC G WARNING
ML 350 BlueTEC 4 The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
MATIC from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
ML 550 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
ML 63 AMG Without external oil hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
4MATIC cooler: 9.0 US qt There is a risk of an accident.
(8.5 l)
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Z
Comply with the important safety notes for Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
service products when handling brake fluid sufficiently protected from corrosion and
(Y page 444). overheating.
The brake fluid change intervals can be found i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
in the Maintenance Booklet. qualified specialist workshop and the
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Booklet.
Information about approved brake fluid can Comply with the important safety precautions
be obtained at any qualified specialist for service products when handling coolant
workshop or on the Internet at (Y page 444).
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The coolant is a mixture of water and
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
a qualified specialist workshop and the the following tasks:
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Rcorrosion protection
Booklet. Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
Coolant If the coolant has antifreeze protection down

to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
Important safety notes coolant during operation is approximately
266 ‡ (130 †).
G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
Technical data
components in the engine compartment, it

concentration in the engine cooling system
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not cooling system against freezing down to
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
clean the antifreeze from components before Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
starting the engine. down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
with the desired antifreeze protection. You amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
could otherwise damage the engine. inhibitor.
Further information on coolants can be Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
for Service Products, MB Specifications for accordance with
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
contact a qualified specialist workshop. filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, protection.
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail. i The coolant is checked with every
maintenance interval at a qualified

Filling capacities At temperatures above freezing:

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
Model Capacity
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
ML 250 BlueTEC Approx. 10.7 US qt MB SummerFit.
4MATIC (10.1 l) Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
ML 350 Approx. 11.1 US qt At temperatures below freezing:
ML 350 4MATIC (10.5 l) X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
ML 350 BlueTEC 4 Approx. 12.2 US qt
WinterFit.
MATIC (11.5 l)
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
ML 550 4MATIC Approx. 11.6 US qt temperature.
(11.0 l) RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
ML 63 AMG Approx. 12.5 US qt WinterFit to 2 parts water.
4MATIC (11.8 l) RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze. WinterFit to 1 part water.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
Windshield washer system fluid all year round.
Technical data
G WARNING Climate control system refrigerant
Windshield washer concentrate is highly Important safety notes
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it The climate control system of your vehicle is
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. filled with refrigerant R-134a.
Make sure that no windshield washer The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to ! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
level sensor may be damaged. used. The approved PAG oil may not be
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
washer fluid should be mixed together. The approved for R-134a refrigerant.
spray nozzles may otherwise become Otherwise, the climate control system may
blocked. be damaged.
When handling washer fluid, observe the Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
important safety notes on service products or replacing components, may only be carried
(Y page 444). out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Z
452 Vehicle data
Always have work on the climate control Vehicle data

system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
Refrigerant instruction label data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Observe the information relating to level
control:
Example: refrigerant instruction label
RAIRMATIC
package (Y page 209)
: Warning symbol
RON&OFFROAD package (Y page 202)
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable SAE standards
? PAG oil part number Dimensions and weights
A Type of refrigerant
Technical data
Warning symbols : indicate:

Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
ML 350 Capacity
Refrigerant 1050 ± 10 g (37.0 ±
0.4 oz)
PAG oil
All other models Capacity

Refrigerant
PAG oil

Vehicle data 453
Models with: : ; All models (except for

Opening Maximum AMG vehicles)
height headroom
Maximum ground 8.0 in
Steel 86.4 in 78.2 in clearance (steel (202 mm)
suspension (2195 mm) (1987 mm) suspension)
AIRMATIC 84.3 in - 76.0 in - Maximum ground 10.0 in

package 87.2 in 79.0 in clearance (AIRMATIC (255 mm)
(2140 mm - (1931 mm - package)
2215 mm) 2006 mm) Maximum ground 11.2 in
ON&OFFROAD 84.3 in - 76.0 in - clearance (ON&OFFROAD (285 mm)
package 88.4 in 80.2 in package)
(2140 mm - (1931 mm - Minimum ground 7.1 in
2245 mm) 2036 mm) clearance (180 mm)
(AIRMATIC package)
: ; (ON&OFFROAD package)
Opening Maximum Turning radius 38.7 ft
height headroom (11.80 m)
AMG vehicles 84.6 in - 76.5 in - Maximum roof load 220 lb
87.0 in 78.9 in (100 kg)
Technical data
(2148 mm - (1943 mm -
2211 mm) 2004 mm)
Model Vehicle
length
All models (except for
AMG vehicles) ML 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 189.1 in
ML 350 (4804 mm)
Vehicle width including 84.3 in
ML 350 4MATIC
exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 70.7 in
(steel suspension) (1796 mm) ML 550 4MATIC 190.5 in
(4839 mm)
(AIRMATIC package) (1818 mm)
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC
(ON&OFFROAD package) Vehicle length 189.6 in
(1848 mm) (4817 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 69.2 in Vehicle width including 84.3 in
(highway driving level) (1758 mm) exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
Wheelbase 114.8 in Maximum vehicle height 71.4 in
(2915 mm) (1815 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 69.0 in
(1752 mm)
Z
454 Vehicle data for off-road driving
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC Approach/departure angle

Wheelbase 114.8 in
(2915 mm)
Maximum ground 9.2 in
clearance (233 mm)
Minimum ground 6.8 in
clearance (172 mm)
Turning radius 38.7 ft
(11.80 m)
Maximum roof load 220 lb All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG
(100 kg) bodystyling)
: ;
Vehicle data for off-road driving Steel-sprung 26° 25°
Fording depth vehicles
Vehicles with the
AIRMATIC
package
Technical data
Highway level 23° 23°

Raised level 30° 28°
Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD
package
: Fording depth
Off-road level 1 26° 25°
Fording
depth Off-road level 2 30° 28°
Steel-sprung vehicles 20 in Off-road level 3 31° 29°
(50 cm)
AMG vehicles
Vehicles with the
Highway level (in 19° 21°
AIRMATIC package and
sports mode with
AMG vehicles
the AMG adaptive
Raised level 20 in suspension system
(50 cm) activated)
Raised level 23° 24°
For more information about off-road fording,
see (Y page 186).

Trailer tow hitch 455
Vehicles with AMG bodystyling wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased, making it easier to drive off.
: ;
For further information about the maximum
Steel-sprung 25° 25° gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 191).
vehicles
Vehicles with the Trailer tow hitch
AIRMATIC
package Mounting dimensions
Highway level 22° 22° ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the cooling system and drive
Raised level 28° 27° train may be necessary, depending on the
Vehicles with the vehicle type.
ON&OFFROAD If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
package observe the anchorage points on the
chassis frame.
Technical data
For further information about approach/
departure angles, see (Y page 190).
Maximum gradient-climbing
capability
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing
capability depends on the off-road conditions
and the road surface conditions.
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
package: the maximum gradient climbing (example)
ability is 100% when the LOW RANGE off-road : Anchorage points
gear is selected. ; Rear axle center line
Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD
package: the maximum gradient climbing
ability is 80%.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep
terrain.
i If the load on the front axle is reduced
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
4ETS recognizes this and brakes the
Z
456 Trailer tow hitch
Trailer loads
Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
ML 350 4MATIC and ML 550 4MATIC
Permissible trailer load, unbraked
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a 7198 lbs (3265 kg)
minimum gradient-climbing capability of
12% from a standstill)
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the 575 lbs (261 kg)
drawbar noseweight is not included in
the trailer load)
Permissible rear axle load when towing 3527 lbs (1600 kg)
a trailer

Technical data

the trailer load)
a trailer
ML 350
the trailer load)
a trailer

Trailer tow hitch 457

the trailer load)
a trailer
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC
Technical data
the trailer load)
a trailer
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the
trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Ball position When choosing a ball coupling, the

dimensions stated in the illustration must not
be exceeded.
Ball position of the ball coupling
Z
458

459

460

Mclass

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mclass

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M-Class

Order no. 6515 0459 13 Part no. 1665847681 Edition A 2014

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119

Climate control ................................. 137

Driving and parking .......................... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 261

Stowage and features ...................... 331

Maintenance and care ...................... 363

Breakdown assistance ..................... 379

Wheels and tires ............................... 397

Technical data ................................... 441

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AMG adaptive sport suspension Automatic transmission

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Car wash (care) ................................. 370 Maximum cooling .......................... 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Temperature gauge ........................ 263 Filling capacity ............................... 448

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Doors COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Exhaust check ............................... 182 Electronic Stability Program

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ESP® (Electronic Stability Fuel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

H Delayed switch-off (on-board

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 279 Switching the surround lighting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Geo fencing ................................... 358 N

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Off-road ABS .................................... 67 Outside temperature display ........... 264

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Rear fog lamp

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Roller sunblind Storing settings (memory function) 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Checking the battery ....................... 83 Steering wheel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Limiting the opening angle ............... 93 Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Direction of rotation ...................... 422 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 420

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

W Windshield washer system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You can influence both factors. You should

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster

Have aftermarket accessories installed at Vehicle equipment

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Information for customers in Maintenance